WO2012164474A2 - System and method for fast compensation programming of pixels in a display - Google Patents

System and method for fast compensation programming of pixels in a display Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2012164474A2
WO2012164474A2 PCT/IB2012/052651 IB2012052651W WO2012164474A2 WO 2012164474 A2 WO2012164474 A2 WO 2012164474A2 IB 2012052651 W IB2012052651 W IB 2012052651W WO 2012164474 A2 WO2012164474 A2 WO 2012164474A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
programming
voltage
transistor
capacitor
driving
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/IB2012/052651
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2012164474A3 (en
Inventor
Gholamreza Chaji
Jackson Chi SUN LAI
Yaser Azizi
Maran Ran MA
Original Assignee
Ignis Innovation Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ignis Innovation Inc. filed Critical Ignis Innovation Inc.
Priority to EP15173106.4A priority Critical patent/EP2945147B1/en
Priority to EP18181961.6A priority patent/EP3404646B1/en
Priority to JP2014513288A priority patent/JP2014522506A/en
Priority to CN201280026192.2A priority patent/CN103597534B/en
Priority to EP12792894.3A priority patent/EP2715711A4/en
Publication of WO2012164474A2 publication Critical patent/WO2012164474A2/en
Publication of WO2012164474A3 publication Critical patent/WO2012164474A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • G09G5/10Intensity circuits
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/22Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources
    • G09G3/30Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels
    • G09G3/32Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • G09G3/3208Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED]
    • G09G3/3275Details of drivers for data electrodes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/08Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
    • G09G2300/0809Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
    • G09G2300/0842Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor
    • G09G2300/0861Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor with additional control of the display period without amending the charge stored in a pixel memory, e.g. by means of additional select electrodes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2310/00Command of the display device
    • G09G2310/02Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
    • G09G2310/0224Details of interlacing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2310/00Command of the display device
    • G09G2310/02Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
    • G09G2310/0243Details of the generation of driving signals
    • G09G2310/0251Precharge or discharge of pixel before applying new pixel voltage
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2310/00Command of the display device
    • G09G2310/02Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
    • G09G2310/0243Details of the generation of driving signals
    • G09G2310/0259Details of the generation of driving signals with use of an analog or digital ramp generator in the column driver or in the pixel circuit
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/02Improving the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/029Improving the quality of display appearance by monitoring one or more pixels in the display panel, e.g. by monitoring a fixed reference pixel
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/04Maintaining the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/043Preventing or counteracting the effects of ageing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/04Maintaining the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/043Preventing or counteracting the effects of ageing
    • G09G2320/045Compensation of drifts in the characteristics of light emitting or modulating elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/06Adjustment of display parameters
    • G09G2320/0693Calibration of display systems

Definitions

  • the present disclosure generally relates to circuits and methods of driving, calibrating, and programming displays, particularly displays such as active matrix organic light emitting diode displays.
  • Displays can be created from an array of light emitting devices each controlled by individual circuits (i.e., pixel circuits) having transistors for selectively controlling the circuits to be programmed with display information and to emit light according to the display information.
  • Thin film transistors (“TFTs”) fabricated on a substrate can be incorporated into such displays. TFTs fabricated on poly-silicon tend to demonstrate non-uniform behavior across display panels and over time. Some displays therefore utilize compensation techniques to achieve image uniformity in poly-silicon TFT panels.
  • Compensated pixel circuits generally have shortcomings when pushing speed, pixel-pitch ("pixel density"), and uniformity to the limit, which leads to design trade-offs to balance competing demands amongst programming speed, pixel-pitch, and uniformity.
  • additional lines and transistors associated with each pixel circuit may allow for additional compensation leading to greater uniformity, yet undesirably decrease pixel-pitch.
  • programming speed may be increased by biasing or pre-charging each pixel circuit with a relatively high biasing current or initial charge, however, uniformity is enhanced by utilizing a relatively low biasing current or initial charge.
  • a display designer is forced to make trade-offs between competing demands for programming speed, pixel-pitch, and uniformity.
  • Displays configured to display a video feed of moving images typically refresh the display at a regular frequency for each frame of the video feed being displayed.
  • Displays incorporating an active matrix can allow individual pixel circuits to be programmed with display information during a program phase and then emit light according to the display information during an emission phase.
  • displays operate with a duty cycle characterized by the relative durations of the program phase and the emission phase.
  • the displays operate with a frequency that is characterized by the refresh rate of the display.
  • the refresh rate of the display can also be influenced by the frame rate of the video stream.
  • the display can be darkened during program phases while the pixel circuits are receiving programming information.
  • the display is repeatedly darkened and brightened at the refresh rate of the display. A viewer of the display can undesirably perceive that the display is flickering depending on the frequency of the refresh rate.
  • aspects of the present disclosure provide systems and methods for utilizing a current divider created by a storage capacitor within a pixel circuit and a capacitance associated with a data line coupled to the pixel circuit to divide a reference current applied to the data line.
  • the divided current simultaneously calibrates the pixel circuit and discharges the data line prior to a driving interval.
  • the portion of the reference current that discharges the data line can be of a greater magnitude than the portion of the reference current that calibrates the pixel circuit.
  • the reference current is divided according to the relative capacitance of the storage capacitor and the capacitance of the data line.
  • the data line is discharged quickly by a large current, while the current through a driving transistor within the pixel circuit remains small. Dividing the current in this manner simultaneously ensures that the data line is rapidly discharged and thus the pixel circuit is able to be programmed swiftly, while the current through the driving transistor is kept small to prevent the uniformity of the display from being adversely affected by the enhanced settling time.
  • aspects of the present disclosure also advantageously allow for applying a reference current ("biasing current”) through a data programming line rather than a separate line. Utilizing the same line for multiple purposes thus allows the pixel density to be increased and thereby increase display resolution by decreasing pixel size.
  • FIG. 1 Particular pixel circuit configurations suitable for implementation are provided, but it is recognized that the present disclosure applies to current programmed pixel circuits, pixel circuits with n-type or p-type transistors, and pixel circuits in a variety of possible configurations that allow for a storage capacitor to divide a reference current that is applied to a data line to simultaneously discharge the data line while calibrating the pixel circuit.
  • Other suitable configurations may include storage capacitors having one terminal coupled to a data line, with another terminal of the storage capacitor coupled to a current path of a driving transistor.
  • Aspects of the present disclosure further provide for methods of driving a display to decrease, or even eliminate, a perception of flickering in the display by increasing the refresh rate of the display.
  • each frame in the video stream may be displayed more than once in order to increase the refresh rate of the display beyond the frame rate of the video stream and thereby decrease the perception of flickering experienced at the frame rate of the video.
  • Aspects provide for implementations of the increased refresh rate in overlapping configurations where distinct portions of a display are updated sequentially during different refresh events, but all spanning a single frame time.
  • the distinct portions can be odd and even rows of the display, or halves, thirds, etc. of the display (e.g., top and bottom halves, left and right halves, etc.).
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram of an exemplary display system including includes an address driver, a data driver, a controller, a memory storage, and display panel.
  • FIG. 2A is a block diagram of an example pixel circuit configuration for a display that incorporates a monitoring line.
  • FIG. 2B is a circuit diagram including a pixel circuit for a display that is labeled to illustrate a current path during a program phase of the pixel circuit.
  • FIG. 2C is a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in FIG. 2A, which is labeled to illustrate a current path during an emission phase of the pixel circuit.
  • FIG. 2D is a timing diagram illustrating a programming and emission operation of the pixel circuit shown in FIGS. 2B and 2C.
  • FIG. 2E is an alternate timing diagram for the pixel circuit in FIGS. 2B and 2C which includes a voltage pre-charge cycle.
  • FIG. 2F is another alternate timing diagram for the pixel circuit in FIGS. 2B and 2C which includes a current pre-charge cycle.
  • FIG. 3A illustrates a graph of simulation results for drive current error versus mobility variations at low grayscale programming values.
  • FIG. 3B illustrates a graph of simulation results for drive current error versus mobility variations at high grayscale programming values.
  • FIG. 4A is a block diagram of another example pixel circuit for a display.
  • FIG. 4B is a circuit diagram including a pixel circuit for a display that is labeled to illustrate a current path during a pre-charge phase of the pixel circuit.
  • FIG. 4C is a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in FIG. 4B, which is labeled to illustrate a current path during a program phase of the pixel circuit.
  • FIG. 4D is a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in FIG. 4B, which is labeled to illustrate a current path during an emission phase of the pixel circuit.
  • FIG. 4E is a timing diagram illustrating pre-charging, compensation, and emission cycles of the pixel shown in FIGS. 4B-4D.
  • FIG. 4F is a timing diagram illustrating the change in voltage on the data line during the compensation phase shown schematically in FIG. 4C.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates a circuit diagram for a portion of a display showing two pixel circuits in an example configuration suited to providing enhanced settling time.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit diagram for a portion of a display showing two other pixel circuits in an example configuration also suited to providing enhanced settling time.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a circuit diagram for a portion of a display showing still two more pixel circuits in an example configuration also suited to providing enhanced settling time.
  • FIG. 8A is a circuit diagram of a pixel circuit configured to provide the pre- charging and compensation cycle simultaneously.
  • FIG. 8B is a timing diagram illustrating the operation of the simultaneous pre- charge and compensation cycle.
  • FIG. 9A illustrates an additional configuration of a pixel circuit configured to program the pixel circuit via a programming capacitor connected to a gate terminal of a drive transistor via a first selection transistor.
  • FIG. 9B is an alternative pixel circuit configured similarly to the pixel circuit shown in FIG. 9A, but with an additional switch transistor connected in series with the second switch transistor.
  • FIG. 10 is a timing diagram describing an exemplary operation of the pixel circuit of FIG. 9A or the pixel circuit of FIG. 9B.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a circuit diagram of a portion of a display panel in which multiple pixel circuits are arranged to share a common programming capacitor.
  • FIG. 12A is a timing diagram of an exemplary operation of the "kth" segment shown in FIG. 11.
  • FIG. 12B is a timing diagram of another exemplary operation of the "kth" segment shown in FIG. 11.
  • FIG. 13A is a timing diagram for driving a single frame of a segmented display.
  • FIG. 13B is a flow chart corresponding to the timing diagram shown in FIG. 13 A.
  • FIGS. 14A and 14B provide experimental results of percentage errors in pixel currents given variations in device parameters for pixel circuits such as those shown in FIGS. 9 A and 9B.
  • FIG. 15A is a circuit diagram showing a portion of the gate driver including control lines (“CNTi") to regulate the first select lines for each segment.
  • CNTi control lines
  • FIG. 15B is a diagram of the first two gate outputs which are used to provide the first select lines for the first two segments.
  • FIG. 16 is a timing diagram for a display array operated by an address driver utilizing control lines to generate the first select line signals.
  • FIG. 17A is a block diagram of a source driver with an integrated voltage ramp generator for driving each data line in a display panel.
  • FIG. 17B is a block diagram of another source driver that provides a ramp voltage for each data line in a display panel and includes a cyclic digital to analog converter.
  • FIG. 18A is a display system including a demultiplexer to share multiple data lines with a single output terminal of the source driver.
  • FIG. 18B is a timing diagram for the display array shown in FIG. 18A illustrating problems in setting pixels to new data values.
  • FIG. 18C is a timing diagram for operation of the display system shown in FIG. 18A, which pre-charges data line capacitances before selecting rows for programming.
  • FIG. 19A pictorially illustrates a programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle.
  • FIG. 19B pictorially illustrates an example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle, which is adapted to decrease flickering associated with the display.
  • FIG. 20A pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50%> duty cycle similar to FIG. 19B, but with a frame time two times as long as the frame time illustrated by FIG. 19B.
  • FIG. 20B pictorially illustrates yet another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50%> duty cycle similar to FIG. 19B, but with a frame time three times as long as the frame time illustrated by FIG. 19B.
  • FIG. 21 A pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame while separately programming portions of the display during distinct program phases.
  • FIG. 2 IB pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame while separately programming interlaced portions of the display during distinct program phases.
  • FIG. 21C pictorially illustrates example programming and emission sequences for displaying a single frame where the sequence illustrated in FIG. 21B is followed by additional emission and idle phases or where the sequence illustrated in FIG. 2 IB is interrupted by additional programming and idle phases.
  • FIG. 2 ID pictorially illustrates still another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame where portions of the display are sorted into four interlaced groupings according to row numbers and each portion is separately programmed.
  • FIG. 22A is a block diagram of a circuit layout for connecting alternating rows of a display panel to distinct data lines.
  • FIG. 22B is a block diagram of a circuit layout for connecting interlaced pixels of a display panel to distinct data lines.
  • FIG. 23A is a timing diagram for a display panel with distinct portions that are programmed in distinct intervals and which share data lines.
  • FIG. 23B is a timing diagram for a display panel with distinct portions that are programmed in distinct intervals and which do not share data lines.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates a bidirectional current source in accordance with an embodiment of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an example of a display system with the bidirectional current source of FIG. 24.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates a further example of a display system with the bidirectional current source of FIG. 24.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates a further example of a display system with the bidirectional current source of FIG. 24.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates a further example of a display system with the bidirectional current source of FIG. 24.
  • FIG. 29A illustrates an example of a current biased voltage programmed pixel circuit applicable to the display system of FIG. 28.
  • FIG. 29B illustrates an example of a timing diagram for the pixel circuit of FIG.
  • FIG. 30A illustrates simulation results for the pixel circuit of FIG. 29A.
  • FIG. 30B illustrates further simulation results for the pixel circuit of FIG. 29A.
  • Embodiments of the present invention are described using a display system that may be fabricated using different fabrication technologies including, for example, but not limited to, amorphous silicon, poly silicon, metal oxide, conventional CMOS, organic, anon/micro crystalline semiconductors or combinations thereof.
  • the display system includes a pixel that may have a transistor, a capacitor and a light emitting device.
  • the transistor may be implemented in a variety of materials systems technologies including, amorphous Si, micro/nano-crystalline Si, poly-crystalline Si, organic/polymer materials and related nanocomposites, semiconducting oxides or combinations thereof.
  • the capacitor can have different structure including metal-insulator-metal and metal-insulator-semiconductor.
  • the light emitting device may be, for example, but not limited to, an OLED.
  • the display system may be, but not limited to, an AMOLED display system.
  • pixel circuit and “pixel” may be used interchangeably.
  • Each transistor may have a gate terminal and two other terminals (first and second terminals).
  • one of the terminals or "first terminal” (the other terminal or “second terminal") of a transistor may correspond to, but not limited to, a drain terminal (a source terminal) or a source terminal (a drain terminal).
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram of an exemplary display system 50.
  • the display system 50 includes an address driver 8, a data driver 4, a controller 2, a memory storage 6, and a display panel 20.
  • the display panel 20 includes an array of pixels 10 arranged in rows and columns. Each of the pixels 10 are individually programmable to emit light with individually programmable luminance values.
  • the controller 2 receives digital data indicative of information to be displayed on the display panel 20 (such as a video stream).
  • the controller 2 sends signals 32 to the data driver 4 and scheduling signals 34 to the address driver 8 to drive the pixels 10 in the display panel 20 to display the information indicated.
  • the plurality of pixels 10 associated with the display panel 20 thus comprise a display array ("display screen") adapted to dynamically display information according to the input digital data received by the controller 2.
  • the display screen can display, for example, video information from a stream of video data received by the controller 2.
  • the supply voltage 14 can provide constant power voltage(s) or can be an adjustable voltage supply that is controlled by signals 38 from the controller 2.
  • the display system 50 can also incorporate features from a current source or sink (e.g., the current source 134 in FIG. 2B or the current source 234 in FIG. 4C) to provide biasing currents to the pixels 10 in the display panel 20 to thereby decrease programming time for the pixels 10.
  • the display system 50 in FIG. 1 is illustrated with only four pixels 10 in the display panel 20. It is understood that the display system 50 can be implemented with a display screen that includes an array of similar pixels, such as the pixels 10, and that the display screen is not limited to a particular number of rows and columns of pixels. For example, the display system 50 can be implemented with a display screen with a number of rows and columns of pixels commonly available in displays for mobile devices, monitor-based devices, and/or projection-devices.
  • the pixel 10 is operated by a driving circuit (“pixel circuit") that generally includes a driving transistor and a light emitting device.
  • the pixel 10 may refer to the pixel circuit.
  • the light emitting device can optionally be an organic light emitting diode, but implementations of the present disclosure apply to pixel circuits having other electroluminescence devices, including current-driven light emitting devices.
  • the driving transistor in the pixel 10 can include thin film transistors ("TFTs”), which an optionally be n- type or p-type amorphous silicon TFTs or poly-silicon TFTs. However, implementations of the present disclosure are not limited to pixel circuits having a particular polarity or material of transistor or only to pixel circuits having TFTs.
  • the pixel circuit 10 can also include a storage capacitor for storing programming information and allowing the pixel circuit 10 to drive the light emitting device after being addressed.
  • the display panel 20 can be an active matrix display array.
  • the pixel 10 illustrated as the top-left pixel in the display panel 20 is coupled to a select line 24i, supply line 26i, 27i, a data line 22j, and a monitor line 28j.
  • the first supply line 26i can be charged with VDD and the second supply line 27i can be charged with VSS.
  • the pixel circuits 10 can be situated between the first and second supply lines to allow driving currents to flow between the two supply lines 26i, 27i during an emission cycle of the pixel circuit.
  • the top-left pixel 10 in the display panel 20 can correspond to a pixel in the display panel in a "ith" row and "jth" column of the display panel 20.
  • the top- right pixel 10 in the display panel 20 represents a "ith" row and “mth” column; the bottom- left pixel 10 represents an “nth” row and “jth” column; and the bottom-right pixel 10 represents an "nth” row and “mth” column.
  • Each of the pixels 10 is coupled to appropriate select lines (e.g., the select lines 24i and 24n), supply lines (e.g., the supply lines 26i, 26n, and 27i, 27n), data lines (e.g., the data lines 22j and 22m), and monitor lines (e.g., the monitor lines 28j and 28m). It is noted that aspects of the present disclosure apply to pixels having additional connections, such as connections to additional select lines, including global select lines, and to pixels having fewer connections, such as pixels lacking a connection to a monitoring line.
  • the select line 24i is provided by the address driver 8, and can be utilized to enable, for example, a programming operation of the pixel 10 by activating a switch or transistor to allow the data line 22j to program the pixel 10.
  • the data line 22j conveys programming information from the data driver 4 to the pixel 10.
  • the data line 22j can be utilized to apply a programming voltage or a programming current to the pixel 10 in order to program the pixel 10 to emit a desired amount of luminance.
  • the programming voltage (or programming current) supplied by the data driver 4 via the data line 22j is a voltage (or current) appropriate to cause the pixel 10 to emit light with a desired amount of luminance according to the digital data received by the controller 2.
  • the programming voltage can be applied to the pixel 10 during a programming operation of the pixel 10 so as to charge a storage device within the pixel 10, such as a storage capacitor, thereby enabling the pixel 10 to emit light with the desired amount of luminance during an emission operation following the programming operation.
  • a storage device within the pixel 10 such as a storage capacitor
  • the storage device in the pixel 10 can be charged during the programming operation to apply a voltage to one or more of a gate or a source terminal of the driving transistor during the emission operation, thereby causing the driving transistor to convey the driving current through the light emitting device according to the voltage stored on the storage device.
  • the driving current that is conveyed through the light emitting device by the driving transistor during the emission operation of the pixel 10 is a current that is supplied by the first supply line 26i and is drained to the second supply line 27i.
  • the first supply line 26i and the second supply line 27i are coupled to the voltage supply 14.
  • the first supply line 26i can provide a positive supply voltage (e.g., the voltage commonly referred to in circuit design as "Vdd") and the second supply line 27i can provide a negative supply voltage (e.g., the voltage commonly referred to in circuit design as "Vss").
  • Implementations of the present disclosure can be realized where one or the other of the supply lines (e.g., the supply lines 26i, 27i) are fixed at a ground voltage or at another reference voltage. Implementations of the present disclosure also apply to systems where the voltage supply 14 is implemented to adjustably control the voltage levels provided on one or both of the supply lines (e.g,. the supply lines 26i, 27i). The output voltages of the voltage supply 14 can be dynamically adjusted according to control signals 38 from the controller 2. Implementations of the present disclosure also apply to systems where one or both of the voltage supply lines 26i, 27i are shared by more than one row of pixels in the display panel 20.
  • the display system 50 also includes a monitoring system 12. With reference again to the top left pixel 10 in the display panel 20, the monitor line 28j connects the pixel 10 to the monitoring system 12.
  • the monitoring system 12 can be integrated with the data driver 4, or can be a separate stand-alone system. Furthermore, the monitoring system 12 can optionally be implemented by monitoring the current and/or voltage of the data line 22j during a monitoring operation of the pixel 10, and the monitor line 28j can be entirely omitted. Additionally, the display system 50 can be implemented without the monitoring system 12 or the monitor line 28j.
  • the monitor line 28j allows the monitoring system 12 to measure a current and/or voltage associated with the pixel 10 and thereby extract information indicative of a degradation of the pixel 10.
  • the monitoring system 12 can extract, via the monitor line 28j, a current flowing through the driving transistor within the pixel 10 and thereby determine, based on the measured current and based on the voltages applied to the driving transistor during the measurement, a threshold voltage of the driving transistor or a shift thereof. Furthermore, a voltage extracted via the monitoring lines 28j, 28m can be indicative of a degradation in the respective pixels 10 due to changes in the current-voltage characteristics of the pixels 10 or due to shifts in the operating voltages of light emitting devices situated within the pixels 10.
  • the monitoring system 12 can also extract an operating voltage of the light emitting device (e.g., a voltage drop across the light emitting device while the light emitting device is operating to emit light). The monitoring system 12 can then communicate the signals 32 to the controller 2 and/or the memory 6 to allow the display system 50 to store the extracted degradation information in the memory 6. During subsequent programming and/or emission operations of the pixel 10, the degradation information is retrieved from the memory 6 by the controller 2 via the memory signals 36, and the controller 2 then compensates for the extracted degradation information in subsequent programming and/or emission operations of the pixel 10.
  • an operating voltage of the light emitting device e.g., a voltage drop across the light emitting device while the light emitting device is operating to emit light.
  • the monitoring system 12 can then communicate the signals 32 to the controller 2 and/or the memory 6 to allow the display system 50 to store the extracted degradation information in the memory 6.
  • the degradation information is retrieved from the memory 6 by the controller 2 via the memory signals 36, and the controller 2 then compensates for the extracted degradation information in subsequent programming and
  • the programming information conveyed to the pixel 10 during a subsequent programming operation can be appropriately adjusted such that the pixel 10 emits light with a desired amount of luminance that is independent of the degradation of the pixel 10.
  • an increase in the threshold voltage of the driving transistor within the pixel 10 can be compensated for by appropriately increasing the programming voltage applied to the pixel 10.
  • FIG. 2A is a block diagram of an example pixel circuit configuration 110 for the display system 50 that incorporates the monitoring line 28j.
  • TFTs fabricated in poly-silicon tend to demonstrate non-uniform behavior across a display panel (e.g,. the display panel 20) and over time (e.g., over a display's operating life time). Compensation techniques to achieve image uniformity in poly-silicon TFT panels, as well as other TFT materials (e.g., amorphous silicon, etc.), are provided herein.
  • the general functionality of compensation techniques relies on the application of a uniform reference current to the pixel circuit.
  • the reference current is used to develop a gate-to-source voltage on the TFT drive device. This voltage is a function of threshold, mobility, and other parameters across panel, time and temperature variations.
  • the developed voltage is stored on the storage element which is then used as a calibration factor to provide programming to the pixel.
  • programming data is modified according to the calibration factor stored in the storage element.
  • Such compensated pixel circuits thus have some shortcoming when pushing the programming speed, pixel density, and uniformity to their respective limits, and a display designer is therefore required to make design choices.
  • Modified techniques and driving schemes are presented in this disclosure to tackle the challenges of compensation method(s) requiring such design trade-offs.
  • the pixel circuit 110 of FIG. 2A features a dedicated monitor line 28j and a monitor switch 120 to apply the reference current to the selected pixel out of a vertical column of pixels (e.g., the pixels in the "jth" column) on the panel 20.
  • the voltage on the voltage supply line 26i (“V DD ") is toggled low to V DDL by the voltage supply 14 during the programming cycle to avoid interference from the light emitting device 114 ("OLED").
  • OLED light emitting device
  • FIG. 2A illustrates a block diagram of a pixel circuit 110, which can be implemented as the pixel 10 in the display system 50 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the pixel circuit 110 includes a drive device 112, which can be a drive transistor, a storage element 116, which can be a storage capacitor, an access switch 118, which can be a switch transistor, and a monitor switch 122.
  • the drive transistor 112 conveys a driving current to the light emitting device 114 ("OLED") according to a programming voltage stored on the storage capacitor 116 and applied to the gate and/or source terminals of the drive transistor 112.
  • the programming voltage is developed on the storage capacitor 116 by selectively connecting one and/or both terminals of the storage capacitor 116 to the data line 22j via the switch transistor 118.
  • the switch transistor 118 is operated according to the select line 24i and/or the emission line 25, which can be a global select line that is shared by pixels in more than one row of the display array 20.
  • FIG. 2B is a circuit diagram including an exemplary implementation of the pixel circuit 110 represented by the block diagram in FIG. 2A.
  • the circuit diagram in FIG. 2B is labeled with an arrow 150 to illustrate a current path through the pixel circuit 110 during a programming cycle 160.
  • the circuit diagram in FIB. 2C is labeled with an arrow 154 to illustrate a current path through the pixel circuit 110 during an emission cycle 164.
  • Transistors illustrated in the circuit diagrams in FIGS. 2B and 2C which are turned off during the respectively illustrated operation cycles are illustrated with hashed marks to indicate they are turned off.
  • a timing diagram illustrating the programming cycle 150 and emission cycle 160 is provided in FIG. 2D.
  • the pixel circuit 110 illustrated in FIGS. 2B and 2C will thus be described in connection with the timing diagram in FIG. 2D.
  • the reference current "(I REF ") flows directly through the drive device 112 ("drive transistor") which can be, for example, a poly- silicon TFT.
  • drive transistor which can be, for example, a poly- silicon TFT.
  • K is the current factor of the drive TFT 112 which is a function of mobility ( ⁇ ), unit gate oxide (C ox ), and the aspect ratio of the device (W/L), as shown in equation 2:
  • the voltage on the gate terminal (i.e., the gate voltage) on the drive transistor 112 also sets the voltage on one side of the storage element 116 ("storage capacitor Cs")- As shown in FIG. 2B, the gate node 112g, which is directly connected to both the gate terminal of the drive transistor 112 and one terminal of the storage capacitor 116, is labeled as having V GO - Meanwhile, during the programming cycle 150, the other side ("second terminal") of the storage capacitor 116 is set to the desired data voltage, V D , which is a representative of the grayscale luminance level to be programmed. The data voltage V D is programmed through the data line 22j by an output channel of the source driver 4. At the end of the programming cycle 150, the voltage stored on the storage capacitor 116 is given by equation 3:
  • V C V D - V GO (3)
  • the select transistor 118 and the monitor switch transistor 120 are deactivated by setting the select line 24i to a high level.
  • An additional period 152 can then elapse while other rows (e.g., the "nth" row selected by the select line 24n) in the display panel 20 are programmed.
  • An emission cycle 154 can then be commenced once all rows are programmed. Additionally or alternatively, the emission cycle 154 can be commenced once each individual row is programmed without waiting for other rows to be programmed during the period 152.
  • the data line 22j is isolated from the source driver 6 and connected to a reference voltage V REF - AS shown in FIGS.
  • isolating the data line 22j can be accomplished by coupling the data line 22j to the source driver 6 via a programming switch 130 operated according to a programming signal ("Prog") conveyed on a programming line 138.
  • the reference voltage V REF can then be supplied to the data line 22j via a switch transistor 132 operated according to an emission signal (“EM”) conveyed on an emission control line 25.
  • EM emission signal
  • One or both of the emission control line 25 and the programming line 138 can be implemented as global signals to simultaneously control the connections to the data line 22j across the entire display panel 20, or to portions thereof.
  • the voltage on the supply voltage line 26i is toggled to V DDH , which can be considered an operating voltage of the supply voltage line 26i which is sufficient to turn the OLED 114 on. Accordingly, the gate-source voltage of the drive transistor 112 is given by equation 5 :
  • Equation 8 confirms that the above described compensation technique eliminates the first order effects of the threshold voltage variations from the drive current.
  • FIG. 3A illustrates a graph of simulation results for drive current error versus mobility variations at low grayscale programming values.
  • FIG. 3B illustrates a graph of simulation results for drive current error versus mobility variations at high grayscale programming values.
  • the effectiveness of the compensation for mobility variations is affected by the amount of the reference current I REF -
  • the compensation in both low and high grayscale levels, as shown in FIG. 3A and FIG. 3B, respectively, is more effective when a lower value of the reference current is utilized. Accordingly, to realize effective compensation across the display panel 20, a low reference current is preferred.
  • the monitor line 28j introduces a significant parasitic capacitance 136 to the signal path of the reference current I REF - Accordingly, a large value of the reference current I REF is sought so as to achieve fast settling time. Therefore, in the compensation techniques described in reference to FIGS. 2A-2D, there is a trade-off between achievable uniformity and settling time when designing for a particular value of the reference current I REF .
  • PPI pixel per inch
  • a two cycle programming including a precharging cycle 160a, 161a and an adjustment cycle 160b, 161b is discussed below which can improve the effectiveness of compensation.
  • the two cycle programming techniques are illustrated by the timing diagrams in FIGS. 2E and 2F, respectively.
  • the modified compensation techniques disclosed next break the speed-uniformity trade-off and are fully compatible with available industry standards and driver components. These techniques therefore offer a significant performance improvement which can be implemented without substantial fabrication modifications that require extensive capital investments.
  • One approach of implementing a two-phase compensation technique is to precharge the capacitance 136 of the monitor line 28j during a pre-charging cycle 150a and then allow some time (T p ) for the drive transistor 112 to adjust the voltage on the data line 22j during an adjustment cycle 160b.
  • the monitor switch transistor 120 can disconnect the monitor line 28j from the pixel circuit 110 during the adjustment cycle 160b.
  • the timing diagram in FIG. 2E illustrates the voltage pre-charging approach to pre-charge the capacitance 136.
  • the precharging can be accomplished by setting the voltage on the monitor line 28j to a constant value Vp reQ . In this case, it can be shown that the drive current is given by equation 9:
  • T p is the adjustment time
  • Vp is the program voltage
  • is the time constant of the charge path through the drive device.
  • Another alternative is to precharge the monitor line 28j by applying a relatively high reference current I REF to the monitor line 28j such that the settling requirement is achieved in spite of the parasitic capacitance 136 of the monitor line 28j.
  • the reference current I REF can be applied during a pre-charging cycle 161a. Then, the reference current I REF is removed from the monitor line 28j and the drive device 112 is allowed to adjust the voltage on the data line 22j during an adjustment cycle 161b.
  • the monitor switch transistor 120 can disconnect the monitor line 28j from the pixel circuit 110 during the adjustment cycle 151b. In this case, it can be shown that the drive current is given by equation 12:
  • FIG. 4A illustrates a block diagram of a pixel circuit 210, which can be implemented as the pixel 10 in the display system 50 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the pixel circuit 210 includes a drive device 212, which can be a drive transistor, a storage element 216, which can be a storage capacitor, an access switch 218, which can be a switch transistor, and a control switch 222.
  • the drive transistor 212 conveys a driving current to the light emitting device 214 ("OLED") according to a programming voltage stored on the storage capacitor 216.
  • the programming voltage is applied to the gate and/or source terminals of the drive transistor 212 to control the driving current.
  • the programming voltage is developed on the storage capacitor 216 by selectively coupling a first terminal of the storage capacitor 216 to a second terminal of the drive transistor 212 via the switch transistor 218.
  • the second terminal of the storage capacitor 216 is coupled to a data line 22j.
  • a gate terminal of the drive transistor 212 is coupled to the first terminal of the storage capacitor 216 at a gate node 212g, and the first terminal of the drive transistor 212 is connected to the voltage supply line 26i.
  • the switch transistor 218 is operated according to the select line 24i and/or the emission line 25, which can be a global select line that is shared by pixels in more than one row of the display array 20.
  • the emission transistor 222 is controlled by the emission line 25 to be turned on during an emission cycle 266 of the pixel circuit 210, and to disconnect the light emitting device 214 from the drive transistor 212 during periods other than the emission cycle 266.
  • FIG 4B illustrates an exemplary circuit diagram for the pixel circuit 210, which is labeled with an arrow 250 to show the current path through the pixel during a pre-charging cycle 260 of the pixel circuit.
  • FIG. 4C illustrates the pixel circuit 210 shown in FIG. 4B, but labeled with arrows 252, 252L, and 252P to show the current path through the pixel during a compensation cycle 262 following the pre-charging cycle 260.
  • FIG. 4D illustrates the pixel circuit 210 shown in FIG. 4A, but labeled with an arrow 256 to show the current path through the pixel during an emission cycle 266.
  • FIG. 4E illustrates a timing diagram illustrating the operation of the pixel 210 during the pre-charging, compensation, and emission cycles 260, 262, 266.
  • FIG. 4F provides an enhanced view of the voltage level on the data line 22j during the compensation cycle 262. Accordingly, the features illustrated by FIGS. 4A-4F will be described jointly below.
  • a reference current I REF is applied through the data line 22j which introduces several advantages relative to the pixel circuit 110 shown in FIG. 2A.
  • the dedicated monitor line 28j and monitor switch 120 are eliminated in the pixel circuit 210.
  • a considerable amount of area is freed up on the display panel 20 which enables very high density pixel layout.
  • a control switch 222 is placed in series with the OLED 214 to eliminate the need for toggling the voltage of the supply voltage line 26i during the programming phase.
  • the voltage of the supply voltage line 26i (or the supply voltage line 27i) is toggled to a low voltage (or high voltage) during the programming cycle 150 to prevent the OLED 114 from emitting light during programming.
  • the gate terminal of the drive transistor 212 is directly coupled to a first terminal of the storage capacitor 216 at a gate node 212g.
  • the second terminal of the storage capacitor 216 is coupled to the data line 22j.
  • the switch transistor 218 is connected between the gate node 212g and a second terminal (e.g., a drain terminal) of the drive transistor 212 while the first terminal (e.g., a source terminal) of the drive transistor 212 is coupled to the voltage supply line 26i.
  • the three-cycle operation of the compensation technique is illustrated in FIGS.
  • an emission transistor 222 situated in series with the OLED 214 turns the OLED 214 off during the pre- charging and compensation cycles 260, 262.
  • operation begins with a precharge cycle 260.
  • the emission line 25 is set high to keep the emission transistor 222 turned off.
  • the emission line 25 is also coupled to a switch transistor 132 to keep the data line 22j disconnected from a reference voltage source during the pre-charging and programming cycles 260, 262.
  • a desired row, such as the "ith" row is selected by setting the select line 24i low, which turns on the switch transistor 218, and the data line 22j is precharged to the given program voltage, Vp.
  • the arrow 250 illustrates the current flow during the pre-charging cycle 260 to charge the capacitance 23j of the data line 22j. Simultaneously, because the select transistor 218 is turned on, current flows through the drive transistor 212 until the gate-source voltage of the drive transistor 212 settles at a level sufficient to turn off the drive transistor 212. At the end of the pre-charging cycle 260, the voltage that is developed on the gate terminal of the drive transistor 212 (i.e., at the gate node 212g) is given by equation 14:
  • a reference current IREF is applied to the data line 22j.
  • the pixel circuit 210 advantageously allows the reference current IREF to not flow directly through the drive transistor 212 of the pixel circuit 210. Instead, as will be described in reference to FIG. 4C, only a small portion (I p i xel ) of the reference current I RE F passes through the storage capacitor 216 and the drive transistor 212. A larger portion (Iii ne ) of the reference current IREF is utilized to charge/discharge the capacitance 23j of the data line 22j. Accordingly, a pixel circuit is realized providing both good compensation and fast settling concurrently ("simultaneously").
  • the reference current I RE F is thus divided between the data line 22j and the driving transistor 212 by the configuration of the respective capacitances of the storage capacitor 216 and the capacitance 23j associated with the data line 22j.
  • FIG. 4C is labeled with arrows 252, 252L, 252P to illustrate a current path during the compensation cycle 262 of the pixel circuit 210.
  • the data switch transistor 130 is turned off by the program signal ("Prog") conveyed on the program line 138 and the reference current I RE F is applied to the data line 22j by the current source 234.
  • I RE F is divided into two components: Iii ne which discharges the capacitance 23j of the data line 22j, and I p i Xe i which flows through the drive transistor 212 and across the storage capacitor 216.
  • the current path of I p i xel is illustrated by the arrow 252P and the current path of Iii ne is illustrated by the arrow 252L.
  • the currents Iii ne and I p i xel join at the data line 22j to cumulatively form the reference current I REF , which is illustrated by the arrow 252.
  • the capacitance 23j of the data line 22j and the storage capacitor 216 thus act as a current divider for the reference current I REF -
  • These components are constant portions of the reference current I REF as given by equations 15 and 16:
  • Iii ne discharges the data line 22j at a constant rate during the compensation cycle 262. This creates a declining voltage on the data line 22j as shown in FIGS. 4E and 4F.
  • FIG. 4F is an enhanced view of the voltage on the data line 22j during the compensation cycle 262 to better illustrate the declining voltage ramp.
  • the total change in voltage on the data line 22j during the compensation cycle 22j is given by equation 17:
  • t prog is the length of the compensation cycle 262.
  • the I p i xel component of the reference current I REF develops a voltage across the gate-source terminals of the drive transistor 212 which is a function of its threshold voltage, mobility, oxide-thickness, and other second-order parameters (e.g. drain and source resistance).
  • the resulting gate-source voltage on the drive transistor 212 is given by equation 18:
  • the gate voltage of the drive transistor 212 (i.e., the voltage at the gate node 212g) is given by equation 19:
  • the voltage stored on the storage capacitor 216 is equal to VP -VR -VG which is a function of both the pixel program voltage (VP) and the characteristics of the drive transistor 212 (e.g., due to the contribution of VG).
  • the pre-charging cycle 260 and the compensation cycle 262 are repeated for every row of the panel 20 during the period 264.
  • FIG. 4D is labeled with an arrow 256 to illustrate a current path during an emission cycle 266 of the pixel circuit 210.
  • the emission cycle 266 begins by turning the switch transistor 132 on to set the data line 22j at the reference voltage V REF - Setting the data line 22j at the reference voltage V REF references the second terminal of the storage capacitor 216 to the reference voltage V REF -
  • the reference voltage V REF can be chosen to be equal to VDD.
  • the emission transistor 222 is also turned on during the emission cycle 266.
  • both the switch transistor 132 and the emission transistor 222 can be controlled by an emission control line 25 conveying a global emission control signal.
  • the gate-to-source over-drive voltage of the drive transistor 212 is Vov, as given by equation 20:
  • the over-drive voltage Vov is thus independent of the threshold voltage of the drive transistor 212.
  • the effective drive current of the pixel circuit 210 can hence be designed to be minimally affected by the variations of mobility, oxide thickness, and other varying TFT device parameters.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates an exemplary circuit diagram for a portion of a display 20 showing two pixel circuits 210a, 211a in an example configuration that can implement the two-cycle compensation technique described in connection with FIG. 4E.
  • the pixel architecture of FIG. 5 also offers a display designer the option of segmenting the display panel 20 into multiple segments that can be separately programmed or driven according to global select lines (e.g., the global select line 246) ("GSEL[k]").
  • GSEL[k] global select lines
  • the pixel circuit 210a is in the "ith" row and "jth” column of the display panel 20. Also illustrated is the pixel circuit 211a, which is in the next (i.e., "(i+l)th") row and the "jth” column. Both of the pixel circuits 210a and 211a are also in the "kth" segment of the display panel 20. Accordingly, the segmented data line 248 which is shared by the pixel circuits 210a, 211a is coupled to the data line 22j via the segment transistor 244. While the segment transistor 244 is turned on, the segment data line 248 receives voltages and currents applied to the data line 22j. However, while the segment transistor 244 is turned off (e.g., by setting the segment control line 246 high) the segment data line 248 is not connected to the data line 22j.
  • This segmented feature illustrated by the configuration in FIG. 5 can allow the data line 22j to be utilized to program other segments of the display array 20 (which are selectively coupled to the data line 22j by their own respective segment transistors) while the "kth" segment is driven to emit light during an emission cycle for the "kth” segment.
  • separate segments can be controlled to implement different operations simultaneously (i.e., in parallel) and thereby either increase the time available for pre-charging, programming, and/or compensating each row of the display array 20.
  • the segmented driving scheme can allow the effective refresh rate of the display system 50 to be increased.
  • the segmented arrangement allows parallel operations.
  • half of the display panel 20 can be programmed during a first period while the other half is operated in an emission cycle, and then the second half of the display panel 20 can be programmed during a second period while the first half is operated in an emission cycle.
  • the display array can be divided into segments consisting of two rows of pixels each such that each segmented data line (e.g., 248) can be used for two rows.
  • the "ith" row of the display can be the "(2k)th” row and "(i+l)th” row of the display can be the "(2k+l)th” row, with k an integer between 0 and N/2 where N is the number of rows in the display panel 20.
  • the display can be divided into a plurality of segments each including two or more rows of the display panel 20, and each of the segments having a respective segment transistor to selectively connect to the data line 22j.
  • Such a segmented display panel 20 can then operated such that each segment is connected to the data line 22j, while the data line 22j conveys programming and/or compensation signals to the pixels in the segment, and then the respective segment can be disconnected while the data line 22j is fixed at a reference voltage V REF -
  • FIG. 6 illustrates another circuit diagram for a portion of a display showing a first and second pixel circuit 210b and 211b configured suitably to implement the two-cycle pre- charging and compensation cycles 260, 262 described in connection with FIG. 4E.
  • the pixel circuits 210b, 211b are arranged similarly to the pixel circuit 210 described in FIGS. 4B to 4D.
  • the reference current source 234 can be arranged at one side (e.g., the top side) of the display panel 20 while the source driver 4 can be arranged at the other side (e.g., the bottom side) of the display panel.
  • Each of the source driver 4 and the reference current source 234 are selectively connected to the data line 22j via respective calibration switch transistor 240 (operated by the calibration control line 242) and the programming switch transistor 130 (operated by the programming control line 138).
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a circuit diagram for a portion of a display showing still two more pixel circuits 210c, 211c in an example configuration also suited to provide enhanced settling time via the two-cycle pre-charging and compensation scheme described in connection with FIG. 4E.
  • the voltage of the voltage supply line 26i is toggled to prevent emission during the pre-charging and compensation cycles 260, 262.
  • Toggling the voltage supply line 26i is not implemented for the pixel circuits shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, which incorporate emission control transistors 222.
  • all three circuit configurations 210a-c are fully compatible with available source-driver and gate-driver microchips.
  • Implementing the two-cycle programming technique may require modifications to timing controllers, such as the controller 2, the address driver 8, and/or the source driver 4 described in connection with the display system 50 of FIG. 1 in order to provide the functions described in connection with FIGS. 4A through 7.
  • FIG. 8A illustrates an additional configuration of a pixel circuit 310 providing power supply voltage V DD via the data line 322j.
  • the pixel circuit 310 can be implemented in the display system 50 described above in connection with FIG. 1. However, as shown, the pixel circuit 310 does not utilize a separate monitoring line. Furthermore, the pixel circuit 310 does not utilize a separate voltage supply line 26i.
  • the pixel circuit 310 is configured to allow compensation for pixel aging to occur simultaneously with programming, and thereby increase the time available for programming and/or compensation in the pixel circuit 310, as well as decrease the requirements for switching speed of the transistors.
  • the pixel circuit 310 includes a drive transistor 312 coupled in series with a light emitting device 314, which can be an organic light emitting diode ("OLED") or another current-driven light emissive device.
  • the pixel circuit 310 also includes a storage capacitor 316 having a first terminal coupled to a gate terminal of the drive transistor 312. The first terminal of the storage capacitor 316 and the gate terminal of the drive transistor 312 are thus electrically connected to a common node 312g, which is referred to for convenience as a gate node 312g.
  • a switch transistor 318 operated by the select line 24i selectively couples the gate node 312g (and thus the first terminal of the storage capacitor 316 and the gate terminal of the drive transistor 312) to a second terminal of the drive transistor 312, which can be a drain terminal.
  • the second terminal of the storage capacitor 316 is connected to a bias line 329, which provides a bias current Ibias to provide compensation to the pixel circuit 310.
  • the pixel circuits 210, 210a-c described above implement compensation and programming in a two-phase operation to first pre-charge the data line (in the pre-charging cycle 260) and then apply the bias current (e.g., the reference current I REF ) to provide compensation while simultaneously discharging the data line (during the compensation cycle 262).
  • the pixel circuit 310 provides data programming via the data line 322j while simultaneously applying the bias current via the bias line 329 during a programming cycle 360.
  • the data line 322j is also utilized to provide a power supply voltage V DD during the emission cycle 364 of the pixel circuit 210.
  • the pixel circuit 310 also includes an emission control transistor 322 operated according to an emission control line 25.
  • the emission control transistor 322 is arranged between the drain terminal of the drive transistor 312 and the light emitting device 314 so as to selectively connect the light emitting device 314 to the drive transistor 312.
  • the emission control transistor 322 can be turned on during an emission cycle 364 of the pixel circuit 310 to allow the pixel circuit 310 to drive the light emitting device 314 to emit light according to programming information.
  • the emission control transistor 322 can be turned off during cycles of the pixel circuit 310 other than an emission cycle 366, such as, for example, the programming cycle 360.
  • the emission control transistor 322 is selectively turned on and off according to the emission control signal conveyed via the emission control line 25. It is specifically noted that the pixel circuit 310 can be implemented without the emission control transistor 322 by selectively adjusting the voltage of the supply line 27i to increase VSS during the programming cycle 360 so as to turn off the light emitting device 314.
  • FIG. 8B is a timing diagram illustrating an exemplary operation of the pixel circuit 310 shown in FIG. 8 A.
  • operation of the pixel circuit 310 includes two phases for each pixel: a programming and compensation cycle 360 and an emission cycle 364.
  • the programming and compensation phase 360 is a time period during which a single row of a pixel array is programmed and compensated.
  • the programming and compensation of other rows of the display panel 20 can be carried out during the time period 362.
  • the select line 24i is set low to turn on the switch transistor 318 and the data line 322j is set to a programming voltage VP appropriate for the "ith" row.
  • the emission control line 25 is maintained at a high level to keep the emission control transistor 322 turned off. It is specifically noted that the emission control line 25 can convey an emission control signal that is shared by multiple pixels in a pixel array. For example, the emission control signal may be simultaneously conveyed to emission control lines in pixels in more than one row of the display panel 20 or to all pixels in a pixel array of a display.
  • the application of the programming voltage VP to the data line 322j causes a voltage to develop at the gate node 312g approximately equal to VP - Vth. That is, during the programming and compensation cycle 360, current flows from the data line 322j through the drive transistor 312 and the switch transistor 318 (which is turned on by the select line 24i) and develop a charge at the gate node 312g. The current continues to flow until the gate-source voltage of the drive transistor 312 is roughly equal to Vth, at which point the drive transistor 312 turns off and the current ceases flowing, leaving the voltage at the gate node 312g approximately equal to VP - Vth.
  • the pixel circuit 310 is configured to allow a programming voltage VP to be applied to the pixel circuit 310 through the drive transistor 312. This arrangement ensures that the voltage developed on the gate node 312g of the drive transistor 312 and stored in the storage capacitor 316 automatically compensates for the threshold voltage Vth of the drive transistor 312.
  • the threshold voltage Vth of the drive transistor 312 can vary across the panel 20 and over time due to variations in the usage of each pixel (i.e., the gate-source and drain-source voltage applied to each individual drive transistor over their lifetimes), temperature variations applied to each pixel, manufacturing variations in the developing of each pixel in a pixel array, etc.
  • the pixel circuit 310 further accounts for degradation in the pixel 310 by applying the biasing current Ibias via the bias line 329 to the second terminal of the storage capacitor 316 while the programming voltage VP is applied through the drive transistor 312 to the first terminal of the storage capacitor 316.
  • the bias current Ibias drains a small current through the drive transistor 312 (via the switch transistor 318 and the storage capacitor 316) to allow the gate-source voltage of the drive transistor 312 to be further adjusted.
  • This further adjustment due to the bias current Ibias can account for variations (e.g., shifts, non-uniformities, etc.) in the voltage-current behavior of the drive transistor 312 (e.g., due to mobility, gate oxide, etc.).
  • the select line 24i is set high to turn off the switch transistor 318 and the storage capacitor 316 is thus allowed to float between the bias line 329 and the gate node 312g.
  • the emission cycle 364 is commenced by setting the bias line 329 to a high supply voltage VDD, setting the data line 322j to the high supply voltage VDD, and setting the emission control line 25 low to turn on the emission control transistor 322.
  • the bias line 329 thereby references the second terminal of the storage capacitor 316 to the high supply voltage VDD while the first terminal of the storage capacitor 316 sets the gate voltage of the drive transistor 312.
  • FIG. 9A illustrates an additional configuration of a pixel circuit 410 configured to program the pixel circuit 410 via a programming capacitor 416 ("Cprg") connected to a gate terminal of a drive transistor 412 via a first selection transistor 417.
  • the pixel circuit 410 also includes a storage capacitor 415 ("Cs") connected directly to the gate terminal of the drive transistor 412.
  • the pixel circuit 410 can be implemented in the display system 50 described above in connection with FIG. 1, and can be one of a plurality of similar pixel circuits arranged in rows and columns to form a display panel, such as the display panel 20 described in connection with FIG. 1. However, as shown, the pixel circuit 410 does not utilize a separate monitoring line for providing feedback.
  • the pixel circuit 410 includes both a first select line 23i ("SEL1") and a second select line 24i (“SEL2").
  • the pixel circuit 410 also includes a connection to an emission control line 25i (“EM”) and two voltage supply lines 26i, 27i for supplying a current source and/or sink for a driving current conveyed through the pixel circuit 410 according to programming information.
  • the pixel circuit 410 includes a first switch transistor 417 operated according to the first select line 23 i and a second switch transistor 418 operated according to the second select line 24i.
  • the pixel circuit 410 also includes the drive transistor 412, an emission control transistor 422 operated according to the emission control line 25i, and a light emitting device 414, such as an organic light emitting diode.
  • the drive transistor 412, emission control transistor 422, and the light emitting device 414 are connected in series such that while the emission control transistor 422 is turned on, a current conveyed through the drive transistor 412 is also conveyed through the light emitting device 414.
  • the pixel circuit 410 also includes a storage capacitor 415 having a first terminal connected to a gate terminal of the drive transistor 412 at a gate node 412g. A second terminal of the storage capacitor 415 is connected to the voltage supply line 26i.
  • the second switch transistor 418 is connected between the gate node 412g and a connection point between the drive transistor 412 and the emission control transistor 422.
  • the programming capacitor 416 is connected in series between the data line 22j and the first switch transistor 417.
  • the first switch transistor 417 is connected between a first terminal of the programming capacitor 416 and a gate terminal of the drive transistor 412, while a second terminal of the programming capacitor 416 is connected to the data line 22j.
  • Certain transistors in the pixel circuit 410 provide functions similar in some respects to corresponding transistors in the pixel circuit 210.
  • the drive transistor 412 directs a current from the voltage supply line 26i from a first terminal (e.g., a source terminal) to a second terminal (e.g., a drain terminal) based on the voltage applied to the gate node 412g.
  • the current directed through the drive transistor 412 is conveyed through the light emitting device 414, which emits light according to the current flowing through it similar to the light emitting device 214.
  • the emission control transistor 422 selectively allows current flowing through the drive transistor to be directed to the light emitting device 414, and thereby increases a contrast ratio of the display by reducing accidental emissions of the light emitting device.
  • the second switch transistor 418 is operated by the second select line 24i similarly to the switch transistor 218 so as to selectively connect the second terminal of the drive transistor 412 to the gate node 412g.
  • the second switch transistor provides a current path is between the voltage supply line 26i to the gate node 412g, through the drive transistor 412. While the second switch transistor 418 is turned on, the voltage on the gate node 412g can thus adjust to a voltage suitable to convey a current through the drive transistor.
  • FIG. 9B is an alternative pixel circuit 410' configured similarly to the pixel circuit 410 shown in FIG. 9A, but with an additional switch transistor 419 connected in series with the second switch transistor 418. Both the additional switch transistor 419 and the second switch transistor 418 are operated according to the second select line 24i, such that setting the second select line 24i at a voltage sufficient to turn on the transistors 418, 419 connects a second terminal (e.g., a drain terminal) of the drive transistor 412 to the gate node 412g.
  • a second terminal e.g., a drain terminal
  • activating the second select line 24i provides a current path from the supply voltage line 26i to the gate node 412g, through the drive transistor 412, similar to the pixel circuit 410 described in connection with FIG. 9A.
  • the pixel circuit 410' offers superior resistance to leakage between the gate node 412g and the second terminal of the drive transistor 412 while the second select line 24i is set to turn off the transistors 418, 419.
  • the description herein of the operation and function of the pixel circuit 410 accordingly applies to the pixel circuit 410' shown in FIG. 9B.
  • the pixel circuit 410 shown in FIG. 9A includes the first switch transistor 417 for selectively connecting the programming capacitor 416 to the gate node 412g. Furthermore, the pixel circuit 410 includes the storage capacitor 415 connected between the gate node 412g and the voltage supply line 26i. The first switch transistor 417 allows the gate node 412g to be isolated (e.g,. not capacitively coupled) to the data line 22j during an emission operation of the pixel circuit 410.
  • the pixel circuit 410 can be operated such that the first selection transistor 417 is turned off so as to disconnect the gate node 412g from the data line 22j whenever the pixel circuit 410 is not undergoing a compensation operation or a programming operation. Additionally, during an emission operation of the pixel circuit 410, the storage capacitor 415 holds a voltage based on programming information and applies the held voltage to the gate node 412g so as to cause the drive transistor 412 to drive a current through the light emitting device 414 according to the programming information.
  • the capacitor 216 is allowed to float during the programming of other rows of the display while the selection transistor 218 is turned off.
  • the data line 22j is set to an appropriate reference voltage (e.g. V REF ) to reference the second terminal of the capacitor 216 connected to the data line 22j such that the voltage applied to the gate terminal of the drive transistor 212 is based on the previously applied programming voltage.
  • V REF an appropriate reference voltage
  • the data line 22j is assigned to the reference voltage V REF during the emission period and thus programming and/or compensation cannot be carried out on some rows while other rows are driven to emit light.
  • V REF the reference voltage
  • one way to address the issue and provide the ability to conduct simultaneous operations in parallel on distinct segments of the display panel 20 is by segmenting the data line 22j into groups of pixels, such as sets of rows of the display panel. By allowing each segment to be independently connected to the data line 22j, and alternately connected to the reference voltage V REF , parallel operations can be performed on separate segments of the display panel 20.
  • FIG. 9A Another configuration allowing for simultaneous operations is provided by the pixel circuit 410 described in FIG. 9A (or the pixel circuit 410' of FIG. 9B), the operation of which is described next.
  • the simultaneous parallel operation of different functions (i.e., compensation, programming, and driving) on different rows of the display panel 20 allow for increased duty cycles, higher display refresh rates, longer programming and/or compensation operations, and combinations thereof.
  • FIG. 9C is a timing diagram describing an exemplary operation of the pixel circuit 410 of FIG. 9A or the pixel circuit 410' of FIG. 9B.
  • operation of the pixel circuit 410 includes a compensation cycle 440, a program cycle 450, and an emission cycle 460 (alternately referred to herein as a driving cycle).
  • the entire duration that the data line 22j is manipulated to provide compensation and programming to the pixel circuit 410 is a time row period 436 having a duration t RO w.
  • the duration of t RO w can be determined based on the number of rows in the display panel 20 and the refresh rate of the display system 50.
  • the row period 436 is initiated by a first delay period 432, having duration tdl .
  • the first delay period 432 provides a transition time to allow the data line 22j to be reset from its previous programming voltage (for another row) and set to a reference voltage Vref suitable for commencing the compensation cycle 440.
  • the duration tdl of the first delay period 432 is determined based on the response times of the transistors in the display system 50 and the number of rows in the display panel 20.
  • the compensation cycle 440 is carried out during a time interval with duration tcoMP-
  • the program cycle 450 is carried out during a time interval with duration tpRG.
  • the emission control line 25i (“EM") is set high to turn off the emission control transistor 422.
  • the compensation cycle 440 includes a reference voltage period 442 and a ramp voltage period 444, which have durations of t REF and tRAMP, respectively.
  • the first and second select lines 423i, 424i are each set low at the start of the compensation cycle 440 so as turn on the first and second selection transistors 417, 418.
  • the data line 22j (“DATA[j]") is set with at a reference voltage Vref, during the reference voltage period 442.
  • the reference voltage period 442 accordingly sets the voltage of the second terminal of the programming capacitor 416 to Vref.
  • the reference voltage period 442 is followed by the ramp voltage period 444 where the voltage data line 22j is decreased from the reference voltage Vref to a voltage Vref - V A .
  • the voltage on the data line 22j is decreased by an amount given by the voltage V A -
  • the ramp voltage can be a voltage that decreases at a substantially constant rate (e.g., has a substantially constant time derivative) so as to generate a substantially constant current through the programming capacitor 416.
  • the programming capacitor 416 thus provides a current Iprg through the drive transistor 412, via the second switch transistor 418 and the first switch transistor 417 during the voltage ramp period 444.
  • the amount of the current Iprg thus applied to the pixel circuit 410 via the programming capacitor 416 can be determined based on the amount of V A , the duration tRAMP, and the capacitance of the programming capacitor 416, which can be referred to as Cprg.
  • the voltage that settles on the gate node 412g can be determined according to equation 19, where Iprg is substituted for I p i xel .
  • the voltage of the gate node 412g at the conclusion of the compensation cycle 440 is a voltage that accounts for variations and/or degradations in transistor device parameters, such as degradations influencing the threshold voltage, mobility, oxide thickness, etc. of the drive transistor 412.
  • the second select line 24i is set high so as to turn off the second switch transistor 418, such that the gate node 412g is no longer allowed to adjust according to a current conveyed through the drive transistor 412.
  • the programming cycle 450 is initiated.
  • the first select line 23i remains low so as to keep the first switch transistor 417 turned on.
  • the compensation cycle 440 and the programming cycle 450 can be briefly separated temporally by a delay time to allow the data line to transition from conveying the ramp voltage to conveying a programming voltage.
  • the first select line 23i can optionally go high briefly, during the delay time, so as to turn off the first switch transistor 417 during the transition.
  • the second switch transistor 418 remains turned off during the programming cycle 450.
  • the data line 22j is set to a programming voltage Vp and applied to the second terminal of the programming capacitor 416.
  • the programming voltage Vp is determined according to programming data indicative of an amount of light to be emitted from the light emitting device 414, and translated to a voltage based on a look-up table and/or formula that accounts for gamma effects, color corrections, device characteristics, circuit layout, etc.
  • the programming voltage Vp is applied to the second terminal of the programming capacitor 416
  • the voltage of the gate node 412g is adjusted due to the capacitive coupling of the gate node 412g with the data line 22j, through the first switch transistor 417 and the programming capacitor 416.
  • the amount of change in the voltage on the gate node 412g, during the programming cycle 450, relative to the gate node voltage at the conclusion of the compensation cycle 440 can be given by the relation (Vp - V REF + V A ) [ Cs / (Cs + Cprg) ].
  • An appropriate value for Vp can be selected according to a function including the capacitances of the programming capacitor 416 and the storage capacitor 415 (i.e., the values Cprg and Cs) and the programming information. Because the programming information is conveyed through the capacitive coupling with the data line 22j, via the programming capacitor 416, DC voltages on the gate node 412g prior to initiation of the programming cycle 440 are not cleared from the gate node 412g. Rather, the voltage on the gate node 412g is adjusted during the programming cycle 440 so as to add (or subtract) from the voltage already on the gate node 412g.
  • the voltage that settles on the gate node 412g during the compensation cycle 440 which can be referred to as Vcomp, is not cleared by the programming operation, because Vcomp acts as a DC voltage on the gate node 412g while the gate node is adjusted via the capacitive coupling with the data line 22j.
  • the final voltage on the gate node 412g, at the conclusion of the programming cycle 440 is thus an additive combination of Vcomp and a voltage based on Vp.
  • the final voltage can be given by Vcomp + (Vp - V REF + V A ) [ Cs / (Cs + Cprg) ].
  • the programming cycle concludes with the first select line 23i being set high so as to turn off the first selection transistor 417 and thereby disconnect the pixel circuit 410 from the data line 22j.
  • the emission cycle 460 is initiated by setting the emission control line 425i to a low voltage suitable to turn on the emission control transistor 422.
  • the initiation of the driving cycle 460 can be separated from the termination of the programming cycle 450 by a second delay period 434 to allow some temporal separation between turning off the first selection transistor 417 and turning on the emission control transistor 422.
  • the second delay period 434 has a duration td2 determined based on the response times of the transistors 417 and 422.
  • the emission cycle 460 can be carried out independent of the voltage levels on the data line 22j.
  • the pixel circuit 410 can be operated in the emission mode while the data line 22j is operated to convey a voltage ramp (for compensation) and/or programming voltages (for programming) to other rows in the display panel 20 of the display system 50.
  • the time available for programming and compensation (e.g., the values t comp and tprog) are maximized by implementing the compensation and programming operations to each row in the display panel 20 one after another such that the data line 22j is substantially continuously driven to alternate between voltage ramps and programming voltages, which are applied to each sequentially.
  • FIG. 10A illustrates a circuit diagram of a portion of a display panel in which multiple pixel circuits 410a, 410b, 41 Ox are arranged to share a common programming capacitor 416k.
  • the pixel circuits 410a, 410b, 41 Ox represent a portion of a display panel suitable for incorporation in a display system, such as the display system 50 discussed in connection with FIG. 1.
  • the pixel circuits 410a-x are a group of pixel circuits in a common column of a display panel (e.g., the "jth” column) and can be in adjacent rows of the display panel (e.g., the "ith,” “(i+l)th,” through to the "(i+x)th” rows).
  • the pixel circuits 410a-x are configured similarly to the pixel circuit 410 described above in connection with FIGS. 9A-9C, except that the group of pixels circuits 410a-x all share the common programming capacitor 410k.
  • the group of pixel circuits 410a-x are each connected to a segment data line 470 that is connected to a first terminal of the common programming capacitor 416k while a second terminal of the common programming capacitor is connected to the data line 22j.
  • the group of pixel circuits 410a-x that share the common programming capacitor 416k are included in a segment of the display panel 20 which is a sub-group of the pixel circuits in the display panel 20.
  • the segment including the pixel circuits 410a-x can also extend to each of the pixel circuits in a common row with the pixel circuits 410a-x, i.e., the pixel circuits in the display panel 20 having a common first select line with the pixel circuits 410a-x (SEL1 [ i ] to SEL11 [ i + x ]).
  • pixels circuits in a common column of the display panel 20 i.e., the pixel circuits connected to the same data line (DATA[ j ]), share the common programming capacitor 416k and are controlled according to segmented emission and second select lines 24k, 25k.
  • the group of pixel circuits 410a-x (and the pixel circuits in the same rows as the pixel circuits 410a-x) is referred to herein as the "kth" segment.
  • the "kth” segment In addition to sharing the common programming capacitor 416k, the "kth" segment also operates according to a segmented emission control line 425k ("EM[k]") which operates the respective emission control transistors (e.g., the emission control transistor 422) in all of the pixel circuits 410a-x in the "kth” segment in a coordinated fashion.
  • EM[k] segmented emission control line 425k
  • the entire display panel 20 is divided into a plurality of segments similar to the "kth" segment.
  • Each segment includes a plurality of pixel circuits that are controlled, at least in part, by commonly operated segmented control line.
  • each segment can include an equal number of rows of the display panel. As will be explained further in regard to FIGS.
  • such a segmented display architecture allows for efficient programming and driving sequences where pixel circuits in each segment (which each include multiple rows of a display panel) can be operated to provide a compensation operation simultaneously, rather than performing the compensation operation on each row consecutively.
  • the "kth" segment referred to herein will be described by way of example as a segment including 5 adjacent rows of pixel circuits.
  • an entire display panel can be divided into segments ("sub-groups") of 5 rows each.
  • a display panel with 720 rows can be divided into 144 segments, each having 5 adjacent rows of the display panel.
  • segmented display architectures is generally not so limited, and the discussions herein referring to segments having 5 rows can generally be extended to segments having more than, or less than, 5 rows, such as 4 rows, 6 rows, 8 rows, 10 rows, 16 rows, 1, etc., or any number of rows that evenly divides the total number of rows in the display panel, and also to segments including non-adjacent rows of a display panel, such as interleaved rows (odd/even rows), etc.
  • pixel circuits 410a-410x in the "jth" column of the “kth” segment can be pixel circuits in the "ith,” “(i+l)th,” “(i+2)th,” “(i+3)th,” and “(i+4)th” rows of the display panel.
  • Each of the pixel circuits includes connections to respective supply voltage lines, first and second select lines, and emission control lines, which are driven to operate the pixel circuits 410a-410x.
  • the pixel circuit 410a in the "ith” row and "jth” column is connected to the supply voltage lines 26i, 27i and the first select line 23i for the "ith" row.
  • the pixel circuit 410b in the "(i+l)th” row and the "jth” column is connected to supply voltage lines 471, 472 and a first select line 474 ("SEL[i+l]") for the "(i+l)th” row
  • the pixel circuit 410x in the "(i+4)th” row and “jth” column is connected to supply voltage lines 475, 476 and a first select line 478 ("SEL[i+x]") for the "(i+4)th” row.
  • Each of the pixel circuits in the "kth” segment is also connected to a segmented second select line 24k and a segmented emission control line 25k.
  • the emission control line and second select line are shared by all pixels in the "kth” segment to allow the emission control transistors and second switch transistors in each of the pixels in the "kth” segment to be operated in coordination.
  • FIG. 10B is a timing diagram of an exemplary operation of the "kth" segment shown in FIG. 10A.
  • operation of the "kth" segment includes a compensation cycle 510, a programming period 520 and a driving cycle 530.
  • the segmented emission control line 25k (“EM[ k ]") is set high to keep the emission control transistors turned off and thereby reduce incidental emission during compensation or programming.
  • the segmented second select line 24k is set low to turn on the second switch transistors in each of the pixel circuits 410a-x in the "kth" segment.
  • the first select lines (e.g., 23i, 474, 478, etc.) for each of the pixel circuits 410a-x are also set low during the compensation cycle 510 and a ramp voltage is applied on the data line 22j.
  • a current is conveyed through the pixels circuits in the "kth" segment (due to the ramp voltage applied to the common programming capacitor 416k) and the respective gate nodes in each pixel circuit 410a-x are allowed to adjust according to the current (via the respective turned on second switch transistors).
  • the select lines (e.g., the select lines 24k, 23i, 474, 478, etc.) are all low while the ramp voltage is applied to the data line 22j.
  • the select lines (e.g., the select lines 24k, 23i, 474, 478, etc.) are all high to separate the pixel circuits 410a-x from the data line 22j while the data line switches from conveying the ramp voltage to conveying programming voltages.
  • the duration of the transition delay period 514 can be determined based on the switching speed of the transistors involved in connecting the data line 22j to a ramp voltage generator and/or programming voltage driver (e.g., the driver 4).
  • the transition of the ramp period 512 is desirably long enough to allow sufficient time for the gate nodes to settle at appropriate voltages related to the currents generated by the ramp voltage applied to the common programming capacitor 416k.
  • the duration of the compensation period 510 can be 15 microseconds, with the ramp period 512 lasting over 10 microseconds.
  • the data line 22j is operated to sequentially provide programming voltages to each of the pixel circuits 410a-x in the "kth" segment during the programming period 520.
  • the segmented second selection line 24k remains high for the duration of the programming period 520.
  • the programming period 520 includes a sequence of programming intervals for each pixel circuit (e.g., the first programming interval 521, the second programming interval 523, the last programming interval 527, etc.) alternated with delay intervals (e.g., the delay intervals 522, 524, 526, etc.).
  • respective ones of the pixel circuits 410a-x which have their corresponding first switch transistors turned on receive programming voltages applied to the data line 22j.
  • the delay intervals between each programming interval allow the pixel circuits to be disconnected from the data line 22j while the programming voltage is being set to the next value appropriate for the next pixel circuit.
  • Cross-talk effects can occur, for example, if the programming voltage on the data line 22j updates to the value for the next pixel circuit (e.g., the pixel circuit in the next row) before the respective first switch transistor is turned off to disconnect the pixel circuit from the data line 22j.
  • the delay intervals between the programming intervals reduce cross-talk effects during programming.
  • the programming period 520 begins with the first programming interval 521 during which the first select line 423i for the pixel circuit 410a ("SELl [i]") is set low and the data line 22j is set to a programming voltage Vp[i, j].
  • Vp[i, j] refers to a programming voltage appropriate for the "ith” row and "jth” column of the display panel 20 during a particular frame.
  • Vp[i+1, j] refers to a programming voltage appropriate for the "(i+l)th" row and "jth” column of the display panel 20 during a particular frame, and so on.
  • the application of the programming voltage adjusts the voltage at the gate node 412g of the pixel circuit 410a due to the capacitive coupling between the gate node 412g and the data line 22j via the common programming capacitor 416k.
  • the adjustment to the voltage of the gate node 412g is carried according to the voltage division relationship between the common programming capacitor 412k and the storage capacitor 415, similar to the description of programming the pixel circuit 410 in connection with FIGS. 9A-9C.
  • SELl [i] is set high to disconnect the pixel circuit 410a from the data line 22j.
  • the data line 22j adjusts to the next programming voltage during the delay interval 522 and settles at the next programming voltage value Vp[i+1, j] to start the second programming interval 523.
  • SELl [i+l] is set low to capacitive ly couple the pixel circuit 410b to the data line 22j via the common programming capacitor 416k.
  • the gate node of the second pixel circuit 410b is adjusted by an amount based on the programming voltage Vp[i+1, j] during the second programming interval 523.
  • SELl [i+l] is set high to disconnect the pixel circuit 410b from the data line 22j, and the data line adjusts to another programming voltage during the delay interval 524.
  • the programming period 520 continues by programming each pixel circuit in the "kth" segment, sequentially, row-by-row during programming intervals separated by delay intervals. Each of the respective first select lines for each row being programmed is accordingly set low during the programming interval corresponding to each row.
  • the period 525 shown in FIG. 10B includes an appropriate number of distinct programming intervals until the second-to-last row of the "kth" segment. For example, where the "kth" segment includes 5 rows, the period 525 includes a programming interval for a third pixel circuit and a fourth pixel circuit, separated by a delay interval.
  • the programming period 520 then continues with a delay interval 526 to separate the final programming interval 527 from the programming of the previous rows (during the period 525).
  • the data line 22j is set to the final programming voltage Vp[i+x, j] during the delay interval 526.
  • the value "x" can be 4, but in general the value of "x" will be one less than the number of rows in each segment.
  • the first select line for the final row, SELl [i + x] is set low during the final programming period 527 and the gate node of the final pixel circuit 41 Ox is adjusted according to Vp[i+x, j] through the capacitive coupling with the data line 22j via the common programming capacitor 416k.
  • a transition delay 528 concludes the programming period 520.
  • the transition delay 528 provides a delay for the data line 22j to adjust to begin driving the next segment of the display, e.g., the "(k+l)th” segment.
  • To prevent cross-talk SELl [i+x] is set high at the conclusion of the final programming interval 527.
  • all of the select lines in the "kth" segment are high during the transition delay 528.
  • the programming period can have a duration of approximately 50 microseconds, which allows approximately 10 microseconds for each programming interval, and accompanying delay interval, which can be approximately 1 to 3 microseconds.
  • the length of the delay intervals will depend on the response speeds of the switching transistors and the time required to change programming voltages on the data line.
  • the "kth” segment is then driven to emit light during an emission interval 530 according to the programming voltages provided during the programming period 520.
  • the segmented emission line (“EM[k]") is set low to allow current to flow through the drive transistors to the light emitting devices in the "kth” segment according to the voltages retained on the respective gate nodes (e.g., the gate node 412g) by the respective storage capacitors (e.g., the storage capacitor 415).
  • the "kth" segment undergoes another compensation operation and then receives programming information for the next frame.
  • continuously repeating the compensation, programming and driving sequence for each segment of the display causes video to be displayed on the display panel 20.
  • the duration of the driving interval 530, t D RivE is dependent on the refresh rate of the display and/or the frame rate of the incoming video stream. For example, for a refresh rate of approximately 60 Hz, tpRAME can be approximately 16 milliseconds, and t D RivE ⁇ tFRAME - (tcoMP + tpRo).
  • the duration of the compensation and programming cycles for each frame is dependent at least in part on the number of segments in the display panel.
  • the duration t C oMP + tpRG is desirably less than, or approximately equal to, tFRAME / nSeg, where nSeg is the number of segments in the display. Selecting the durations desirably allow each segment to undergo a compensation cycle and a programming cycle in sequence in a single frame, before the sequence is repeated to display the next frame.
  • FIG. IOC is a timing diagram of another exemplary operation of the "kth" segment shown in FIG. 10A. Similar to FIG. 10B, operation of the "kth" segment includes a compensation interval 540, a programming period 550, and a driving interval 560.
  • the compensation interval 540 begins similarly to the compensation interval 510 discussed in connection with FIG. 12A, with a ramp period 542 during which a ramp voltage is applied to the pixel circuits 410a, 410b, . . ., 41 Ox to provide a compensation operation to the segment simultaneously.
  • the first selection lines ⁇ e.g., SELl [i], SELl [i+l], . . ., SELl [i+x]
  • the segmented second selection line 24k (“SEL2[k]" is set high at the initiation of the transition delay period 544.
  • the respective first selection lines are kept low until the conclusion of the programming interval for each respective row, at which point they are set high to disconnect the respective pixel circuit from the data line 22j before the next programming voltage is applied.
  • the later-programmed pixel circuits in the "kth" segment are allowed to float with respect to the programming voltages applied to earlier-programmed pixel circuits.
  • the amount of adjustment to the gate nodes of the later-programmed pixel circuits retained by the respective storage capacitors ⁇ e.g., 415) is determined by the voltage on the data line 22j most recently before the first switch transistor ⁇ e.g., All) is turned off.
  • the arrangement in FIG. IOC thus allows for less voltage changes, overall, on the first selection lines (SELl [i], SELl [i+l], . . ., SELl [i+x]) compared to the arrangement in FIG. 10B, which eases the burden on the address driver 8 operating the select lines.
  • the first programming interval 551 begins with all of the first selection transistors set low and the data line 22j set to Vp[i, j].
  • the first programming interval 551 ends with SELl [i+l] being set high before the data line 22j adjusts to Vp[i+1, j] during the delay interval 552.
  • the delay interval 552 while the first pixel circuit 410a is disconnected from the data line 22j, the next programming voltage Vp[i+1, j] is charged on the data line 22j.
  • the pixel circuit 410b is programmed during the second programming interval 553.
  • SELl [i+l] is set high during the delay interval 554 to disconnect the second pixel circuit 410b from the data line 22j.
  • the remainder of the pixel circuits in the "kth" segment are programmed during the period 555, with each pixel circuit being disconnected from the data line 22j before the data line 22j is adjusted to a programming voltage for the next row, in a manner similar to the procedure for the first two rows described above.
  • the final programming interval 557 is preceded by a delay interval 556 during which the data line 22j adjusts to Vp[i+x, j].
  • SELl [i+x] is set high during the transition delay 558, at which point all of the first selection lines SELl [i], SELl [i+l], . . ., SELl [i+x] are set high and the "kth" segment is completely programmed.
  • the emission interval 560 is commenced to drive the pixels in the "kth" segment to emit light according to the programming information stored in the respective storage capacitors.
  • other segments in the display are operated to provide compensation and/or programming operations.
  • FIG. 11A illustrates an additional configuration of a pixel circuit 610 configured to be programmed via a programming capacitor 616 connected to a gate terminal of a drive transistor 612, via a first selection transistor 617, at a gate node 612g.
  • the pixel circuit 610 also includes a storage capacitor 615 connected to the gate terminal of the drive transistor 612 and a second selection transistor 618 configured to allow the gate terminal of the drive transistor 612 to adjust according to a compensation current flowing through the drive transistor 612.
  • the pixel circuit 610 can be implemented in the display system 50 described above in connection with FIG. 1, and can be one of a plurality of similar pixel circuits arranged in rows and columns to form a display panel, such as the display panel 20 described in connection with FIG. 1.
  • the pixel circuit 610 of FIG. 11A is similar in some respects to the pixel circuits 410, 410' of FIGS. 9A and 9B, but differs in the configuration of the second selection transistor 618.
  • the difference in configuration allows for certain performance benefits of the pixel circuit 610 in comparison to the pixel circuits 410, 410' described above.
  • the second selection transistor 618 is connected to a point between the programming capacitor 616 and the first selection transistor 617 rather than being connected directly to the gate node 612g.
  • Similar to the pixel circuit 610 includes both a first select line 23i ("SEL1") and a second select line 24i ("SEL2") for operating the first selection transistor 617 and the second selection transistor 618, respectively.
  • the pixel circuit 410 also includes a connection to an emission control line 25i ("EM").
  • the first and second select lines 23i, 24i and the emission control line 25i can be operated by the address driver 8 in the display system 50 according to instructions from the controller 2.
  • Programming information is conveyed as programming voltages on the data line 22j, which is driven by the data driver 4.
  • Two voltage supply lines 26i, 27i supply a current source and/or sink for a driving current conveyed through the pixel circuit 610 according to programming information.
  • the data line 22j is also driven with ramp voltages in order to generate compensation currents through the pixel circuits via the programming capacitor 616.
  • the ramp voltages can be supplied by a system within the data driver 4 or by a separate ramp voltage generator that selectively connects to the data line 22j during periods when the ramp voltage is desired to be supplied to the data line 22j.
  • the pixel circuit 610 also includes an emission control transistor 622 operated according to the emission control line 25i, and a light emitting device 614, such as an organic light emitting diode or another emissive device.
  • the drive transistor 612, emission control transistor 622, and the light emitting device 614 are connected in series such that while the emission control transistor 622 is turned on, a current conveyed through the drive transistor 612 is also conveyed through the light emitting device 614.
  • the pixel circuit 610 also includes a storage capacitor 615 having a first terminal connected to a gate terminal of the drive transistor 612 at the gate node 612g. A second terminal of the storage capacitor 615 is connected to the voltage supply line 26i, or to another suitable voltage (e.g.
  • the programming capacitor 616 is connected in series between the data line 22j and the first switch transistor 617.
  • the first switch transistor 617 is connected between a first terminal of the programming capacitor 616 and the gate node 612g, while a second terminal of the programming capacitor 616 is connected to the data line 22j.
  • the second switch transistor 618 is connected between a point between the programming capacitor 616 and the first selection transistor 617 and a point between the drive transistor 612 and the emission control transistor 622.
  • the second selection transistor 618 is connected to the gate terminal of the drive transistor through the first selection transistor 617.
  • the gate terminal of the drive transistor 612 is separated from the emission control transistor 622 by two transistors in series (i.e., the first and second selection transistor 617, 618), similar to the arrangement of the transistors 418, 419 in the pixel circuit 410' of FIG. 9B. Separating the gate node 612g from the path of the driving current by two transistors in series reduces leakage currents through the drive transistor 612 by preventing influences on the source/drain terminals of the drive transistor 612 from influencing the voltage of the gate node 612g.
  • certain transistors in the pixel circuit 610 provide functions similar in some respects to corresponding transistors in the pixel circuit 410.
  • the drive transistor 612 directs a current from the voltage supply line 26i from a first terminal (e.g., a source terminal) to a second terminal (e.g., a drain terminal) based on the voltage applied to the gate node 612g.
  • the current directed through the drive transistor 612 is conveyed through the light emitting device 614, which emits light according to the current flowing through it similar to the light emitting device 414.
  • the emission control transistor 622 selectively allows current flowing through the drive transistor 612 to be directed to the light emitting device 614, and thereby increases a contrast ratio of the display by reducing accidental emissions of the light emitting device 614 during non-emission periods.
  • the first selection transistor 617 selectively connecting the programming capacitor 616 to the gate node 612g to allow the gate node 612g to be influenced by programming voltages and/or compensation currents conveyed via the programming capacitor 616 by the capacitive coupling with the data line 22j.
  • the pixel circuit 610 also includes the storage capacitor 615 connected between the gate node 612g and the voltage supply line 26i (or another suitable voltage).
  • the first switch transistor 617 allows the gate node 612g to be isolated (e.g., not capacitively coupled) to the data line 22j during an emission operation of the pixel circuit 610.
  • the second selection transistor 618 is operated by the second select line 24i so as to selectively connect the second terminal of the drive transistor 612 to the gate node 612g, via the first selection transistor 617.
  • a current path is provided between the voltage supply line 26i to the gate node 612g, through the drive transistor 612, to allow the voltage on the gate node 612g to adjust to a voltage suitable to convey a compensation current through the drive transistor 612.
  • the second selection transistor 618 is also operated to selectively connect the programming capacitor 616, while the first selection transistor 617 is turned off, to reset the programming capacitor 616 by discharging the programming capacitor 616 to the OLED capacitance ("COLED") 624 via the emission control transistor 622. Resetting the programming capacitor 616 can be performed prior to compensation and programming to minimize the effects of previous frames on the display.
  • the pixel circuit 610 drives current through the light emitting device 614 according to charge stored on the storage capacitor 615 without influence from the data line 22j.
  • a display array including a plurality of pixel circuits similar to the pixel circuit 610 can be operated to allow some pixel circuits to be driven to emit light while others connected to a common data line undergo a compensation or programming operation.
  • the pixel circuit 610 allows for different functions (e.g., programming, compensation, emission) to be carried out in parallel.
  • FIG. 1 IB is a timing diagram describing an exemplary operation of the pixel circuit 610 of FIG. 11 A. Operation of the pixel circuit 610 includes a reset cycle 630, a compensation cycle 640, a program cycle 650, and an emission cycle 660 (alternately referred to herein as a driving cycle).
  • the entire duration that the data line 22j is manipulated to provide compensation and programming to the pixel circuit 610 is a row period 636 having a duration t R ow-
  • the duration of t RO w can be determined based on the number of rows in the display panel 20 and the refresh rate of the display system 50.
  • the reset cycle 630 includes a first phase 632 and a second phase 634.
  • the emission control line EM[ i ] is set high to turn off the emission control transistor 622 and cease emission from the pixel circuit.
  • the driving current stops flowing through the light emitting device 614 and the voltage across the light emitting device 614 goes to the OLED off voltage, V OLED (0 ff) .
  • the emission control transistor 622 is turned off, current stops flowing through the drive transistor 612, and the stress on the drive transistor 612 during the first phase 632 is reduced.
  • the light emitting device 614 can be an organic light emitting diode with a cathode connected to VSS and an anode connected to the emission control transistor 622 at a node 614a.
  • the voltage at the node 614a settles at VoLED(Off), relative to VSS.
  • the emission control line 25i is set low while the second select line 24i is also low and the data line 22j is set to a reference voltage V REF -
  • the second selection transistor 618 and the emission control transistor 622 are turned on to connect the programming capacitor 416 between the data line 22j charged to V REF and the node 614a charged to VoLED(Off).
  • the first selection transistor 617 is held off by the first select line 23i during the second phase 634 such that the gate of the drive transistor 612 is not influenced during the reset cycle 630.
  • the light emitting device 614 is illustrated connected in parallel with an OLED capacitance 624 ("COLED"), which represents the capacitance of the light emitting device 614.
  • the OLED capacitance 624 is generally greater than the capacitance of the programming capacitor 616 such that connecting Cprg to COLED during the second phase 634 (via the emission control transistor 622 and the second selection transistor 618) allows the voltage on Cprg 616 to substantially discharge to COLED 624.
  • the OLED capacitance 624 thus acts as a source or sink to discharge the voltage on Cprg 616 and thereby reset the programming capacitor 616.
  • Cprg 616 and COLED 624 are connected in series and the voltage difference between VSS and V REF is allocated between them according to a voltage division relationship, with the bulk of the voltage drop being applied across the lesser of the two capacitances.
  • the voltage across Cprg is close to be V REF + V OLED -VSS considering COLED is larger than Cprg. . Because the OLED 614 is turned off during the first phase 632, and the voltage at the node 614a allowed to settle at VoLED(Off), the voltage changes on the node 614a during the second phase 634 are insufficient to turn on the OLED 614, such that no incidental emission occurs.
  • the first and second select lines 23i, 24i and emission control line 25i are operated to provide the compensation cycle 640, the programming cycle 650, and the driving cycle 660, which are each similar to the compensation, programming, and driving cycles 440, 450, 450 discussed at length in connection with FIG. 9C. Because the operation of the pixel circuit 610 following the reset cycle 630 is substantially the same as the operation of the pixel circuits 410, 410' already discussed above, the compensation cycle 640, programming cycle 650, and driving cycles 660 are only briefly discussed below.
  • a ramp voltage is applied on the data line 22j during the compensation cycle 640 to convey a compensation current through pixel circuit 610 via the programming capacitor 616.
  • the compensation cycle 640 is initiated with a reference voltage period 642 where the data line 22j is held constant at the reference voltage VREF- During the ramp period 644, the voltage on the data line 22j is decreased from VREF to VA, at a substantially constant time derivative so as to convey a current through the drive transistor 612 and the second switch transistor 618 and allow the gate node 612g to adjust according to the conveyed current.
  • the data line 22j is set to a programming voltage VP while the first selection transistor 617 is turned on and the second selection transistor 618 is turned off.
  • One or more delay periods can separate the reset cycle 630, the compensation cycle 640, the programming cycle 650 and the driving cycle 660.
  • FIG. 12A illustrates a circuit diagram of a portion of a display panel in which multiple pixel circuits 610a, 610b, 61 Ox are arranged to share a common programming capacitor 616k.
  • the pixel circuits 610a, 610b, 61 Ox represent a portion of a display panel suitable for incorporation in a display system, such as the display system 50 discussed in connection with FIG. 1.
  • the pixel circuits 610a-x are a group of pixel circuits in a common column of the display panel (e.g., the "jth" column) and can be in adjacent rows of the display panel (e.g., the "ith,” “(i+l)th,” through to the "(i+x)th” rows).
  • the pixel circuits 610a-x are configured similarly to the pixel circuit 610 described above in connection with FIGS. 1 1 A-l IB, except that the group of pixels circuits 610a-x all share the common programming capacitor 616k.
  • the group of pixel circuits 610a-x are each connected to a segment data line 666 that is connected to a first terminal of the common programming capacitor 616k while a second terminal of the common programming capacitor 616k is connected to the data line 22j.
  • the group of pixel circuits 610a-x that share the common programming capacitor 616k are included in a segment of the display panel 20 which is a sub-group of the pixel circuits in the display panel 20.
  • the segment including the pixel circuits 610a-x can also extend to each of the pixel circuits in a common row with the pixel circuits 610a-x, i.e., the pixel circuits in the display panel 20 having a common first select line with the pixel circuits 610a-x (SELl [i] to SEL1 l [i+x]).
  • pixels circuits in a common column of the display panel 20 i.e., the pixel circuits connected to the same data line (DATA[j]), share the common programming capacitor 616k and are controlled according to segmented emission and second select lines 24k, 25k.
  • the group of pixel circuits 610a-x (and the pixel circuits in the same rows as the pixel circuits 610a-x) is referred to herein as the "kth" segment.
  • the "kth" segment referred to herein will be described by way of example as a segment including 5 adjacent rows of pixel circuits. In this way an entire display panel can be divided into segments ("sub-groups") of 5 rows each. For example, a display panel with 720 rows can be divided into 144 segments, each having 5 adjacent rows of the display panel.
  • segmented display architectures is generally not so limited, and the discussions herein referring to segments having 5 rows can generally be extended to segments having more than, or less than, 5 rows, such as 4 rows, 6 rows, 8 rows, 10 rows, 16 rows, 1, etc., or a number of rows that evenly divides the total number of rows in the display panel, and also to segments including non-adjacent rows of a display panel, such as interleaved rows (odd/even rows), etc.
  • FIG. 12B is a timing diagram of an exemplary operation of the "kth" segment shown in FIG. 12 A.
  • Operation of the "kth" segment includes a reset and compensation period 670, a programming period 680, and a driving cycle 690.
  • the reset and compensation period 670 includes a first phase 672 during which the light emitting devices in the "kth" segment are turned off by operation of the segmented emission control line 25k ("EM[k]").
  • the emission control transistors e.g., 622
  • each pixel circuit in the "kth” segment are turned off, which allows the light emitting devices in each pixel circuit to settle at their respective off voltages.
  • the first phase 672 is followed by a second phase 674 where the segmented second select line 24k ("SEL2[k]”) and EM[k] 25k are both set low to allow the programming capacitors 616k for each segment to discharge to the OLED capacitances (e.g., COLED) in each respective segment.
  • the OLED capacitances in each segment for a common data line are connected in parallel through the segmented data line 666. The total capacitance of the parallel connected OLED capacitances thus provides a source or sink to discharge the voltage on the segmented programming capacitor 616k and thereby clear the effects of previous frames from the segmented programming capacitor 616k.
  • the segmented programming capacitor is reset according to the reference voltage V REF applied on the data line 22j during the second phase 674.
  • the segmented emission line 25k is then set high to prevent incidental emission from the light emitting devices 614 in the "kth" segment during the compensation and programming operations. Compensation is carried out by initializing the data line 22j to V REF during a reference period 676 and then providing a ramp voltage on the data line 22j during a ramp period 678.
  • the ramp voltage changes from V REF to V REF - V A with a substantially constant time derivative such that a compensation current is conveyed through the segmented programming capacitor 616k.
  • the first select lines in the segment e.g., the select lines 23i, 662, 664, etc.
  • the segmented second select line 24k are held low during the application of the ramp voltage to allow the gate of the respective drive transistors in the segment to adjust according to the compensation current conveyed through the pixel circuits by the segmented programming capacitor 616k.
  • voltages are established on each of the respective gate nodes of the pixel circuits 610a-x during the compensation cycle that account for variations and/or degradations in the respective drive transistors, such as degradations due to threshold voltage variations, mobility variations, etc.
  • SEL2[k] is set high during the programming period 680, to fix the compensation voltage on the storage capacitor of each pixel circuit in the segment.
  • the rows in the "kth" segment are sequentially voltage programmed, by sequentially selecting the respective first select lines (SELl [i], SELl [i+l], . . . , SELl [i+x]) for each row during programming intervals separated by delay intervals included in the programming period 680. Programming voltages for each row are provided on the data line 22j, during the appropriate programming intervals.
  • the respective first select line is set high to disconnect the drive transistor from the segmented data line 666, and allow for programming of subsequent pixel circuits in the segment without influencing the voltages on the already programmed pixels.
  • the pixel circuits are then driven to emit light according to the voltages stored on their respective storage capacitors (e.g., the storage capacitor 615) during the driving period 690.
  • the programming period 680 and the driving period 690 are thus similar to the programming periods 520, 550 and driving periods 530, 560 discussed above in connection with FIGS. lOB-lOC.
  • FIG. 13A illustrates a timing diagram for driving a single frame of a segmented display.
  • the example timing diagram in FIG. 13 A refers to an arrangement where the display panel is segmented into multiple segments each having 5 rows, such that the first segment includes rows 1 through 5, the second segment includes rows 6 through 10, etc.
  • the final segment includes rows Y through NR, where NR is the number of rows in the display, and Y is a number 4 less than NR.
  • the present disclosure is not limited to segments having 5 rows or to segments having adjacent rows.
  • a segmented display with two rows can be formed a first segment including all of the even rows and a second segment including all of the odd rows.
  • a segmented display can include a first segment including pixels in odd rows and odd columns, a second segment including pixels in odd rows and even columns, a third segment including pixels in even rows and odd columns, and a fourth segment including pixels in even rows and even columns.
  • segments are also applicable to the present disclosure, but in the interests of brevity it suffices to note that the driving schemes described herein for segmented displays apply to segments having less than, or more than, 5 rows, to segments including non-adjacent rows, and to segments including only portions of rows.
  • the data lines (e.g., 22j, 22m, etc.) of the display system 50 are driven such that rows 1 through 5 (the first segment) are compensated in a compensation cycle (701), and then rows 1 through 5 are programmed in a programming cycle (702), and driven to emit light in an emission cycle (703).
  • the sequence of compensation, programming, and emission can be carried out according to the timing diagrams shown in FIGS. 10B- IOC, for example.
  • the duration of the compensation cycle (701) and the programming cycle (702) for the first segment has a duration t SEGMENT ⁇ Where the number of segments is relatively large, the duration of tsEGMENT can be approximately given by tsEGMENT ⁇ tFRAME / (Number of Segments).
  • the data lines e.g., 22j, 22m, etc.
  • the procedure continues to provide compensation and programming to all the segments in the display panel 20 until the final segment (rows Y through NR) is driven in a compensation cycle (708) and a programming cycle (709).
  • a reset period can occur prior to the compensation periods 701, 704, 708, to reset the respective segmented programming capacitors for each segment.
  • the reset period can be similar to the reset cycles discussed above in connection with FIGS. 10A - 12B and include a first phase and a second phase.
  • the first phase the light emitting devices in the segment are turned off by the segmented emission control line to allow the voltage across the light emitting devices (and the OLED capacitances) to settle at the OLED off voltage.
  • the segmented programming capacitor is connected the OLED capacitances to discharge the segmented programming capacitor while the reference voltage is applied to the data line to reset the segmented programming capacitor and decrease the influence of previous frames on the operation of the pixel circuits.
  • the duration of tsEGMENT is roughly the sum of the durations of the compensation cycle 701, the programming cycle 702, and the second phase of the reset period.
  • the first phase of the reset period is not included in t SEGMENT ? because tsEGMENT indicates the duration that each segment operates the data line 22j, and the data line 22j is disconnected from the segment during the first phase of the reset period, i.e., the first and second select lines are set high during the first phase (e.g., 672).
  • the driving scheme provided by the timing diagram in FIG. 13A allows the data lines (22j, 22m, etc.) to be substantially continuously utilized by the driver 4 to convey ramp voltages and/or programming voltages, without the need for periods where all pixels are driven to emit light and none undergo programming and/or compensation operations.
  • the parallel operation scheme provided by aspects of the present disclosure thereby maximizes available time for programming and/or compensation. Additionally or alternatively, the parallel operation scheme provided by aspects of the present disclosure maximizes the frame rate that can be provided by a display system operated according to the parallel operation scheme.
  • the display operates with a duty cycle approaching 100%.
  • the light emitting devices can be driven to emit light with roughly half the intensity of a display operating at a 50% duty cycle and still maintain the same cumulative light output from the display at each frame.
  • the relatively high duty cycle enabled by the present disclosure allows the light emitting devices to emit light at a decreased intensity, which corresponds to a decreased driving current.
  • Driving the light emitting devices and the driving transistors at the decreased driving current causes those components to age ("degrade") relatively less than would be the case with higher driving currents that generate relatively more electrical stress on the semi- conductive materials in the light emitting device and/or driving transistor.
  • FIG. 13B is a flowchart corresponding to the driving scheme shown in the timing diagram in FIG. 13 A.
  • the operation of the flowchart is described in reference generally to the example display system illustrated in FIG. 10A, however, the flowchart also applies to the display system illustrated in FIG. 12A.
  • the next segment is selected by adjusting the select lines shared by the segment to values appropriate for compensation (710).
  • the segmented second select line 24k is set low, to allow the current generated by the ramp voltage to be conveyed through the driving transistor, and the segmented emission line 25k is set high, to prevent incidental emission during programming and compensation.
  • the select lines can be adjusted to provide for reset and compensation, similar to the operation during the reset and compensation period 670 of FIG. 12B.
  • the pixels in the selected segment then undergo a compensation operation (712).
  • the compensation operation can be carried out by generating a voltage ramp on the data line 22j, which is applied to the common programming capacitor 416k to apply a corresponding current to the pixels in the segment (e.g., 410a-x).
  • Each of the first select lines 23i, 474, 478 are also set low during the compensation operation to keep the associated first switch transistors (e.g., 417, 617) turned on.
  • the gate nodes of the pixel circuits 410a-x self-adjust to voltages accounting for the variations in driving transistor threshold voltages. The self-adjustment occurs due to the current passing through the respective drive transistors through the second switch transistors, which adjusts the gate nodes of the driving transistors.
  • the compensation operation is concluded by turning off the second switch transistors via the segmented second select line 24k.
  • the pixels in the selected segmented are then voltage-programmed one row at a time.
  • the first row is selected by setting the first select line (e.g., 23i) for the first row of the segment low (714).
  • the first row of the segment is then programmed by setting the data lines to provide programming voltages appropriate for the pixels in the first row (716).
  • the first select line for the first row (e.g., 23i) high to disconnect the gate nodes of the pixels and the storage capacitor 415, from the data line 22j, and the programming information is retained by the storage capacitor 415.
  • the next row in the segment is selected (718), and that is voltage programmed similarly to the first row (720). If all the rows in the segment have not yet been programmed (722), the next row of the segment is selected (718) and programmed (720) and the process is repeated until all the rows in the segment have been programmed.
  • a driving operation is performed on the segment (724).
  • the segmented emission line 24k for the segment is set low to allow the emission transistors (e.g., 422, 622) in each pixel in the segment to convey current to the light emitting device (e.g., 414, 614) via the driving transistor (e.g., 412, 612).
  • the first and second switch transistors are turned off in each pixel circuit in the segment during the driving operation such that the programming information is retained by the storage capacitors within each pixel circuit independently of the present value on the data line.
  • the driving scheme With the selected segment set in the driving operation (e.g., the driving cycles 530, 560, 690), the driving scheme returns to the beginning to select the next segment in the display (710) and the operation is repeated on the next segment, and each successive segment until returning again to the original segment.
  • a single frame of a video display is displayed in the time passed between successive compensation and programming operations of the same segment of a display.
  • FIGS. 14A and 14B provide experimental results of percentage errors in pixel currents given variations in device parameters for pixel circuits such as those shown in FIGS. 9 A and 9B. It is particularly noted that the percentage error in pixel current correlates to a percentage error in luminescence from the light emitting device, because the light emitting device emits light in proportion to the current passing through the device.
  • FIG. 14A provides the simulated error in pixel current from the pixel circuit 410' shown in FIG. 9B when the pixel circuit is programmed at a range of grayscale data values and the drive transistor 412 has a variation in mobility of 40% (e.g., from 0.8 to 1.2). As shown in FIG. 14A, the error in pixel current is under about 6% for most grayscale values, and approaches about 10% for very low pixel currents, even with a mobility variation of 40% on the drive transistor 412.
  • FIG. 14B provides the simulated error in pixel current from the pixel circuit 410' shown in FIG. 9B when the pixel circuit is programmed at a range of grayscale data values and the drive transistor 412 has a threshold voltage that varies by 3.5 V (e.g., from -0.5 V to -4.0 V). As shown in FIG. 14B, the error in pixel current is under about 6% for most grayscales, and approaches about 8% for very low pixel currents, even with a threshold voltage variation of 3.5 V on the drive transistor 412.
  • the pixel circuit 410' that achieved the simulated error results shown in FIG. 14A and 14B was arranged with transistor components as shown in the Table 1 below.
  • Table 1 provides a single non-limiting listing of potential values for the components in the pixel circuit 410'.
  • the capacitor values it is noted that tests have been performed with storage capacitors at 200 fF and programming capacitors at 270 fF.
  • Cprg can be 230 fF and Cs can be 170 fF to provide a desired bias current during a 15 compensation cycle.
  • Table 1 Exemplary values of circuit elements in pixel circuit shown in FIG.
  • FIGS. 14A and 14B indicate that degradations in the drive transistor 412 due to both mobility variations or threshold voltage variations are well compensated by the pixel circuits described herein.
  • the pixel circuits described herein provide compensation by applying a current to allow the drive transistor to adjust its gate voltage according to the parameters of the drive transistor (V T , C ox , ⁇ , etc.), as described, for example, in connection with equations 14-20.
  • the compensation operation can be performed before programming (e.g., FIGS. 9A-9C), during programming (e.g., FIGS. 8A-8B), or following programming (FIGS. 4A-4F).
  • aspects and features of the pixel circuits and driving schemes described separately herein can be modified so as to combine separately described features in a single pixel circuit and/or scheme of operation.
  • the use of a ramp voltage to generate a current through the drive transistor during compensation can be applied to the pixel circuit 210 of FIGS. 4A-4F, or the use of a bias current on the data line can be applied to the pixel circuit 410 of FIGS. 9A-9C, or the pixel circuit 310 of FIG. 8A can be modified to include a second capacitor similar to the storage capacitor 415 of FIGS. 9A-9B, etc.
  • FIG. 15A is a circuit diagram showing a portion of the gate driver 8 including control lines (“CNTi") 734 to regulate the first select lines for each segment.
  • the address driver 8 can includes outputs for the lines that are shared within each segment, e.g., the segmented emission line 25k and the segmented second select line 24k.
  • the address driver 8 can also include gate outputs ("Gate k") that combines with the control lines 734 to generate the first select lines 740 to each segment of the display array.
  • the gate output 738 is connected to the first select lines 740 via a first switch 730 operated by the control lines 734.
  • Inverse control lines "(/CNTi) 736 control a second switch 732.
  • One side of the second switch 732 is connected to a high voltage line (“Vgh") 742.
  • the other side of the second switch 732 is electrically connected to a node of the first switch 730 other than the one connected to the gate output 738. That is, the second switch 732 is electrically connected to the node of the first switch 730 that is also connected to the first select lines 740.
  • the second switch 732 thus conveys the voltage on the high voltage line 742 to the first select lines 740 while the second switch 732 is closed and the first switch 730 is open. Selectively receiving the output of the gate output 738 or the high voltage line 742 depending on the status of the control lines 734 and inverse control lines 736.
  • the inverse control lines 736 are configured to provide signals opposite to the control lines 734, thus when the CNTi lines are high, the /CNTi lines are low, and vice versa.
  • the switches 734, 736 are switches that are selectively opened and closed according to the signals on the control lines 734 and inverse control lines 736, respectively, such that the first switch 730 is open while the second switch 732 is closed, and vice versa.
  • the first select lines 630 receive the high voltage on the high voltage line 742 via the second switch 732, which is closed.
  • the control line 734 is low (and the inverse control line 736 is high)
  • the first select lines 740 receive the voltage on the gate output 738.
  • FIG. 15B is a diagram of the first two gate outputs 750, 760 which are used to provide the first select lines for the first two segments.
  • the first gate output (“Gate #0") 750 can be connected to first select lines 751-755 for the first five rows of the display, which first five rows comprise the first segment of the display.
  • the first gate output 750 is connected to each of the first select lines 751-755 via a switch controlled by one of the control lines 734.
  • the switchable connection between the gate output 750 and each of the first select lines 751-755 is a switchable connection similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 15 A.
  • Each switchable connection can include two switches (similar to the switches 730, 732) that are controlled by a control line and an inverse control line, respectively (similar to the lines 734, 736) such that one switch is on while the other is off and the first select line receives either the voltage on the gate output 750 or a high voltage Vgh, depending on the control line values.
  • the first select line for the first row 751 (“SEL 1(1)”) receives a high voltage Vgh while the first control line CNTl is set high. While CNTl is high, the switch between SELl (1) 751 and the first gate output 750 is open, and so SEL 1(1) 751 does not receive the voltage on the first gate output 750. However, while CNTl is high, the inverse of CNTl, which is referred to herein as "/CNTl,” is set low, and a switch connected to SEL 1(1) 751, not to the first gate output 750 (switch not shown, but arranged similarly to the switch 622 in FIG. 15A) is turned on so as to connect SEL 1(1) to Vgh.
  • the boxed switches shown in FIG. 15B thus each represent two switches arranged as shown in FIG. 15A to selectively connect the first select lines 751-755 to either the gate output 750 or the high voltage Vgh.
  • SEL 1(1) 751 is low only when the first gate output 750 is low and the first control line CNTl is also low.
  • SEL 1(1) 751 is always high, whether CNTl is low and SEL 1(1) 751 receives the high voltage from the first gate output 750 or CNTl is high and SEL 1(1) 751 receives the high voltage from the high voltage line 742.
  • the first select lines 752-755 for the other rows of the first segment are similarly arranged.
  • the first select lines 751-755 in the first segment are only low so as to turn on the respective first switch transistors in the pixels of the first segment during periods when the first gate output 750 is set low, otherwise the first select lines 751-755 remain high.
  • the second gate output 760 is connected to first select lines 761-765 for the second segment of the display, and each of the first select lines 761-765 receive either the voltage on the second gate output 760 or a high voltage Vgh according to the control line signals.
  • the control line signals e.g., CNT1, CNT2, . . , CNT5
  • a separate gate output (similar to gate outputs 750, 760) is included for each segment in the display array, with each gate output used to drive the first select lines in the respective segment as shown in FIGS. 15A-15B.
  • the final segment is driven by first select lines controlled according to the final gate output ("Gate #n").
  • each segment includes 5 rows
  • the final segment thus includes rows n> ⁇ 5+l through n> ⁇ 5+5, where the number n is an index for the number of segments that starts at zero, and increments for each segment to the "(n+l)th" segment, which is reflected by the first segment being referred to as "Gate #0".
  • the total number of segments is given by (Number of Rows) / 5.
  • an address driver such as the address driver 8 of the display system 50 shown in FIG. 1, may be configured as an integrated unit with outputs for each first select line, segmented second select line, and/or segmented emission control line, as necessary to operate the pixel circuits described herein.
  • an address driver configured according to the present disclosure can be arranged with one or more of the switches operated by control lines, e.g., the switches 730, 732 shown in FIG. 15 A, internal to the address driver or external to the address driver.
  • the switches 730, 732 can be transistors and the control lines 734 and inverse control lines 732 can be connected to the gates of the transistors to thereby selectively control the conductivity of the channel regions of the transistors so as to open and close the switches 730, 732.
  • FIG. 16 is a timing diagram for a display array operated by an address driver utilizing control lines to generate the first select line signals.
  • the timing diagram shown in FIG. 16 provides a compensation, programming, and driving operation for the "kth" segment of the display similar to the timing diagram shown in FIG. 10B or FIG. 12B.
  • the timing diagram of FIG. 16 uses the control lines 734 (e.g., CNT1, CNT2, . . ., CNT5) to generate the first select lines ⁇ e.g., SEL[i], SEL[i+l], etc. of FIGS. 10B and 12B).
  • the timing diagram in FIG. 16 illustrates the generation of the select lines employed in FIG. 10B, and accordingly the compensation cycle 510, programming cycle 520, and driving cycle 530 shown in FIG. 16 correspond to the respectively cycles in FIG. 10B.
  • the gate output line (“Gate[k]”) is set low to start the compensation cycle 510 and held low through the programming period 520.
  • the Gate[k] signal is thus nearly the opposite of the segmented emission line ("EM[k]").
  • the Gate[k] signal is set high at the start of the transition delay 528, whereas the segmented emission line does not go low until after the transition delay 528.
  • the first select lines in the "kth" segment are low when the respective ones of the control lines are low and the first select lines are high when the respective ones of the control lines are high. Accordingly, the discussion of the timing of the first select lines in FIG.
  • the driving scheme of FIG. IOC where the first select lines are held low until turning high at the end of each respective programming period 551, 553, etc., can also be implemented using gate outputs and control lines suitably configured to provide the timing shown in FIG. IOC.
  • the timing scheme shown in FIG. 12B to operate the display system of FIG. 12A to provide a reset operation can be provided using the gate outputs and control lines configured to provide the timing scheme of FIG. 12B.
  • the next segment i.e., the segment following the "kth” segment is initiated by setting the gate output line, Gate[k+1], to low and the control lines CNT1, CNT2, . . . , CNT5 repeat the timing from the previous cycle to generate the first select line signals on the first select lines in the "(k+l)th” segment. It is noted that first select lines in the "kth” segment remain high during the compensation and programming of the "(k+l)th” segment because the gate output Gate[k] for the "kth” segment is high.
  • FIG. 17A is a block diagram of a source driver 770 with an integrated voltage ramp voltage generator 780 for driving each data line in a display panel.
  • the source driver 770 can be used as the data driver 4 of the display system 50 shown in FIG. 1 to provide data voltages and/or ramp voltages for programming and compensation pixel circuits in the display system.
  • the source driver 770 also includes data registers 774 and digital-to-analog converters ("DACs") 778.
  • the data registers 774 store digital data corresponding to programming information 772 to provide to each data line (e.g., 790a, 790b, etc.) of the display array.
  • the programming information 772 can be a video data stream conveyed from a video data source, and can be provided via a controller, such as the controller 2 of the display system 50.
  • the data registers 774 convey the digital data to the DACs 778 via a connection 776.
  • the DACs 778 transform the digital data to a programming voltage and provide the programming voltage on one or more analog output lines 784.
  • the DACs 778 can be a resistive ladder or resistive lather type DAC, which generates varying voltage outputs via an array of precise resistors selectively connected to the analog output lines 784 to provide the desired voltage output.
  • the data lines 790a, 790b, 790c correspond to the data lines 22j, 22m discussed in connection with the display system 50 of FIG. 1 and the various pixel circuit configurations provided herein.
  • the data lines 790a-c supply programming voltages (from the DACs 778) or a ramp voltage (from the ramp voltage generator 780) to the pixels in the display system.
  • Each data line 790a-c is connected to the analog output lines 784, and the ramp line 782, via a buffer 789.
  • the buffer 789 isolates the DACs 778 and the ramp voltage generator 780 from the load of the display panel.
  • the buffer 789 can be considered an amplifier to condition the voltages on the data lines 790a-c according to the output of the DACs 778 and/or ramp voltage generator 780 while preventing the load of the panel from influencing the DACs.
  • Each buffer 789 is alternately connected to the DACs 778 or the ramp voltage generator 780 via two switches 786, 788.
  • a first switch 786 connects the buffer 789 to the analog output line 784 from the DACs 778.
  • a second switch 788 connects the buffer 789 to the ramp line 782 from the ramp voltage generator 780.
  • the switches 786, 788 are operated according to control signals (e.g., from the controller 4 and/or address driver 8) to convey a ramp voltage during compensation intervals and to convey programming voltages from the DACs 778 during programming intervals.
  • the ramp voltage generator 780 desirably produces a time-changing voltage on the ramp line 782 with a substantially constant time derivative suitable for providing the compensation functions described herein in reference to FIGS. 9-13.
  • the time- changing voltage from the ramp voltage generator 780 is suitable for being applied to the programming capacitor, e.g., the capacitors 416, 416k, 616, 616k to generate the compensation current through the driving transistor 412, 612 so as to allow the gate node of the pixel circuit to adjust according to the degradation of the pixel circuit.
  • the ramp voltage generator 780 can include a current source connected to the ramp line 782 across a capacitor, i.e., a current source in series connection with a capacitor.
  • the ramp voltage generator 780 can also include a digital-to-analog converter ("DAC") receiving a time changing series of digital values, which thereby produce a time changing series of voltages generally defining a time-changing voltage ramp.
  • DAC digital-to-analog converter
  • the series of digital values can be sequential digital values or can be monotonically increasing or decreasing digital values such that the voltage ramp provided on the ramp line 782 is continuously increasing or decreasing, as desired.
  • the ramp voltage can be a declining voltage ramp or an inclining voltage ramp, with respect to time, depending on the particular pixel circuit configuration selected. Many of the pixel circuits discussed herein describe a declining voltage ramp such that current is drawn through the driving transistor of the pixel circuit. However, pixel circuits disclosed in commonly assigned co-pending U.S. Patent Application No. 12/633,209, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. US 2010/0207920, the contents of which are incorporated entirely herein by reference, discloses at least some pixel circuits utilizing an inclining voltage ramp applied to a data line to generate a bias current across a capacitor internal to the pixel circuit.
  • FIG. 17B is a block diagram of another source driver 770' that provides a ramp voltage for each data line in a display panel and includes a cyclic digital-to-analog converter (“cyclic DAC") 799.
  • the cyclic DAC 799 operates by generating a ramp voltage internally, the ramp voltage is compared to a voltage corresponding to a desired output voltage, and when the ramp voltage matches the desired output voltage, the cyclic DAC 799 holds the value corresponding to the programming information and provides the output voltage to the buffer 679.
  • the internal ramp voltage generation within the cyclic DAC 799 can be utilized to provide the ramp voltage to the data lines 790a-c for use in compensation by selectively providing a ramp value 798 to a ramp signal line 796, which ramp value 798 indicates to the cyclic DAC 799 to output the ramp signal to the buffer 789.
  • switches 792, 794 are selectively activated to determine whether the cyclic DAC 799 outputs a programming voltage or a ramp voltage.
  • the first switch 792 is closed, the data registers 774 are connected to the input of the cyclic DAC 799, and the cyclic DAC 799 outputs a programming voltage corresponding to the programming data.
  • the ramp value 798 is connected to the input of the cyclic DAC 799 and the data lines 790a-c are provided with the ramp voltage generated with the cyclic DAC 799.
  • the ramp value 798 can include an indication of a desired dynamic range and/or timing (e.g., increase/decrease rate) of the voltage ramp to be output to the buffer 789.
  • the source driver 770' of FIG. 17B provides a ramp value to the data lines 790a-c with a substantially constant time derivative such that the pixel circuits disclosed herein can generate a compensation current through the driving transistor while the gate of the driving transistor adjusts according to the degradation of the pixel circuit (e.g., threshold voltage shifts in the driving transistor, changes in mobility or other factors influencing current- voltage characteristics, etc.).
  • FIG. 18A is a display system 800 incorporating a demultiplexer 839 to reduce the number of output terminals 840 from the source driver 4.
  • the demultiplexer 839 provides connections between more than one data lines (e.g., the data lines 840a-c) and a single output terminal 840 of the source driver 839.
  • the data lines 840a-c are referred to herein as DL[j] 840a, DL[j+l] 840b, and DL[j+2] 840c, to refer to the "jth,” “(j+l)th,” and "(j+2)th” data lines in the pixel array of the display system 800.
  • each output terminal of the source driver 4 can be connected to a demultiplexer (such as the demultiplexer 839), the source driver 4 can have N / n output terminals where N is the total number of data lines to be provided to a pixel array and n is the number of outputs from each demultiplexer. In other words, the number of output terminals of the source driver 4 is reduced by a factor of the number of outputs of each demultiplexer.
  • the display system 800 illustrated in FIG. 18A illustrates a single demultiplexer 839 connected to the "kth" output terminal 840 ("OUT[k]") of the source driver 4.
  • the demultiplexer 839 is operated according to a control signal 825 from the controller 2 to sequentially couple the OUT[k] line 840 to the three data lines 840a, 840b, and 840c one at a time.
  • the data lines 840a-c can correspond to, for example, red, green, and blue subpixels for a single pixel position in an RGB display, or can be three other pixels in a common row of a display array.
  • the demultiplexer 839 can sequentially couple the OUT[k] line 840 to less than three or more than three data lines, such as two data lines, four data lines, etc.
  • FIG. 18B is a timing diagram for a display array utilizing a demultiplexer.
  • the select line 834 (labeled as "SEL[i]") is set low.
  • the data lines 840a (“DL[j]”), 840b (“DL[j+l]”), and 840c (“DL[j+2]") are then sequentially selected by the demultiplexer 839 according to the control line 825.
  • OUT[k] 840 is set to VP[j], which is the programming voltage for the "jth" column of the pixel array.
  • the demultiplexer 839 conveys the voltage VP[j] to the data line for the jth column, DL[j] 840a.
  • OUT[k] 840 is adjusted to VP[j+l] by the source driver 4, and the demultiplexer 839 conveys the voltage VP[j+l] to DL[j+l] 840b.
  • OUT[k] 840 is adjusted to VP[j+2] by the source driver 4, and the demultiplexer 839 conveys the voltage VP[j+2] to DL[j+2] 840c.
  • parasitic capacitances 841a-c of the data lines 840a-c are each substantially larger than the storage capacitances (e.g., the storage capacitor 816) of the respective pixel circuits 810a-c.
  • the parasitic capacitance 841a-c of the data lines 840a-c the programming voltages of the previously programmed rows are retained on the parasitic capacitances of the data lines until the rows are programmed again.
  • DL[j+l] 840b and DL[j+2] 840c are each charged with the programming voltage for the previously programmed row, which is being maintained on their respective parasitic capacitances 841b, 841c.
  • the parasitic capacitances 841b, 841c act like a voltage source to the respective selected pixel circuits 810b and 810c, which become programmed with the programming voltages for the previously programmed rows.
  • the pixel[i,j+l] 810b may not be updated with the new programming voltage, (i.e., the pixel[i,j+l] 810b may be unable to change its state). Problems may arise when the pixel circuit is "programmed" by the previous row's value retained in the parasitic capacitance of the data line.
  • the pixel[i,j+2] 810c may not be updated with the programming voltage for the current row during the third programming subcycle 853 because the pixel[i j+2] may be set, during the first programming subcycle 851, by the programming voltage for the previous row stored on the parasitic capacitance 841c of DL[j+2] 840c.
  • the emission cycle 854 (“driving cycle") follows during which the emission control line 836 is set low. Setting the emission control line low turns on the emission transistor 818 to allow current to flow to the light emitting device 814 through the drive transistor 812 according to programming information stored on the storage capacitor 816. As shown in FIG.
  • the emission control line 836 can initiate the emission cycle 854 for more than one pixel circuit (e.g., the pixel circuits 810a-c) and can initiate the emission cycle 854 for all the pixels in the pixel array of the display system 800 simultaneously.
  • the resulting image displayed during the emission cycle 854 suffers from distortions.
  • FIG. 18C is a timing diagram illustrating the operation of the source driver 4, the demultiplexer 839, and the address driver 8 to pre-charge the parasitic capacitances 841a-c of each data line 840a-c prior to selecting the pixels 810a-c for programming.
  • a first precharging cycle 861 is carried out to charge a programming voltage VP[j] on the parasitic capacitance 841a of DL[j] 840a while the select line 834 remains high.
  • a second precharging cycle 862 is carried out to charge a programming voltage VP[j+l] on the parasitic capacitance 841b of DL[j+l] 840b, and a third precharging cycle 863 is carried out to charge a programming voltage VP[j+2] on the parasitic capacitance 841c of DL[j+2] 740c.
  • a programming select cycle 864 is carried out.
  • the select line 834 (“SEL[i]") is set low to select the pixels 810a-c, which are then programmed by the programming voltages stored on the respective parasitic capacitances 841a-c of the respective data lines 840a-c. Because the parasitic capacitances 841a-c are much greater than the capacitances of the storage capacitors in the pixel circuits 810a-c, the parasitic capacitances 841a-c act as voltage sources to force the pixel circuits 810a-c to update to the programming voltages for the current row.
  • An emission cycle 866 follows the programming select cycle 864.
  • the duration of the programming select cycle 864 can be equal to the duration of one of the individual precharging cycles (e.g., the first precharging cycle 861) or can be equal to the cumulative duration of all the precharging cycles 861 , 862, 863. Generally, the duration of the programming select cycle 864 is chosen to provide adequate time for the pixel circuits 810a-c to be updated with the programming voltage stored on the respective parasitic capacitances 841a-c.
  • select lines can be increased by a factor of the number of outputs of the demultiplexer 839, and pixels in the same row can be separately selected sequentially to align each selection according to the order of the demultiplexer 839 in providing programming voltages to the respective data lines 840a-c.
  • Implementing the solution of additional select lines in the display system 800 can be accomplished, for example, by providing select lines SEL[i, l], SEL[i,2], and SEL[i,3], which are selected during the first, second, and third programming subcycles of the "ith" row, respectively.
  • increasing the number of select lines in such a manner undesirably decreases pixel pitch ("pixel density").
  • the programming select cycle 864 is illustrated as following the parasitic capacitance precharging cycles 861 , 862, 863 in FIG. 18C, however, the programming select cycle 864 can coincide with, or at least partially overlap with, the final one of the precharging cycles (e.g., the third precharging cycle 863).
  • the programming select cycle 864 can occur at the same time and have the same duration as the third precharging cycle 863.
  • the programming select cycle 864 can commence during the third precharging cycle 863 and have a duration that extends beyond the end of the third precharging cycle 863.
  • aspects of the present disclosure also provide systems and methods for driving a display with enhanced programming settling time to increase the refresh rate of the display and thereby decrease, or even eliminate, the perception of flickering from the display.
  • This disclosure describes multiple techniques of achieving flicker free operation using the example pixels and panel architecture already described above.
  • Flicker free panel driving schemes are illustrated graphically, but are not limited to particular pixel circuits or display architectures. The origins of image flicker and solutions to eliminate the perception of image flicker will be discussed, below
  • some pixel circuits may incorporate VDD toggling during programming to prevent emission from an OLED in the pixel circuit during the programming cycle and other non-emission cycles.
  • This method is effective in ensuring a good contrast ratio, however it may introduce a source of possible image flicker in operation.
  • the flicker free panel operation schemes and architectures specifically disclosed herein can be generalized to other panel operating schemes where the emission cycle does not persist for an entire frame- time.
  • FIG. 19A pictorially illustrates a programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle.
  • the regular programming scheme is pictorially illustrated in FIG. 19A.
  • half of the frame time 900 (“Tp") is used to program the panel sequentially.
  • Tp half of the frame time 900
  • the display panel is programmed in 8 ms.
  • the supply voltage line e.g., the voltage line 26i
  • the supply voltage line is set to a low voltage to prevent the pixels from emitting light.
  • the voltage supply and is only toggled high to VDD during the emission time 904.
  • a perception of image flicker originates from the frequency of the emission time 904 between frames which are separated by the programming time 902.
  • the frame time 900 (e.g., 16 ms) includes a programming time 902 having a duration of, for example, 8 ms, during which the display is dark while the pixels receive programming and/or compensation operations.
  • the frequency of the emission period 904 can be at 60 Hz, but the effective frequency can be slightly under 60 Hz due to lag in toggling the supply voltages. Hence it is possible for the displayed image to exhibit a moderate level of flicker especially at an angle of peripheral version for the viewer. Nevertheless, it is possible to alter the programming and emission sequence to increase the frequency of the emission period 804 without changing the total duty cycle.
  • FIG. 19B pictorially illustrates an example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle, which is adapted to decrease flickering associated with the display.
  • a series of driving mechanism as illustrated in FIG. 19B can be employed. The basis of this driving mechanism is to divide the emission phase into sub-periods 914 and insert an idle period 916 in between. This shortens the time between the individual emission periods 914, thereby increasing the display frequency of the emission period 914 higher than in the example of FIG. 19 A.
  • the total emission time is divided into two sections 914 (sub-periods) separated by an idle period.
  • the duration of the programming period 912, the idle period 916, and the two emission sub-periods 914 can each be 4 ms, such that the total frame time 800 is 16 ms.
  • the panel's supply voltages are changed into those of the programming phase to turn off the display by preventing the light emitting devices in the respective pixels from emitting light, but the pixels are also not being programmed.
  • the idle period 916 can be implemented by stopping the gate driver 8 from addressing any of the rows.
  • the pixel data values programmed in the pixels during the programming period 912 are thus maintained in the storage elements of each pixel and the pixels remain ready to display light according to the same programming information during the next emission period 914 following the idle period 916.
  • the pixels in the display are maintained without emission.
  • the total emission duty cycle can be maintained at 50% (or at some other level by adjusting the durations of the respective periods 912, 914, 916) and can thus be similar to the operating scheme, but the frequency is increased to 120Hz. This aids in removing perceived image flicker from the human eye.
  • FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B which illustrate implementations where the emission period 914 and idle period 916 are alternated following the initial programming period 912.
  • FIG. 20A pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle similar to FIG. 19B, but with a frame time 920 twice as long as the frame time 900 illustrated by FIG. 16B.
  • FIG. 18B pictorially illustrates yet another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle similar to FIG. 19B, but with a frame time 930 three times as long as the frame time 900 illustrated by FIG. 19B.
  • the scheme illustrated in FIG. 20A can correspond to a display operating at a refresh frequency of 30 Hz.
  • the frame time 920 has a duration of 32 ms, and each of the periods 912, 914, 916 have durations of approximately 4 ms.
  • the programming period 912 is followed by the emission period 914, which is then alternated with three idle periods 916 before the next programming period (not shown).
  • Each of the periods 912, 914, 916 can be considered sub- periods of the frame time 920.
  • the first four sub-periods of the operation scheme shown in FIG. 20A are identical to the scheme illustrated by FIG. 19B. However, following the first four sub-periods, instead of programming a next frame (according to the scheme shown in FIG. 19B) the scheme of FIG. 20A alternates the idle period 816 and the emission period 914 twice more each before programming a next frame.
  • the scheme illustrated in FIG. 20B can correspond to a display operating at refresh frequency of 20 Hz.
  • the frame time 930 has a duration of 48 ms.
  • the first four sub-periods of the operation scheme of FIG. 20B are unchanged relative to the scheme illustrated in FIG. 20A.
  • four more sub-periods consisting of alternating idle periods 916 and emission periods 914 are appended to the end of the operating scheme of FIG. 20A.
  • the operating schemes in these extended modes (shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B) are similar to the version shown in FIG. 19B, by simply replacing the subsequent programming periods 912 by additional idle periods 916.
  • the display refresh rate is determined by the frequency of the programming period 912, because the display is not reprogrammed in any of the idle periods 916. However, even at the relatively low display refresh frequencies enabled by the schemes of FIGS. 20A and 20B, the display can still be free of perceived flickering effects, because the frequency of the emission period 914 is increased by a factor of four (FIG. 20A) or six (FIG. 20B).
  • This method of driving is effective in removing flicker because the frequency of the emission phase 914 is increased beyond display refresh frequency.
  • the idle phase 916 consumes a portion of the frame time 900, 920, 930, thereby reducing the time available for programming the display.
  • the programming time 902 in the operating scheme of FIG. 19A is twice as long as the programming time 912 in FIG. 19B.
  • the panel is programmed in 4 ms.
  • the idle period 916 can lead to programming voltage signal loss due to TFT leakages.
  • Any signal stored in the pixels might experience a loss during the idle period 916, resulting in subsequent emission periods 914 providing slightly different luminance values than the initial emission period 914 immediately following the programming period 912. This issue is more pronounced in lower display refresh frequency implementations such as in FIGS. 20A and 20B.
  • FIG. 21 A pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame while separately programming portions of the display during distinct programming periods 922, 926.
  • the aforementioned programming schemes described in connection with FIGS. 19B, 20A, and 20B required all the rows in the display to be programmed during the single programming period 912, which can be implemented as a period of only 4 ms.
  • the idle period 916 can be better utilized by programming only a portion of the panel in a first programming periods 922, and then programming the rest of the panel during a second programming period 926.
  • both programming and emission are temporally divided in half as pictorially shown in FIG. 21 A.
  • the flicker suppression algorithm is the same as the previous method, by increasing the frequency of the emission periods 924, 928.
  • the performance is similar to the method described in connection with FIG. 19B, while alleviating the limitation on the duration of the programming duration, because only half of the display is programmed during each programming period 922, 926.
  • the lower frame-rate operation (e.g., such as for 30 Hz and 20 Hz display refresh frequencies) is still possible in this method by inserting idle periods in subsequent frames after the whole panel is programmed.
  • This mode also offers advantages due to its relative ease of implementation in either integrated or externally connected gate drivers. Panel programming is only required to be paused during the emission period 924 and then resumed for the second half of the panel during the second programming period 926.
  • the leakage of programming information between subsequent emission periods can lead to image abnormalities.
  • the first programming period 922 programs the top half of a display panel
  • the second programming period 926 programs the bottom half of the display panel
  • the two emission periods 924, 928 will be more/less bright on the top/bottom depending on which was most recently programmed.
  • the portion of the panel that is already programmed experiences a longer duration of leakage time compared to the second half during the emission period 928. This may result in a perceptible brightness difference between the two halves that contributes to an image artifact.
  • FIG. 2 IB pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame while separately programming interlaced portions of the display during distinct program phases 932, 936.
  • the first programming period 932 is used to program all the odd rows of the display panel
  • the second programming period 936 is used for even rows.
  • the sequence of odd and even programming phases is interchangeable, and the data programmed to adjacent rows are not over-written in adjacent programming phases. This implies that the panel will display all odd rows' data in the first emission period 934, while the even rows are still holding data from previous frame.
  • the even rows' data are refreshed in the second programming period 936, and the whole frame's image is displayed in the second emission period 938.
  • This retention of image programming information between the emission periods 934, 938 is a difference with conventional interlacing programming on CRT displays where adjacent rows are programmed black during sub-frame programming of odd or even rows.
  • This operating scheme can greatly reduce image flicker, due to the aliasing method.
  • This operating scheme can be extended to lower frame-rate operation by replacing the subsequent frame's programming phase by idle frames, similar to the schemes shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B.
  • this operation scheme improves upon the previous methods in maintaining a seamless transition between adjacent sub-frames.
  • FIG. 21C provides two options in implementing the interlacing mode with slower frame-rate (i.e., longer frame time).
  • the frame time 920 can be twice as long as the frame time 900 of FIG. 21B.
  • FIG. 21C pictorially illustrates example programming and emission sequences for displaying a single frame during a frame time that is divided into eight sub-periods.
  • the sequence illustrated in FIG. 21B is followed by additional alternating emission periods 940 and idle periods 938.
  • the second scheme illustrates adding an idle period 940 after the first emission period 934, then programming the even rows during the second programming period 936 following a second emission period 934.
  • scheme a or b during the first emission periods 934, only the odd rows emit light according to programming data for a currently displayed frame.
  • the second emission periods 940 all the rows in the display emit light according to the programming data for the currently displayed frame.
  • the first 16 ms is divided into four parts.
  • the odd rows are first programmed (first programming period 932), followed by an emission period 934 ("EMI"), and then the even rows are programmed (second programming period 936) similarly.
  • the first 16ms of this scheme is identical to the driving mode in FIG. 21B.
  • the first emission period 934 displays only the odd rows, while the second emission period 938 ("EM2") will fill in the even rows without rewriting the data stored in the odd rows.
  • the second half of the frame time 920 frame is inserted to lengthen the frame-rate down to 30Hz.
  • the second half of the frame time 920 is also divided into four equal parts, but the programming sub-frames are replaced by idle frames 940 where the rows are not being programmed.
  • the result of this operation results in the two emission sub-frames 838 ("EM3" and "EM4") to display the same image as EM2 938.
  • an idle frame 940 is inserted between the programming sub-frames for odd and even rows 934, 936. This results in the emission periods EMI 934 and EM2 934 sections only displaying the odd rows, while emission periods EM3 938 and EM4 938 will display the full image according to the currently programmed frame. Both schemes contain the same duty cycle period, with the difference in the arrangements of the programming and emission frames.
  • scheme a exhibits better odd and even rows matching, because the two sub-frames 932, 934 are programmed right after each other. However, the entire image is retained for the rest of the idle frames 940, which can be prone to signal leakage in the pixels. The reduction in signal stored in the pixel will lead to shift in image brightness, which can cause flickering if the frame-rate is low.
  • scheme b allows even rows to be programmed in the programming period 936 and only emits the full image during EM3 938 and EM4 938. The aforementioned overall signal loss is decreased, at an expense of possible brightness difference between adjacent rows. Thus, scheme b will result in less image flickering, but may suffer from "stripes" in flat view images.
  • the two schemes can be naturally extended by virtue of appending idle and emission frames to accommodate still lower display refresh frequencies.
  • FIG. 2 ID pictorially illustrates still another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame where portions of the display are sorted into four interlaced groupings according to row numbers and each portion is separately programmed.
  • This scheme advantageously further decreases the demands on the programming time by spreading programming across four different sub-groups of the display.
  • the different subgroups can be, for example, groups of interlaced rows of the display. Instead of limiting row interlacing to two adjacent rows, four or higher number of row interlacing can be utilized.
  • FIG. 2 ID illustrates the sequence of performing four row interlacing.
  • the frame time 920 includes eight sub-periods, including four emission periods 944, 948, 952, 956, and four programming periods 942, 946, 950, 954.
  • Programming period 942 writes data to every other four rows, such as the rows numbered 1, 5, 9, 13, etc.
  • the first emission period 944 displays light according to the recently programmed pixels in rows 1, 5, 9, etc., while other pixels are driven according to the programming information they retained from their most recent programming event (which occurred during a previous frame time).
  • the second programming period 946 programs pixels in rows 2, 6, 10, etc., and the pixels are driven with their most recently programmed values during the second emission period 948.
  • the third programming period 950 programs pixels in rows 3, 7, 11, etc., and the pixels are driven with their most recently programmed values during the third emission period 952.
  • the fourth programmed period 854 programs pixels in rows 4, 8, 12, etc., and the pixels are driven with their most recently programmed values during the fourth emission period 956.
  • the fourth emission period 956 is the only one of the emission sub- periods 944, 948, 952, 956, where the display is driven according to programming data for the same frame all at once.
  • the other emission periods 944, 948, 952 each include at least some pixels driven according to programming data from a previous frame.
  • the operating scheme shown in FIG. 21D benefits from the partial turning ON of the panel during sub-frame programming, which can reduce power consumption. However, this mode is most suitable for static image or slow moving image scenes. This is because the higher level of interlacing will result in image ghosting due to the programming sequence especially in low frame-rate operation.
  • FIG. 22A is a block diagram of a circuit layout for connecting alternating rows of a display panel to distinct data lines 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008. Such a configuration is usefully employed where alternating rows of a display array are programmed in distinct programming cycles. For convenience, one subset of data can be referred to as "right,” while the other is referred to as "left.”
  • the pixel circuit in the first row and first column is identified as Rl(l) 1011.
  • the pixel circuit in the second row and first column is identified as R2(l) 1021.
  • the pixel circuits in the third, fourth, and fifth rows in the first column are identified as R3(l) 1031, R4(l) 1041, and R5(l) 1051.
  • the pixel circuits in the first five rows of the second column are identified as Rl(2) 1012, R2(2) 1022, R3(2) 1032, R4(2) 1042, and R5(2) 1052.
  • the display array is arranged with each column having two parallel data lines, one for the "right" data (e.g., the data lines Vdata R(l) 1002 and Vdata_R(2) 906), and one for the "left” data (e.g., the data lines Vdata L(l) 1004 and Vdata_R(2) 1008).
  • the pixels in the odd rows are connected to the "right” data on the data lines Vdata R(l) 1002, Vdata_R(2) 1006, etc. for each column across the array.
  • the pixels in the even rows are connected to the "left” data on the data lines Vdata L(l) 1004, Vdata_L(2) 1008, etc. for each column across the array.
  • the pixels Rl(l) 1011 and Rl(2) 1012 in the first row are connected to "right” data lines Vdata R(l) 1002 and Vdata_R(2) 1006, respectively.
  • the pixels R2(l) 1021 and R2(2) 1022 in the second row are connected to "left” data lines Vdata L(l) 1004 and Vdata_L(2) 1008, respectively.
  • Such a display array configuration can be employed in connection with the driving scheme illustrated and described in connection with the two driving schemes shown in FIG. 21C, and which will be described below in FIG. 23B.
  • FIG. 22B is a block diagram of a circuit layout for connecting interlaced pixels of a display panel to distinct data lines 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008.
  • the two columns of pixels shown in FIG. 22B are similar to the pixels in FIG. 22A, except that the second column of pixels is now connected to the opposite data line, relative to the pixels in FIG. 22A.
  • pixels in odd rows and odd columns, and pixels in even rows and even columns are connected to "right" data. Pixels in odd rows and even columns, and pixels in even rows and odd columns are connected to "left" data.
  • the pixels Rl(l) 1011 and R2(2) 1022 in the first row, first column, and second row, second column, respectively, are connected to "right” data lines Vdata R(l) 1002 and Vdata_R(2) 1006, respectively.
  • the pixels R2(l) 1021 and Rl(2) 1012 in the second row, first column, and first row, second column, respectively, are connected to "left” data lines Vdata L(l) 1004 and Vdata_L(2) 1008, respectively.
  • the "right” and “left” data lines are arranged to be connected to interlaced pixels in a checkerboard configuration across the display array.
  • the arrangement of the "left" and “right” data lines correspond to regions which are simultaneously programmed by the display array by the "right” and “left” data sets, which can be arbitrarily arranged to divide the display into one or more regions that are programmed by the respective sets of data lines during distinct programming intervals.
  • a display array can also be divided into “left” and “right” portions providing separate data lines for the distinct portions, such that the distinct portions still share common data lines, but are addressed to receive programming during distinct intervals.
  • An exemplary timing diagram corresponding to a display panel with distinct portions that share data lines is provided in FIG. 23A.
  • An exemplary timing diagram corresponding to a display panel with distinct data lines for distinct portions is provided in FIG. 23B.
  • FIGS. 23 A and 23B are timing diagrams for displays which are divided into “left” and "right” data lines.
  • the timing diagrams in FIGS. 23A and 23B correspond to a pixel circuit such as the ones described in FIGS. 4 through 8, where the data line is set at a reference value, during the driving interval to reference the storage capacitor to the reference voltage and thereby prevent the storage capacitor from floating during the driving interval. Because the pixel circuits in FIGS.
  • the timing diagram in FIG. 23A demonstrates a 60% duty cycle because the duration of programming (e.g., the programming periods 1060, 1072), are roughly two-thirds the length of the driving intervals (e.g., the driving periods 1062, 1070). Thus, each pixel in the display driven according the timing diagram of FIG. 23A is driven to emit light roughly 60% of the time.
  • the duty cycle is generally determined by the refresh rate of the video content and the duration required for programming the display, which is influenced by the timing resolution of the drivers, switching speed of the transistors, charging times for the storage capacitors within each pixel, etc.
  • the "right” pixels are programmed in sequence (1060) via the “right” data lines while the “left pixels” are maintained black (1068). Keeping the “left” pixels black can be carried out by adjusting one or more of the the supply voltages to voltages sufficient to keep the light emitting devices turned off. While the "left” pixels are kept black (1068), the programming voltages stored in the pixels is retained within the storage capacitors, which float until the data line is returned to an appropriate reference voltage during the driving periods 1062, 1070. Thus, during the driving 1062, 1070, the "right” pixels are driven according to the programming provided in the interval 1060 while the "left” pixels are driven according to programming provided during a previous interval (not shown) prior to the black interval 1068.
  • the "right pixels” are maintained black (1064) while the "left” pixels are programmed in sequence (1072) via the "left” data lines.
  • the programming interval 1072 and the black interval 1072 is followed by driving intervals 1066, 1072 where the "left" pixels are driven according to the programming provided during the programming interval 1072 and the "right” pixels are driven according to the programming provided during the programming interval 1060.
  • Data for a single frame is provided to the display across the two programming intervals 1060, 1072.
  • a frame time for displaying a single frame includes programming the "right” pixels while the “left” pixels are maintained black (1060, 1072), driving the pixels at the values they are programmed with (1062, 1070), programming the "left” pixels while the “right” pixels are maintained black (1062, 1064), and driving the pixels again (1066, 1074).
  • FIG. 23B provides a driving scheme for a display panel with distinct portions (e.g., the "right” and “left” portions described herein) programmed during distinct intervals, where the distinct portions also have distinct data lines (e.g., Vdata R, Vdata L described in connection with FIGS 22A and 22B).
  • the "right” pixels are programmed (1060) via the "right” data lines which are generally connected only to the "right” pixels (e.g., Vdata R in FIGS. 22A-22B).
  • the "left” pixels continue to be driven according to programming provided in a previous interval (not shown).
  • the programming of the "right” pixels (1060) does not influence the driving of the "left” pixels.
  • the data lines for the "left” pixels can be fixed at a reference voltage during the programming interval 1060 such that the storage capacitors within the "left” pixels remain referenced to the reference voltage and the driving of the "left” pixels is not influenced.
  • the "right” pixels are driven (1080) according to the programming provided during the programming interval 1060.
  • the "left" pixels are programmed via the "left” data lines which are generally connected only to the "left” pixels (e.g., Vdata L in FIGS. 22A-22B).
  • the programming intervals 1060, 1072 are substantially the same length in both driving schemes.
  • the pixels are not set to black to avoid cross-talk interference between pixels in distinct portions of the display sharing common data lines.
  • the duty cycle of pixels in the display system driven according to FIG. 23B is generally greater than in a system driven according to FIG. 23A.
  • the duty cycle for the driving scheme in FIG. 23B is roughly 80%, because pixels are turned off only during the programming intervals 1060, 1072 for their respective "left” or "right” portions, and the programming intervals last roughly 20% of the frame time.
  • Each programming interval 1060, 1072 is followed by a driving interval 1080, 1082 for the respective portion that lasts roughly 80% of the frame time.
  • a current driving technique using a differentiator/convertor to convert a time- variant voltage to a current is described.
  • a capacitor is used to convert a ramp voltage to a current (e.g., a DC current).
  • a current source developed based on a capacitance.
  • the current source 1 1 10 of FIG. 24 is a bidirectional current source that can provide positive and negative currents.
  • the current source 1 1 10 includes a voltage generator 1 1 12 for generating a time-variant voltage and a driving capacitor 1 1 14.
  • the voltage generator 1 1 12 is coupled to one end terminal 1 1 16 of the driving capacitor 1 1 14.
  • a node "lout" is coupled to the other end terminal 1 1 18 of the driving capacitor 1 1 14.
  • a ramp voltage is generated by the voltage generator 1 1 12.
  • the terms “capacitive current source”, “capacitive current source driver”, “capacitive driver” and “current source” may be used interchangeably.
  • the terms “voltage generator” and “ramp voltage generator” may be used interchangeably.
  • the current source 1 1 10 includes the ramp voltage generator 11 12, however, the current source 1 1 10 may be formed by the driving capacitor 11 14 that receives the ramp voltage.
  • a digitized capacitance based on the capacitive current source 1 1 10 can be used to develop a simple and effective current mode analog-to-digital convertor (ADC) resulting in small and low power driver. Also it provides a simple source driver that can be easily integrated on the panel, independent of fabrication technology, resulting in improving the yield and simplicity of the display and reducing the system cost significantly.
  • ADC analog-to-digital convertor
  • the capacitive current source 11 10 can be used to provide a programming current to a current programmed pixel (e.g., OLED pixels).
  • the capacitive current source 1 1 10 can be used to provide a bias current for accelerating the programming of a pixel, such as in the pixels 210, 310, 410, 610 disclosed herein.
  • the capacitive current source 1 1 10 can be used to drive a pixel.
  • the capacitive driving technique with the capacitive current source 1 1 10 improves the settling time of the programming/driving, which is suitable for larger and higher resolution displays, and thus a low- power high resolution emissive display can be realized with the capacitive current source 1 1 10, as described below.
  • the capacitive driving technique with the capacitive current source 10 compensates for TFT aging (e.g., threshold voltage variations), and thus can improve the uniformity and lifetime of the display, as described below.
  • the capacitive current source 1 1 10 may be used with a current mode analog-to-digital convertor (ADC), for example, to provide a reference current to the current mode ADC where input current is converted to digital signals.
  • ADC analog-to-digital convertor
  • the capacitive driving may be used for a digital to analog convertor (DAC) where current is generated based on the ramp voltage and the capacitor.
  • DAC digital to analog convertor
  • the integrated display system 1 120 of FIG. 25 includes a pixel array 1 122 having a plurality of pixels 1 124a-1 124d arranged in columns and rows, a gate driver 1 128 for selecting a pixel, and a source driver 1 127 for providing programming current to the selected pixel.
  • the pixels 1 124a-1 124d are current programmed pixel circuits. Each pixel includes, for example, a storage capacitor, a driving transistor, a switch transistor (or a driving and switching transistor), and a light emitting device. In FIG. 25, four pixels are shown; however, it would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that the number of the pixels in the pixel array 1 122 is not limited to four and may vary.
  • the pixel array 1 122 may include a current biased voltage programmed (CBVP) pixel or a voltage biased voltage programmed (VBCP) pixel where the pixel is operated based on current and voltage.
  • CBVP driving technique and the VBCP driving technique are suitable for the use in AMOLED displays where they enhance the settling time of the pixels.
  • Each pixel is coupled to an address line 1130 and a data line 1132.
  • Each address line 1130 is shared among the pixels in a row.
  • Each data line 1132 is, shared among the pixels in a column.
  • the gate driver 1128 drives a gate terminal of the switch transistor in the pixel via the address line 1130.
  • the source driver 1127 includes the capacitive driver 1110 for each column.
  • the capacitive driver 1110 is coupled to the data line 1132 in the corresponding column.
  • the capacitive driver 1110 drives the data line 1132.
  • a controller 1129 is provided to control and schedule programming, calibration, driving and other operations for the display array 22.
  • the controller 1129 controls the operation of the source driver 1127 and the gate driver 28.
  • Each ramp voltage generator 1112 may be calibrated.
  • the driving capacitor 1114 is implemented, for example, on the edge of the display.
  • the capacitance acts as a voltage source and adjusting the voltage of the data line 1132. After the voltage of the data line 1132 reaches a certain proper voltage, the data line 1132 acts as a virtual ground ("lout" of FIG. 24). Thus, the capacitance will act as a current source for providing a constant current, after this point. This duality results in a fast settling programming.
  • the driving capacitor 1114 and the storage capacitor of the pixel are separately allocated. However, the driving capacitor 1114 may be shared with the storage capacitor of the pixel as shown in FIG. 26.
  • FIG. 26 there is illustrated another example of an integrated display system with the capacitive driver 1110 of FIG. 24.
  • the integrated display system 1140 of FIG. 26 includes a pixel array 1142 having a plurality of pixels 1144a-l 144d arranged in columns and rows.
  • the pixels 1144a-1144d are current programmed pixel circuits, and may be same as the pixels 1124a-1124d of FIG. 25.
  • four pixels are shown; however, it would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that the number of the pixels in the pixel array 1142 is not limited to four and may vary.
  • Each pixel includes, for example, a storage capacitor, a driving transistor, a switch transistor (or a driving and switching transistor), and a light emitting device.
  • the pixel array 1142 may include the pixel of FIG. 29A where the pixel is operated based on programming voltage and current bias.
  • Each pixel is coupled to the address line 1150 and the data line 1152.
  • Each address line 1150 is shared among the pixels in a row.
  • a gate driver 1148 drives a gate terminal of the switch transistor in the pixel via the address line 1150.
  • Each data line 1152 is shared among the pixels in a column, and is coupled to a capacitor 1146 in each pixel in the column.
  • the capacitor 1146 in each pixel in the column is coupled to the ramp voltage generator 1112 via the data line 1152.
  • a source driver 1147 includes the ramp voltage generator 1112.
  • the ramp voltage generator 1112 is allocated to each column.
  • a controller 1149 is provided to control and schedule programming, calibration, driving and other operations for the display array 1142.
  • the controller 1149 controls the gate driver 1148 and the source driver 1147 having the ramp voltage generator 1112.
  • the capacitor 1146 in the pixel acts as a storage capacitor for the pixel and also acts as driving capacitance (capacitor 1114 of FIG. 24).
  • FIG. 27 there is illustrated a further example of an integrated display system with the capacitive driver 1110 of FIG. 24.
  • the integrated display system 1160 of FIG. 27 includes a pixel array 1162 having a plurality of pixels 1164a-1164d arranged in columns and rows. In FIG. 27, four pixels are shown; however, it would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that the number of the pixels in the pixel array 1162 is not limited to four and may vary.
  • the pixels 1164a-1164d are CBVP pixel circuits, each coupling to an address line 1170, a data line 1172, and a current bias line 1174.
  • Each address line 1170 is shared among the pixels in a row.
  • a gate driver 1168 drives a gate terminal of a switch transistor in the pixel via the address line 1170.
  • Each data line 1172 is shared among the pixels in a column, and is coupled to a source driver 1167 for providing programming data.
  • the source driver 1167 may further provide bias voltage (e.g., Vdd of FIG. 29).
  • Each bias line 1174 is shared among the pixels in a column.
  • the driving capacitor 1114 is allocated to each column and is coupled to the bias line 1174 and the ramp voltage generator 1112.
  • the ramp voltage generator 1112 is shared by more than one column.
  • a controller 1169 is provided to control and schedule programming, calibration, driving and other operations for the display array 1162.
  • the controller 1169 controls the source driver 1167, the gate driver 1168, and the ramp voltage generator 1112.
  • the capacitive current sources are easily put on the peripheral of the panel, resulting in reducing the implementation cost.
  • the ramp voltage generator 1112 is illustrated separately from the source driver 1167. However, the source driver 1167 may provide the ramp voltage.
  • a display system having a CBVP pixel circuit uses voltage to provide for different gray scales (voltage programming), and uses a bias to accelerate the programming and compensate for the time dependent parameters of a pixel, such as a threshold voltage shift and OLED voltage shift.
  • a driver for driving a display array having the CBVP pixel circuit converts pixel luminance data into voltage.
  • the overdrive voltage is generated and provided to the driving transistor, which is independent from its threshold voltage and the OLED voltage.
  • the shift(s) of the characteristic(s) of a pixel element(s) e.g. the threshold voltage shift of a driving transistor and the degradation of a light emitting device under prolonged display operation
  • the pixel circuit can provide a stable current though the light emitting device without any effect of the shifts, which improves the display operating lifetime.
  • the circuit simplicity ensures higher product yield, lower fabrication cost and higher resolution than conventional pixel circuits.
  • the settling time of the pixel circuits is much smaller than conventional pixel circuits, it is suitable for large-area display such as high definition TV, but it also does not preclude smaller display areas either.
  • the capacitive driving technique is applicable to the CBVP display to further improve the settling time suitable for larger and higher resolution displays.
  • the capacitive driving technique provides a unique opportunity to share the current bias line and voltage data line in CBVP displays.
  • FIG. 28 there is illustrated a further example of an integrated display system with the capacitive driver 1110 of FIG. 24.
  • the integrated display system 1180 of FIG. 28 includes a pixel array 1182 having a plurality of pixels 1184a-1184d arranged in columns and rows.
  • the pixels 1184a-1184d are CBVP pixel circuits, and may be same as the pixels 1164a-1 164d of FIG. 23. In FIG. 24, four pixels are shown; however, it would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that the number of the pixels in the pixel array 1182 is not limited to four and may vary.
  • Each pixel is coupled to the address line 1190 and the voltage data/current bias line 1192.
  • Each address line 1190 is shared among the pixels in a row.
  • a gate driver 1188 drives a gate terminal of the switch transistor in the pixel via the address line 1190.
  • Each voltage data/current bias line 1192 is shared among the pixels in a column, and is coupled to a capacitor 1186 in each pixel in the column. The capacitor 1186 in each pixel in the column is coupled to the ramp voltage generator 1112 via the voltage data/current bias line 1192.
  • a source driver 1187 has the ramp voltage generator 1112. The ramp voltage generator 1112 is allocated to each column.
  • a controller 1189 is provided to control and schedule programming, calibration, driving and other operations for the display array 1182. The controller 1189 controls the gate driver 1188 and the source driver 1187 having the ramp voltage generator 1112.
  • the capacitor 1186 in the pixel acts as a storage capacitor for the pixel and also acts as driving capacitance (capacitor 1114 of FIG. 24).
  • FIG. 29A there is illustrated an example of a CBVP pixel circuit which is applicable to the pixel of FIG. 28.
  • the pixel circuit CBVPOl of FIG. 29 includes a driving transistor 1202, a switch transistor 1204, a light emitting device 1206, and a capacitor 1208.
  • the transistors 1202 and 1204 are p-type transistors; however, one of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate that a CBVP pixel having n-type transistors is also applicable as the pixel of FIG. 28.
  • the gate terminal of the driving transistor 1202 is coupled to the capacitor 1208 at B01.
  • One of the first and second terminals of the driving transistor 1202 is coupled a power supply (Vdd) 1210 and the other is coupled to the light emitting device 1206 at node A01.
  • the light emitting device 1206 is coupled to a power supply (Vss) 1212.
  • the gate terminal of the switch transistor 1204 is coupled to an address line SEL.
  • One of the first and second terminals of the switch transistor 1204 is coupled to the gate of the driving transistor 1202 and the other is coupled to the light emitting device 1206 and the driving transistor 1202 at A01.
  • the capacitor 1208 is coupled between a data line Vdata and the gate terminal of the driving transistor 1202.
  • the capacitor 1208 acts as a storage capacitor and a capacitive current source (1114 of FIG. 24) as a driver element.
  • the capacitor 1208 corresponds to the capacitor 1186 of FIG. 28.
  • the address line SEL corresponds to the address line 1190 of FIG. 28.
  • the data line Vdata corresponds to the voltage data/current bias line 1192 of FIG. 28, and is coupled to the ramp voltage generator (1112 of FIG. 24).
  • the source driver 1187 of FIG. 28 operates on the data line Vdata to provide a bias signal and programming data (Vp) to the pixel.
  • the ramp voltage is used to carry the bias current while the initial voltage of the ramp (Vp + Vrefl) is used to send the programming voltage to the pixel circuit CBVPOl, as shown in FIG. 29B.
  • the operation cycles of the pixel circuit CBVPOl includes a programming cycle 1220 and a driving cycle 1226.
  • the power supply Vdd coupled to the driving transistor 1202 is low during the programming cycle 1220.
  • a ramp voltage is provided to the data line Vdata.
  • the voltage of the Vdata goes from (Vp + Vrefl) to Vp where Vp is a programming voltage for programming the pixel and Vrefl is a reference voltage.
  • the address line SEL is set to a low voltage so that the switch transistor 1204 is on.
  • the capacitor 1208 acts as a current source.
  • the voltage of node A01 goes to VB T i where VB is a function of Tl's characteristics (Tl : the driving transistor 1202) and the voltage of node B01 goes to VB T i+Vr T2 where Vr T2 is the voltage drop across T2 (T2: the switch transistor 1204).
  • the voltage of Vdata remains Vp, and the address line SEL goes high to render the switch transistor 1204 off.
  • the capacitor 1208 acts as a storage element.
  • the data line Vdata goes to Vref2 and stay at Vref2 for the rest of the frame.
  • Vrefl defines the level of bias current Ibias and it is determined, for example, based on TFT, OLED, and display characteristics and specifications.
  • Vref2 is a function of Vrefl and pixel characteristics.
  • FIGS. 30A-30B there are illustrated graphs showing simulation results for the pixel circuit of FIG. 29A using the operation of FIG. 29B.
  • “AVT” represents variation of driving transistor threshold V T
  • “ ⁇ ” represents mobility (cm 2 Ns).
  • the pixel current is stable for all gray scales.
  • Circuits disclosed herein generally refer to circuit components being connected or coupled to one another.
  • the connections referred to are made via direct connections, i.e., with no circuit elements between the connection points other than conductive lines.
  • such connections can be made by conductive channels defined on substrates of a display panel such as by conductive transparent oxides deposited between the various connection points. Indium tin oxide is one such conductive transparent oxide.
  • the components that are coupled and/or connected may be coupled via capacitive coupling between the points of connection, such that the points of connection are connected in series through a capacitive element. While not directly connected, such capacitively coupled connections still allow the points of connection to influence one another via changes in voltage which are reflected at the other point of connection via the capacitive coupling effects and without a DC bias.
  • the various connections and couplings described herein can be achieved through non-direct connections, with another circuit element between the two points of connection.
  • the one or more circuit element disposed between the points of connection can be a diode, a resistor, a transistor, a switch, etc.
  • the voltage and/or current between the two points of connection are sufficiently related, via the connecting circuit elements, to be related such that the two points of connection can influence each another (via voltage changes, current changes, etc.) while still achieving substantially the same functions as described herein.
  • voltages and/or current levels may be adjusted to account for additional circuit elements providing non-direct connections, as can be appreciated by individuals skilled in the art of circuit design.
  • Any of the circuits disclosed herein can be fabricated according to many different fabrication technologies, including for example, poly-silicon, amorphous silicon, organic semiconductor, metal oxide, and conventional CMOS. Any of the circuits disclosed herein can be modified by their complementary circuit architecture counterpart (e.g., n-type transistors can be converted to p-type transistors and vice versa).

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Control Of Indicators Other Than Cathode Ray Tubes (AREA)
  • Control Of El Displays (AREA)
  • Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)

Abstract

Circuits for programming a circuit with decreased programming time are provided. Such circuits include a storage device such as a capacitor for storing display information and for ensuring a driving device such as a driving transistor drives a light emitting device according to the display information. To increase programming time, the pixel circuits may be pre-charged or a biasing current may be applied to charge and/or discharge a data line and/or the driving device. Aspects of the present disclosure allow for the biasing current to drain partially through the storage device to allow the portion of the biasing current applied to the driving device to remain small while the data line discharges. Furthermore, the present disclosure provides display architectures and operation schemes for display arranged in segments each including a plurality of pixel circuits.

Description

SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FAST COMPENSATION PROGRAMMING OF
PIXELS IN A DISPLAY
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
[0001] The present disclosure generally relates to circuits and methods of driving, calibrating, and programming displays, particularly displays such as active matrix organic light emitting diode displays.
BACKGROUND
[0002] Displays can be created from an array of light emitting devices each controlled by individual circuits (i.e., pixel circuits) having transistors for selectively controlling the circuits to be programmed with display information and to emit light according to the display information. Thin film transistors ("TFTs") fabricated on a substrate can be incorporated into such displays. TFTs fabricated on poly-silicon tend to demonstrate non-uniform behavior across display panels and over time. Some displays therefore utilize compensation techniques to achieve image uniformity in poly-silicon TFT panels.
[0003] Compensated pixel circuits generally have shortcomings when pushing speed, pixel-pitch ("pixel density"), and uniformity to the limit, which leads to design trade-offs to balance competing demands amongst programming speed, pixel-pitch, and uniformity. For example, additional lines and transistors associated with each pixel circuit may allow for additional compensation leading to greater uniformity, yet undesirably decrease pixel-pitch. In another example, programming speed may be increased by biasing or pre-charging each pixel circuit with a relatively high biasing current or initial charge, however, uniformity is enhanced by utilizing a relatively low biasing current or initial charge. Thus, a display designer is forced to make trade-offs between competing demands for programming speed, pixel-pitch, and uniformity.
[0004] Displays configured to display a video feed of moving images typically refresh the display at a regular frequency for each frame of the video feed being displayed. Displays incorporating an active matrix can allow individual pixel circuits to be programmed with display information during a program phase and then emit light according to the display information during an emission phase. Thus, displays operate with a duty cycle characterized by the relative durations of the program phase and the emission phase. In addition, the displays operate with a frequency that is characterized by the refresh rate of the display. The refresh rate of the display can also be influenced by the frame rate of the video stream. In such displays, the display can be darkened during program phases while the pixel circuits are receiving programming information. Thus, in some displays, the display is repeatedly darkened and brightened at the refresh rate of the display. A viewer of the display can undesirably perceive that the display is flickering depending on the frequency of the refresh rate.
BRIEF SUMMARY
[0005] Aspects of the present disclosure provide systems and methods for utilizing a current divider created by a storage capacitor within a pixel circuit and a capacitance associated with a data line coupled to the pixel circuit to divide a reference current applied to the data line. The divided current simultaneously calibrates the pixel circuit and discharges the data line prior to a driving interval. Advantageously, the portion of the reference current that discharges the data line can be of a greater magnitude than the portion of the reference current that calibrates the pixel circuit. The reference current is divided according to the relative capacitance of the storage capacitor and the capacitance of the data line. In implementations where the capacitance of the data line is much greater than the capacitance of the storage capacitor, the data line is discharged quickly by a large current, while the current through a driving transistor within the pixel circuit remains small. Dividing the current in this manner simultaneously ensures that the data line is rapidly discharged and thus the pixel circuit is able to be programmed swiftly, while the current through the driving transistor is kept small to prevent the uniformity of the display from being adversely affected by the enhanced settling time.
[0006] Aspects of the present disclosure also advantageously allow for applying a reference current ("biasing current") through a data programming line rather than a separate line. Utilizing the same line for multiple purposes thus allows the pixel density to be increased and thereby increase display resolution by decreasing pixel size.
[0007] Particular pixel circuit configurations suitable for implementation are provided, but it is recognized that the present disclosure applies to current programmed pixel circuits, pixel circuits with n-type or p-type transistors, and pixel circuits in a variety of possible configurations that allow for a storage capacitor to divide a reference current that is applied to a data line to simultaneously discharge the data line while calibrating the pixel circuit. Other suitable configurations may include storage capacitors having one terminal coupled to a data line, with another terminal of the storage capacitor coupled to a current path of a driving transistor. [0008] Aspects of the present disclosure further provide for methods of driving a display to decrease, or even eliminate, a perception of flickering in the display by increasing the refresh rate of the display. For a video stream, each frame in the video stream may be displayed more than once in order to increase the refresh rate of the display beyond the frame rate of the video stream and thereby decrease the perception of flickering experienced at the frame rate of the video. Aspects provide for implementations of the increased refresh rate in overlapping configurations where distinct portions of a display are updated sequentially during different refresh events, but all spanning a single frame time. The distinct portions can be odd and even rows of the display, or halves, thirds, etc. of the display (e.g., top and bottom halves, left and right halves, etc.).
[0009] The foregoing and additional aspects and embodiments of the present disclosure will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art in view of the detailed description of various embodiments and/or aspects, which is made with reference to the drawings, a brief description of which is provided next.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0010] The foregoing and other advantages of the present disclosure will become apparent upon reading the following detailed description and upon reference to the drawings.
[0011] FIG. 1 is a diagram of an exemplary display system including includes an address driver, a data driver, a controller, a memory storage, and display panel.
[0012] FIG. 2A is a block diagram of an example pixel circuit configuration for a display that incorporates a monitoring line.
[0013] FIG. 2B is a circuit diagram including a pixel circuit for a display that is labeled to illustrate a current path during a program phase of the pixel circuit.
[0014] FIG. 2C is a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in FIG. 2A, which is labeled to illustrate a current path during an emission phase of the pixel circuit.
[0015] FIG. 2D is a timing diagram illustrating a programming and emission operation of the pixel circuit shown in FIGS. 2B and 2C.
[0016] FIG. 2E is an alternate timing diagram for the pixel circuit in FIGS. 2B and 2C which includes a voltage pre-charge cycle.
[0017] FIG. 2F is another alternate timing diagram for the pixel circuit in FIGS. 2B and 2C which includes a current pre-charge cycle. [0018] FIG. 3A illustrates a graph of simulation results for drive current error versus mobility variations at low grayscale programming values.
[0019] FIG. 3B illustrates a graph of simulation results for drive current error versus mobility variations at high grayscale programming values.
[0020] FIG. 4A is a block diagram of another example pixel circuit for a display.
[0021] FIG. 4B is a circuit diagram including a pixel circuit for a display that is labeled to illustrate a current path during a pre-charge phase of the pixel circuit.
[0022] FIG. 4C is a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in FIG. 4B, which is labeled to illustrate a current path during a program phase of the pixel circuit.
[0023] FIG. 4D is a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in FIG. 4B, which is labeled to illustrate a current path during an emission phase of the pixel circuit.
[0024] FIG. 4E is a timing diagram illustrating pre-charging, compensation, and emission cycles of the pixel shown in FIGS. 4B-4D.
[0025] FIG. 4F is a timing diagram illustrating the change in voltage on the data line during the compensation phase shown schematically in FIG. 4C.
[0026] FIG. 5 illustrates a circuit diagram for a portion of a display showing two pixel circuits in an example configuration suited to providing enhanced settling time.
[0027] FIG. 6 illustrates a circuit diagram for a portion of a display showing two other pixel circuits in an example configuration also suited to providing enhanced settling time.
[0028] FIG. 7 illustrates a circuit diagram for a portion of a display showing still two more pixel circuits in an example configuration also suited to providing enhanced settling time.
[0029] FIG. 8A is a circuit diagram of a pixel circuit configured to provide the pre- charging and compensation cycle simultaneously.
[0030] FIG. 8B is a timing diagram illustrating the operation of the simultaneous pre- charge and compensation cycle.
[0031] FIG. 9A illustrates an additional configuration of a pixel circuit configured to program the pixel circuit via a programming capacitor connected to a gate terminal of a drive transistor via a first selection transistor.
[0032] FIG. 9B is an alternative pixel circuit configured similarly to the pixel circuit shown in FIG. 9A, but with an additional switch transistor connected in series with the second switch transistor. [0033] FIG. 10 is a timing diagram describing an exemplary operation of the pixel circuit of FIG. 9A or the pixel circuit of FIG. 9B.
[0034] FIG. 11 illustrates a circuit diagram of a portion of a display panel in which multiple pixel circuits are arranged to share a common programming capacitor.
[0035] FIG. 12A is a timing diagram of an exemplary operation of the "kth" segment shown in FIG. 11.
[0036] FIG. 12B is a timing diagram of another exemplary operation of the "kth" segment shown in FIG. 11.
[0037] FIG. 13A is a timing diagram for driving a single frame of a segmented display.
[0038] FIG. 13B is a flow chart corresponding to the timing diagram shown in FIG. 13 A.
[0039] FIGS. 14A and 14B provide experimental results of percentage errors in pixel currents given variations in device parameters for pixel circuits such as those shown in FIGS. 9 A and 9B.
[0040] FIG. 15A is a circuit diagram showing a portion of the gate driver including control lines ("CNTi") to regulate the first select lines for each segment.
[0041] FIG. 15B is a diagram of the first two gate outputs which are used to provide the first select lines for the first two segments.
[0042] FIG. 16 is a timing diagram for a display array operated by an address driver utilizing control lines to generate the first select line signals.
[0043] FIG. 17A is a block diagram of a source driver with an integrated voltage ramp generator for driving each data line in a display panel.
[0044] FIG. 17B is a block diagram of another source driver that provides a ramp voltage for each data line in a display panel and includes a cyclic digital to analog converter.
[0045] FIG. 18A is a display system including a demultiplexer to share multiple data lines with a single output terminal of the source driver.
[0046] FIG. 18B is a timing diagram for the display array shown in FIG. 18A illustrating problems in setting pixels to new data values.
[0047] FIG. 18C is a timing diagram for operation of the display system shown in FIG. 18A, which pre-charges data line capacitances before selecting rows for programming.
[0048] FIG. 19A pictorially illustrates a programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle. [0049] FIG. 19B pictorially illustrates an example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle, which is adapted to decrease flickering associated with the display.
[0050] FIG. 20A pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50%> duty cycle similar to FIG. 19B, but with a frame time two times as long as the frame time illustrated by FIG. 19B.
[0051] FIG. 20B pictorially illustrates yet another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50%> duty cycle similar to FIG. 19B, but with a frame time three times as long as the frame time illustrated by FIG. 19B.
[0052] FIG. 21 A pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame while separately programming portions of the display during distinct program phases.
[0053] FIG. 2 IB pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame while separately programming interlaced portions of the display during distinct program phases.
[0054] FIG. 21C pictorially illustrates example programming and emission sequences for displaying a single frame where the sequence illustrated in FIG. 21B is followed by additional emission and idle phases or where the sequence illustrated in FIG. 2 IB is interrupted by additional programming and idle phases.
[0055] FIG. 2 ID pictorially illustrates still another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame where portions of the display are sorted into four interlaced groupings according to row numbers and each portion is separately programmed.
[0056] FIG. 22A is a block diagram of a circuit layout for connecting alternating rows of a display panel to distinct data lines.
[0057] FIG. 22B is a block diagram of a circuit layout for connecting interlaced pixels of a display panel to distinct data lines.
[0058] FIG. 23A is a timing diagram for a display panel with distinct portions that are programmed in distinct intervals and which share data lines.
[0059] FIG. 23B is a timing diagram for a display panel with distinct portions that are programmed in distinct intervals and which do not share data lines.
[0060] FIG. 24 illustrates a bidirectional current source in accordance with an embodiment of the disclosure. [0061] FIG. 25 illustrates an example of a display system with the bidirectional current source of FIG. 24.
[0062] FIG. 26 illustrates a further example of a display system with the bidirectional current source of FIG. 24.
[0063] FIG. 27 illustrates a further example of a display system with the bidirectional current source of FIG. 24.
[0064] FIG. 28 illustrates a further example of a display system with the bidirectional current source of FIG. 24.
[0065] FIG. 29A illustrates an example of a current biased voltage programmed pixel circuit applicable to the display system of FIG. 28.
[0066] FIG. 29B illustrates an example of a timing diagram for the pixel circuit of FIG.
29A.
[0067] FIG. 30A illustrates simulation results for the pixel circuit of FIG. 29A.
[0068] FIG. 30B illustrates further simulation results for the pixel circuit of FIG. 29A.
[0069] While the present disclosure is susceptible to various modifications and alternative forms, specific embodiments and implementations have been shown by way of example in the drawings and will be described in detail herein. It should be understood, however, that the present disclosure is not intended to be limited to the particular forms disclosed. Rather, the present disclosure is to cover all modifications, equivalents, and alternatives falling within the spirit and scope of the inventions as defined by the appended claims.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0070] One or more currently preferred embodiments have been described by way of example. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the art that a number of variations and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the invention as defined in the claims.
[0071] Embodiments of the present invention are described using a display system that may be fabricated using different fabrication technologies including, for example, but not limited to, amorphous silicon, poly silicon, metal oxide, conventional CMOS, organic, anon/micro crystalline semiconductors or combinations thereof. The display system includes a pixel that may have a transistor, a capacitor and a light emitting device. The transistor may be implemented in a variety of materials systems technologies including, amorphous Si, micro/nano-crystalline Si, poly-crystalline Si, organic/polymer materials and related nanocomposites, semiconducting oxides or combinations thereof. The capacitor can have different structure including metal-insulator-metal and metal-insulator-semiconductor. The light emitting device may be, for example, but not limited to, an OLED. The display system may be, but not limited to, an AMOLED display system.
[0072] In the description, "pixel circuit" and "pixel" may be used interchangeably. Each transistor may have a gate terminal and two other terminals (first and second terminals). In the description, one of the terminals or "first terminal" (the other terminal or "second terminal") of a transistor may correspond to, but not limited to, a drain terminal (a source terminal) or a source terminal (a drain terminal).
[0073] FIG. 1 is a diagram of an exemplary display system 50. The display system 50 includes an address driver 8, a data driver 4, a controller 2, a memory storage 6, and a display panel 20. The display panel 20 includes an array of pixels 10 arranged in rows and columns. Each of the pixels 10 are individually programmable to emit light with individually programmable luminance values. The controller 2 receives digital data indicative of information to be displayed on the display panel 20 (such as a video stream). The controller 2 sends signals 32 to the data driver 4 and scheduling signals 34 to the address driver 8 to drive the pixels 10 in the display panel 20 to display the information indicated. The plurality of pixels 10 associated with the display panel 20 thus comprise a display array ("display screen") adapted to dynamically display information according to the input digital data received by the controller 2. The display screen can display, for example, video information from a stream of video data received by the controller 2. The supply voltage 14 can provide constant power voltage(s) or can be an adjustable voltage supply that is controlled by signals 38 from the controller 2. The display system 50 can also incorporate features from a current source or sink (e.g., the current source 134 in FIG. 2B or the current source 234 in FIG. 4C) to provide biasing currents to the pixels 10 in the display panel 20 to thereby decrease programming time for the pixels 10.
[0074] For illustrative purposes, the display system 50 in FIG. 1 is illustrated with only four pixels 10 in the display panel 20. It is understood that the display system 50 can be implemented with a display screen that includes an array of similar pixels, such as the pixels 10, and that the display screen is not limited to a particular number of rows and columns of pixels. For example, the display system 50 can be implemented with a display screen with a number of rows and columns of pixels commonly available in displays for mobile devices, monitor-based devices, and/or projection-devices.
[0075] The pixel 10 is operated by a driving circuit ("pixel circuit") that generally includes a driving transistor and a light emitting device. Hereinafter the pixel 10 may refer to the pixel circuit. The light emitting device can optionally be an organic light emitting diode, but implementations of the present disclosure apply to pixel circuits having other electroluminescence devices, including current-driven light emitting devices. The driving transistor in the pixel 10 can include thin film transistors ("TFTs"), which an optionally be n- type or p-type amorphous silicon TFTs or poly-silicon TFTs. However, implementations of the present disclosure are not limited to pixel circuits having a particular polarity or material of transistor or only to pixel circuits having TFTs. The pixel circuit 10 can also include a storage capacitor for storing programming information and allowing the pixel circuit 10 to drive the light emitting device after being addressed. Thus, the display panel 20 can be an active matrix display array.
[0076] As illustrated in FIG. 1, the pixel 10 illustrated as the top-left pixel in the display panel 20 is coupled to a select line 24i, supply line 26i, 27i, a data line 22j, and a monitor line 28j. The first supply line 26i can be charged with VDD and the second supply line 27i can be charged with VSS. The pixel circuits 10 can be situated between the first and second supply lines to allow driving currents to flow between the two supply lines 26i, 27i during an emission cycle of the pixel circuit. The top-left pixel 10 in the display panel 20 can correspond to a pixel in the display panel in a "ith" row and "jth" column of the display panel 20. Similarly, the top- right pixel 10 in the display panel 20 represents a "ith" row and "mth" column; the bottom- left pixel 10 represents an "nth" row and "jth" column; and the bottom-right pixel 10 represents an "nth" row and "mth" column. Each of the pixels 10 is coupled to appropriate select lines (e.g., the select lines 24i and 24n), supply lines (e.g., the supply lines 26i, 26n, and 27i, 27n), data lines (e.g., the data lines 22j and 22m), and monitor lines (e.g., the monitor lines 28j and 28m). It is noted that aspects of the present disclosure apply to pixels having additional connections, such as connections to additional select lines, including global select lines, and to pixels having fewer connections, such as pixels lacking a connection to a monitoring line.
[0077] With reference to the top-left pixel 10 shown in the display panel 20, the select line 24i is provided by the address driver 8, and can be utilized to enable, for example, a programming operation of the pixel 10 by activating a switch or transistor to allow the data line 22j to program the pixel 10. The data line 22j conveys programming information from the data driver 4 to the pixel 10. For example, the data line 22j can be utilized to apply a programming voltage or a programming current to the pixel 10 in order to program the pixel 10 to emit a desired amount of luminance. The programming voltage (or programming current) supplied by the data driver 4 via the data line 22j is a voltage (or current) appropriate to cause the pixel 10 to emit light with a desired amount of luminance according to the digital data received by the controller 2. The programming voltage (or programming current) can be applied to the pixel 10 during a programming operation of the pixel 10 so as to charge a storage device within the pixel 10, such as a storage capacitor, thereby enabling the pixel 10 to emit light with the desired amount of luminance during an emission operation following the programming operation. For example, the storage device in the pixel 10 can be charged during the programming operation to apply a voltage to one or more of a gate or a source terminal of the driving transistor during the emission operation, thereby causing the driving transistor to convey the driving current through the light emitting device according to the voltage stored on the storage device.
[0078] Generally, in the pixel 10, the driving current that is conveyed through the light emitting device by the driving transistor during the emission operation of the pixel 10 is a current that is supplied by the first supply line 26i and is drained to the second supply line 27i. The first supply line 26i and the second supply line 27i are coupled to the voltage supply 14. The first supply line 26i can provide a positive supply voltage (e.g., the voltage commonly referred to in circuit design as "Vdd") and the second supply line 27i can provide a negative supply voltage (e.g., the voltage commonly referred to in circuit design as "Vss"). Implementations of the present disclosure can be realized where one or the other of the supply lines (e.g., the supply lines 26i, 27i) are fixed at a ground voltage or at another reference voltage. Implementations of the present disclosure also apply to systems where the voltage supply 14 is implemented to adjustably control the voltage levels provided on one or both of the supply lines (e.g,. the supply lines 26i, 27i). The output voltages of the voltage supply 14 can be dynamically adjusted according to control signals 38 from the controller 2. Implementations of the present disclosure also apply to systems where one or both of the voltage supply lines 26i, 27i are shared by more than one row of pixels in the display panel 20.
[0079] The display system 50 also includes a monitoring system 12. With reference again to the top left pixel 10 in the display panel 20, the monitor line 28j connects the pixel 10 to the monitoring system 12. The monitoring system 12 can be integrated with the data driver 4, or can be a separate stand-alone system. Furthermore, the monitoring system 12 can optionally be implemented by monitoring the current and/or voltage of the data line 22j during a monitoring operation of the pixel 10, and the monitor line 28j can be entirely omitted. Additionally, the display system 50 can be implemented without the monitoring system 12 or the monitor line 28j. The monitor line 28j allows the monitoring system 12 to measure a current and/or voltage associated with the pixel 10 and thereby extract information indicative of a degradation of the pixel 10. For example, the monitoring system 12 can extract, via the monitor line 28j, a current flowing through the driving transistor within the pixel 10 and thereby determine, based on the measured current and based on the voltages applied to the driving transistor during the measurement, a threshold voltage of the driving transistor or a shift thereof. Furthermore, a voltage extracted via the monitoring lines 28j, 28m can be indicative of a degradation in the respective pixels 10 due to changes in the current-voltage characteristics of the pixels 10 or due to shifts in the operating voltages of light emitting devices situated within the pixels 10.
[0080] The monitoring system 12 can also extract an operating voltage of the light emitting device (e.g., a voltage drop across the light emitting device while the light emitting device is operating to emit light). The monitoring system 12 can then communicate the signals 32 to the controller 2 and/or the memory 6 to allow the display system 50 to store the extracted degradation information in the memory 6. During subsequent programming and/or emission operations of the pixel 10, the degradation information is retrieved from the memory 6 by the controller 2 via the memory signals 36, and the controller 2 then compensates for the extracted degradation information in subsequent programming and/or emission operations of the pixel 10. For example, once the degradation information is extracted, the programming information conveyed to the pixel 10 during a subsequent programming operation can be appropriately adjusted such that the pixel 10 emits light with a desired amount of luminance that is independent of the degradation of the pixel 10. For example, an increase in the threshold voltage of the driving transistor within the pixel 10 can be compensated for by appropriately increasing the programming voltage applied to the pixel 10.
[0081] As will be described further herein, implementations of the current disclosure apply to systems that do not include separate monitor lines for each column of the display panel 20, such as where monitoring feedback is provided via a line used for another purpose (e.g., the data line 22j), or where compensation is accomplished within each pixel 10 without the use of an external compensation system, or to combinations thereof. [0082] FIG. 2A is a block diagram of an example pixel circuit configuration 110 for the display system 50 that incorporates the monitoring line 28j. As discussed above, TFTs fabricated in poly-silicon tend to demonstrate non-uniform behavior across a display panel (e.g,. the display panel 20) and over time (e.g., over a display's operating life time). Compensation techniques to achieve image uniformity in poly-silicon TFT panels, as well as other TFT materials (e.g., amorphous silicon, etc.), are provided herein.
[0083] In some display systems, the general functionality of compensation techniques relies on the application of a uniform reference current to the pixel circuit. The reference current is used to develop a gate-to-source voltage on the TFT drive device. This voltage is a function of threshold, mobility, and other parameters across panel, time and temperature variations. The developed voltage is stored on the storage element which is then used as a calibration factor to provide programming to the pixel. During the programming of the pixel in each frame, programming data is modified according to the calibration factor stored in the storage element. As a result, real-time compensation for parameter variations in the TFT drive device can be achieved, but each programming operation must be preceded by the compensation operation to first generate the calibration factor and store it in the storage element. Such compensated pixel circuits thus have some shortcoming when pushing the programming speed, pixel density, and uniformity to their respective limits, and a display designer is therefore required to make design choices. Modified techniques and driving schemes are presented in this disclosure to tackle the challenges of compensation method(s) requiring such design trade-offs.
[0084] The pixel circuit 110 of FIG. 2A features a dedicated monitor line 28j and a monitor switch 120 to apply the reference current to the selected pixel out of a vertical column of pixels (e.g., the pixels in the "jth" column) on the panel 20. The voltage on the voltage supply line 26i ("VDD") is toggled low to VDDL by the voltage supply 14 during the programming cycle to avoid interference from the light emitting device 114 ("OLED"). For example, by setting VDDL to a level sufficient to turn off the OLED 114, the programming operation can be carried out without emitting light from the OLED 114.
[0085] FIG. 2A illustrates a block diagram of a pixel circuit 110, which can be implemented as the pixel 10 in the display system 50 shown in FIG. 1. The pixel circuit 110 includes a drive device 112, which can be a drive transistor, a storage element 116, which can be a storage capacitor, an access switch 118, which can be a switch transistor, and a monitor switch 122. The drive transistor 112 conveys a driving current to the light emitting device 114 ("OLED") according to a programming voltage stored on the storage capacitor 116 and applied to the gate and/or source terminals of the drive transistor 112. The programming voltage is developed on the storage capacitor 116 by selectively connecting one and/or both terminals of the storage capacitor 116 to the data line 22j via the switch transistor 118. The switch transistor 118 is operated according to the select line 24i and/or the emission line 25, which can be a global select line that is shared by pixels in more than one row of the display array 20.
[0086] FIG. 2B is a circuit diagram including an exemplary implementation of the pixel circuit 110 represented by the block diagram in FIG. 2A. The circuit diagram in FIG. 2B is labeled with an arrow 150 to illustrate a current path through the pixel circuit 110 during a programming cycle 160. Similarly, the circuit diagram in FIB. 2C is labeled with an arrow 154 to illustrate a current path through the pixel circuit 110 during an emission cycle 164. Transistors illustrated in the circuit diagrams in FIGS. 2B and 2C which are turned off during the respectively illustrated operation cycles are illustrated with hashed marks to indicate they are turned off. A timing diagram illustrating the programming cycle 150 and emission cycle 160 is provided in FIG. 2D. The pixel circuit 110 illustrated in FIGS. 2B and 2C will thus be described in connection with the timing diagram in FIG. 2D.
[0087] As shown by the arrow 150 in FIG. 2B, the reference current "(IREF") flows directly through the drive device 112 ("drive transistor") which can be, for example, a poly- silicon TFT. As a result of the application of the reference current IREF, a voltage is developed on the gate terminal of the drive transistor 112 given by equation 1 :
Figure imgf000015_0001
[0088] where K is the current factor of the drive TFT 112 which is a function of mobility (μ), unit gate oxide (Cox), and the aspect ratio of the device (W/L), as shown in equation 2:
1 W
Κ = - μ 0οχ— (2)
2 L
[0089] The voltage on the gate terminal (i.e., the gate voltage) on the drive transistor 112 also sets the voltage on one side of the storage element 116 ("storage capacitor Cs")- As shown in FIG. 2B, the gate node 112g, which is directly connected to both the gate terminal of the drive transistor 112 and one terminal of the storage capacitor 116, is labeled as having VGO- Meanwhile, during the programming cycle 150, the other side ("second terminal") of the storage capacitor 116 is set to the desired data voltage, VD, which is a representative of the grayscale luminance level to be programmed. The data voltage VD is programmed through the data line 22j by an output channel of the source driver 4. At the end of the programming cycle 150, the voltage stored on the storage capacitor 116 is given by equation 3:
VC = VD - VGO (3)
[0090] Once the programming cycle 150 is completed the select transistor 118 and the monitor switch transistor 120 are deactivated by setting the select line 24i to a high level. An additional period 152 can then elapse while other rows (e.g., the "nth" row selected by the select line 24n) in the display panel 20 are programmed. An emission cycle 154 can then be commenced once all rows are programmed. Additionally or alternatively, the emission cycle 154 can be commenced once each individual row is programmed without waiting for other rows to be programmed during the period 152. In the emission phase 154 the data line 22j is isolated from the source driver 6 and connected to a reference voltage VREF- AS shown in FIGS. 2B and 2C, isolating the data line 22j can be accomplished by coupling the data line 22j to the source driver 6 via a programming switch 130 operated according to a programming signal ("Prog") conveyed on a programming line 138. The reference voltage VREF can then be supplied to the data line 22j via a switch transistor 132 operated according to an emission signal ("EM") conveyed on an emission control line 25. One or both of the emission control line 25 and the programming line 138 can be implemented as global signals to simultaneously control the connections to the data line 22j across the entire display panel 20, or to portions thereof. Upon coupling the data line 22j to the reference voltage VREF, the new gate voltage of the drive transistor 112 during the emission phase 154 is given by equation 4:
Figure imgf000016_0001
[0091] Also, the voltage on the supply voltage line 26i is toggled to VDDH, which can be considered an operating voltage of the supply voltage line 26i which is sufficient to turn the OLED 114 on. Accordingly, the gate-source voltage of the drive transistor 112 is given by equation 5 :
I VGS I VDDH VG— VDDH + VD VDDL + VTH + ^ (5)
[0092] By defining a program voltage Vp as follows in equation 6:
Δ
v ' P =v ' D + Τ v ' DDE - v ' DDL -v ' REF ( V6u)/ [0093] the equation for gate-source voltage of the drive TFT 112 is simplified, as shown in equation 7:
Figure imgf000017_0001
0094] Accordingly, the pixel drive current is given by equation 8:
Figure imgf000017_0002
[0095] Equation 8 confirms that the above described compensation technique eliminates the first order effects of the threshold voltage variations from the drive current.
[0096] FIG. 3A illustrates a graph of simulation results for drive current error versus mobility variations at low grayscale programming values. FIG. 3B illustrates a graph of simulation results for drive current error versus mobility variations at high grayscale programming values. The effectiveness of the compensation for mobility variations is affected by the amount of the reference current IREF- The compensation in both low and high grayscale levels, as shown in FIG. 3A and FIG. 3B, respectively, is more effective when a lower value of the reference current is utilized. Accordingly, to realize effective compensation across the display panel 20, a low reference current is preferred.
[0097] With reference to FIGS. 2B and 2C, the monitor line 28j introduces a significant parasitic capacitance 136 to the signal path of the reference current IREF- Accordingly, a large value of the reference current IREF is sought so as to achieve fast settling time. Therefore, in the compensation techniques described in reference to FIGS. 2A-2D, there is a trade-off between achievable uniformity and settling time when designing for a particular value of the reference current IREF. When the pixel circuit is pushed towards very high PPI (pixel per inch) applications, tackling this design trade-off becomes more challenging because of the very tight area restrictions. A two cycle programming including a precharging cycle 160a, 161a and an adjustment cycle 160b, 161b is discussed below which can improve the effectiveness of compensation. The two cycle programming techniques are illustrated by the timing diagrams in FIGS. 2E and 2F, respectively. The modified compensation techniques disclosed next break the speed-uniformity trade-off and are fully compatible with available industry standards and driver components. These techniques therefore offer a significant performance improvement which can be implemented without substantial fabrication modifications that require extensive capital investments.
[0098] One approach of implementing a two-phase compensation technique is to precharge the capacitance 136 of the monitor line 28j during a pre-charging cycle 150a and then allow some time (Tp) for the drive transistor 112 to adjust the voltage on the data line 22j during an adjustment cycle 160b. The monitor switch transistor 120 can disconnect the monitor line 28j from the pixel circuit 110 during the adjustment cycle 160b. The timing diagram in FIG. 2E illustrates the voltage pre-charging approach to pre-charge the capacitance 136. The precharging can be accomplished by setting the voltage on the monitor line 28j to a constant value VpreQ. In this case, it can be shown that the drive current is given by equation 9:
Figure imgf000018_0001
[0099] where Tp is the adjustment time, Vp is the program voltage and τ is the time constant of the charge path through the drive device. The time constant τ is given by equation 10: τ = = ±- (10)
§ mo
[00100] in which gmo is the transconductance of the drive transistor 112 given by equation
11 :
Smo ~ ■ ( VDD— VpreQ—Vth ^ (11)
[00101] The design flexibility introduced by this technique to pre-charge the monitor line 28j with a voltage VpreQ provides an extra degree of freedom for designers that can be used to at least partially offset the effect of variations in Vth. However, unlike the drive current described by equation 8, the drive current according to equation 9 is still a function of both the threshold voltage Vth and mobility μ which undesirably decreases the effectiveness of the compensation.
[00102] Another alternative is to precharge the monitor line 28j by applying a relatively high reference current IREF to the monitor line 28j such that the settling requirement is achieved in spite of the parasitic capacitance 136 of the monitor line 28j. As illustrated by the timing diagram in FIG. 2F, which illustrates the current pre-charging technique, the reference current IREF can be applied during a pre-charging cycle 161a. Then, the reference current IREF is removed from the monitor line 28j and the drive device 112 is allowed to adjust the voltage on the data line 22j during an adjustment cycle 161b. In an implementation, the monitor switch transistor 120 can disconnect the monitor line 28j from the pixel circuit 110 during the adjustment cycle 151b. In this case, it can be shown that the drive current is given by equation 12:
Figure imgf000019_0001
[00103] where τ is defined similar to equation 10, but with the tranconductance gm of the drive transistor 112 given by equation 13:
[00104] Accordingly, it is evident that utilizing a reference current IREF to precharge the parasitic capacitance 136 of the monitor line 28j makes the pixel drive current independent of the threshold voltage. Therefore, design challenges are reduced to optimizing for compensation of mobility variations only.
[00105] FIG. 4A illustrates a block diagram of a pixel circuit 210, which can be implemented as the pixel 10 in the display system 50 shown in FIG. 1. The pixel circuit 210 includes a drive device 212, which can be a drive transistor, a storage element 216, which can be a storage capacitor, an access switch 218, which can be a switch transistor, and a control switch 222. The drive transistor 212 conveys a driving current to the light emitting device 214 ("OLED") according to a programming voltage stored on the storage capacitor 216. The programming voltage is applied to the gate and/or source terminals of the drive transistor 212 to control the driving current. The programming voltage is developed on the storage capacitor 216 by selectively coupling a first terminal of the storage capacitor 216 to a second terminal of the drive transistor 212 via the switch transistor 218. The second terminal of the storage capacitor 216 is coupled to a data line 22j. A gate terminal of the drive transistor 212 is coupled to the first terminal of the storage capacitor 216 at a gate node 212g, and the first terminal of the drive transistor 212 is connected to the voltage supply line 26i. The switch transistor 218 is operated according to the select line 24i and/or the emission line 25, which can be a global select line that is shared by pixels in more than one row of the display array 20. The emission transistor 222 is controlled by the emission line 25 to be turned on during an emission cycle 266 of the pixel circuit 210, and to disconnect the light emitting device 214 from the drive transistor 212 during periods other than the emission cycle 266.
[00106] FIG 4B illustrates an exemplary circuit diagram for the pixel circuit 210, which is labeled with an arrow 250 to show the current path through the pixel during a pre-charging cycle 260 of the pixel circuit. FIG. 4C illustrates the pixel circuit 210 shown in FIG. 4B, but labeled with arrows 252, 252L, and 252P to show the current path through the pixel during a compensation cycle 262 following the pre-charging cycle 260. FIG. 4D illustrates the pixel circuit 210 shown in FIG. 4A, but labeled with an arrow 256 to show the current path through the pixel during an emission cycle 266. Transistors illustrated in the circuit diagrams in FIGS. 4B to 4D which are turned off during the respectively illustrated operation cycles are illustrated with hashed marks to indicate they are turned off. FIG. 4E illustrates a timing diagram illustrating the operation of the pixel 210 during the pre-charging, compensation, and emission cycles 260, 262, 266. FIG. 4F provides an enhanced view of the voltage level on the data line 22j during the compensation cycle 262. Accordingly, the features illustrated by FIGS. 4A-4F will be described jointly below.
[00107] In the pixel circuit 210 shown in FIG. 4A, a reference current IREF is applied through the data line 22j which introduces several advantages relative to the pixel circuit 110 shown in FIG. 2A. In particular, in comparing the pixel circuit 210 of FIG. 4A, with the pixel circuit 110 of FIG. 2A, it is evident that the dedicated monitor line 28j and monitor switch 120 are eliminated in the pixel circuit 210. Hence, a considerable amount of area is freed up on the display panel 20 which enables very high density pixel layout. Also, in the pixel circuit 210, a control switch 222 is placed in series with the OLED 214 to eliminate the need for toggling the voltage of the supply voltage line 26i during the programming phase. In the pixel circuit 110 shown in FIG. 2A, which lacks the additional control switch, the voltage of the supply voltage line 26i (or the supply voltage line 27i) is toggled to a low voltage (or high voltage) during the programming cycle 150 to prevent the OLED 114 from emitting light during programming.
[00108] In the exemplary pixel circuit 210 illustrated in FIGS. 4B to 4D, the gate terminal of the drive transistor 212 is directly coupled to a first terminal of the storage capacitor 216 at a gate node 212g. The second terminal of the storage capacitor 216 is coupled to the data line 22j. The switch transistor 218 is connected between the gate node 212g and a second terminal (e.g., a drain terminal) of the drive transistor 212 while the first terminal (e.g., a source terminal) of the drive transistor 212 is coupled to the voltage supply line 26i. [00109] The three-cycle operation of the compensation technique is illustrated in FIGS. 4B through 4D, which are labeled with arrows to show current paths in each cycle, and transistors are shown hashed to indicate they are turned off. In this example, an emission transistor 222 situated in series with the OLED 214 turns the OLED 214 off during the pre- charging and compensation cycles 260, 262. In an example frame, operation begins with a precharge cycle 260. The emission line 25 is set high to keep the emission transistor 222 turned off. The emission line 25 is also coupled to a switch transistor 132 to keep the data line 22j disconnected from a reference voltage source during the pre-charging and programming cycles 260, 262. A desired row, such as the "ith" row is selected by setting the select line 24i low, which turns on the switch transistor 218, and the data line 22j is precharged to the given program voltage, Vp. The arrow 250 illustrates the current flow during the pre-charging cycle 260 to charge the capacitance 23j of the data line 22j. Simultaneously, because the select transistor 218 is turned on, current flows through the drive transistor 212 until the gate-source voltage of the drive transistor 212 settles at a level sufficient to turn off the drive transistor 212. At the end of the pre-charging cycle 260, the voltage that is developed on the gate terminal of the drive transistor 212 (i.e., at the gate node 212g) is given by equation 14:
VGo « VDD - 1 Vth I (14)
[00110] During the compensation cycle 262, a reference current IREF is applied to the data line 22j. The pixel circuit 210 advantageously allows the reference current IREF to not flow directly through the drive transistor 212 of the pixel circuit 210. Instead, as will be described in reference to FIG. 4C, only a small portion (Ipixel) of the reference current IREF passes through the storage capacitor 216 and the drive transistor 212. A larger portion (Iiine) of the reference current IREF is utilized to charge/discharge the capacitance 23j of the data line 22j. Accordingly, a pixel circuit is realized providing both good compensation and fast settling concurrently ("simultaneously"). The reference current IREF is thus divided between the data line 22j and the driving transistor 212 by the configuration of the respective capacitances of the storage capacitor 216 and the capacitance 23j associated with the data line 22j.
[00111] FIG. 4C is labeled with arrows 252, 252L, 252P to illustrate a current path during the compensation cycle 262 of the pixel circuit 210. In the compensation cycle 262, the data switch transistor 130 is turned off by the program signal ("Prog") conveyed on the program line 138 and the reference current IREF is applied to the data line 22j by the current source 234. IREF is divided into two components: Iiine which discharges the capacitance 23j of the data line 22j, and IpiXei which flows through the drive transistor 212 and across the storage capacitor 216. The current path of Ipixel is illustrated by the arrow 252P and the current path of Iiine is illustrated by the arrow 252L. The currents Iiine and Ipixel join at the data line 22j to cumulatively form the reference current IREF, which is illustrated by the arrow 252. The capacitance 23j of the data line 22j and the storage capacitor 216 thus act as a current divider for the reference current IREF- These components are constant portions of the reference current IREF as given by equations 15 and 16:
Figure imgf000022_0001
[00112] Accordingly, Iiine discharges the data line 22j at a constant rate during the compensation cycle 262. This creates a declining voltage on the data line 22j as shown in FIGS. 4E and 4F. FIG. 4F is an enhanced view of the voltage on the data line 22j during the compensation cycle 262 to better illustrate the declining voltage ramp. The total change in voltage on the data line 22j during the compensation cycle 22j is given by equation 17:
VR = IREF - TPROG (17) cL + cs
[00113] where tprog is the length of the compensation cycle 262. The Ipixel component of the reference current IREF develops a voltage across the gate-source terminals of the drive transistor 212 which is a function of its threshold voltage, mobility, oxide-thickness, and other second-order parameters (e.g. drain and source resistance). The resulting gate-source voltage on the drive transistor 212 is given by equation 18:
Figure imgf000022_0002
[00114] Therefore, the gate voltage of the drive transistor 212 (i.e., the voltage at the gate node 212g) is given by equation 19:
VG = VDD - 1 VT I - L L≠XEL (19)
[00115] At the end of the compensation cycle 262, the voltage stored on the storage capacitor 216 is equal to VP -VR -VG which is a function of both the pixel program voltage (VP) and the characteristics of the drive transistor 212 (e.g., due to the contribution of VG). The pre-charging cycle 260 and the compensation cycle 262 are repeated for every row of the panel 20 during the period 264.
[00116] FIG. 4D is labeled with an arrow 256 to illustrate a current path during an emission cycle 266 of the pixel circuit 210. For example, once the entire panel 20 is programmed, the emission cycle 266 begins by turning the switch transistor 132 on to set the data line 22j at the reference voltage VREF- Setting the data line 22j at the reference voltage VREF references the second terminal of the storage capacitor 216 to the reference voltage VREF- The reference voltage VREF can be chosen to be equal to VDD. The emission transistor 222 is also turned on during the emission cycle 266. As illustrated by FIG. 4D, both the switch transistor 132 and the emission transistor 222 can be controlled by an emission control line 25 conveying a global emission control signal. As a consequence, the gate-to-source over-drive voltage of the drive transistor 212 is Vov, as given by equation 20:
Figure imgf000023_0001
[00117] The over-drive voltage Vov is thus independent of the threshold voltage of the drive transistor 212. The effective drive current of the pixel circuit 210 can hence be designed to be minimally affected by the variations of mobility, oxide thickness, and other varying TFT device parameters.
[00118] The two-phase pre-charging and compensation operation utilizing a pixel's data line can be implemented in a variety of particular pixel architectures, which are described next in FIGS. 5-7. FIG. 5 illustrates an exemplary circuit diagram for a portion of a display 20 showing two pixel circuits 210a, 211a in an example configuration that can implement the two-cycle compensation technique described in connection with FIG. 4E. The pixel architecture of FIG. 5 also offers a display designer the option of segmenting the display panel 20 into multiple segments that can be separately programmed or driven according to global select lines (e.g., the global select line 246) ("GSEL[k]"). In the circuit diagram shown in FIG. 5, the pixel circuit 210a is in the "ith" row and "jth" column of the display panel 20. Also illustrated is the pixel circuit 211a, which is in the next (i.e., "(i+l)th") row and the "jth" column. Both of the pixel circuits 210a and 211a are also in the "kth" segment of the display panel 20. Accordingly, the segmented data line 248 which is shared by the pixel circuits 210a, 211a is coupled to the data line 22j via the segment transistor 244. While the segment transistor 244 is turned on, the segment data line 248 receives voltages and currents applied to the data line 22j. However, while the segment transistor 244 is turned off (e.g., by setting the segment control line 246 high) the segment data line 248 is not connected to the data line 22j.
[00119] This segmented feature illustrated by the configuration in FIG. 5 can allow the data line 22j to be utilized to program other segments of the display array 20 (which are selectively coupled to the data line 22j by their own respective segment transistors) while the "kth" segment is driven to emit light during an emission cycle for the "kth" segment. Thus, separate segments can be controlled to implement different operations simultaneously (i.e., in parallel) and thereby either increase the time available for pre-charging, programming, and/or compensating each row of the display array 20. Additionally or alternatively, the segmented driving scheme can allow the effective refresh rate of the display system 50 to be increased. That is, rather than programming the entire display panel 20, row by row, during a first programming period, and then driving the entire display panel 20 during a second emission period while the source driver 4 is effectively idle, the segmented arrangement allows parallel operations. In one example implementation, half of the display panel 20 can be programmed during a first period while the other half is operated in an emission cycle, and then the second half of the display panel 20 can be programmed during a second period while the first half is operated in an emission cycle. In another example, the display array can be divided into segments consisting of two rows of pixels each such that each segmented data line (e.g., 248) can be used for two rows. In such an arrangement the "ith" row of the display can be the "(2k)th" row and "(i+l)th" row of the display can be the "(2k+l)th" row, with k an integer between 0 and N/2 where N is the number of rows in the display panel 20. Thus, the display can be divided into a plurality of segments each including two or more rows of the display panel 20, and each of the segments having a respective segment transistor to selectively connect to the data line 22j. Such a segmented display panel 20 can then operated such that each segment is connected to the data line 22j, while the data line 22j conveys programming and/or compensation signals to the pixels in the segment, and then the respective segment can be disconnected while the data line 22j is fixed at a reference voltage VREF-
[00120] FIG. 6 illustrates another circuit diagram for a portion of a display showing a first and second pixel circuit 210b and 211b configured suitably to implement the two-cycle pre- charging and compensation cycles 260, 262 described in connection with FIG. 4E. The pixel circuits 210b, 211b are arranged similarly to the pixel circuit 210 described in FIGS. 4B to 4D. However, as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. 6, the reference current source 234 can be arranged at one side (e.g., the top side) of the display panel 20 while the source driver 4 can be arranged at the other side (e.g., the bottom side) of the display panel. Each of the source driver 4 and the reference current source 234 are selectively connected to the data line 22j via respective calibration switch transistor 240 (operated by the calibration control line 242) and the programming switch transistor 130 (operated by the programming control line 138).
[00121] FIG. 7 illustrates a circuit diagram for a portion of a display showing still two more pixel circuits 210c, 211c in an example configuration also suited to provide enhanced settling time via the two-cycle pre-charging and compensation scheme described in connection with FIG. 4E. For the circuit arrangement shown in FIG. 7, there is no emission control transistor, and thus the voltage of the voltage supply line 26i is toggled to prevent emission during the pre-charging and compensation cycles 260, 262. Toggling the voltage supply line 26i is not implemented for the pixel circuits shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, which incorporate emission control transistors 222. However, all three circuit configurations 210a-c are fully compatible with available source-driver and gate-driver microchips. Implementing the two-cycle programming technique may require modifications to timing controllers, such as the controller 2, the address driver 8, and/or the source driver 4 described in connection with the display system 50 of FIG. 1 in order to provide the functions described in connection with FIGS. 4A through 7.
[00122] FIG. 8A illustrates an additional configuration of a pixel circuit 310 providing power supply voltage VDD via the data line 322j. The pixel circuit 310 can be implemented in the display system 50 described above in connection with FIG. 1. However, as shown, the pixel circuit 310 does not utilize a separate monitoring line. Furthermore, the pixel circuit 310 does not utilize a separate voltage supply line 26i. The pixel circuit 310 is configured to allow compensation for pixel aging to occur simultaneously with programming, and thereby increase the time available for programming and/or compensation in the pixel circuit 310, as well as decrease the requirements for switching speed of the transistors. The pixel circuit 310 includes a drive transistor 312 coupled in series with a light emitting device 314, which can be an organic light emitting diode ("OLED") or another current-driven light emissive device. The pixel circuit 310 also includes a storage capacitor 316 having a first terminal coupled to a gate terminal of the drive transistor 312. The first terminal of the storage capacitor 316 and the gate terminal of the drive transistor 312 are thus electrically connected to a common node 312g, which is referred to for convenience as a gate node 312g. A switch transistor 318 operated by the select line 24i selectively couples the gate node 312g (and thus the first terminal of the storage capacitor 316 and the gate terminal of the drive transistor 312) to a second terminal of the drive transistor 312, which can be a drain terminal.
[00123] The second terminal of the storage capacitor 316 is connected to a bias line 329, which provides a bias current Ibias to provide compensation to the pixel circuit 310. The pixel circuits 210, 210a-c described above implement compensation and programming in a two-phase operation to first pre-charge the data line (in the pre-charging cycle 260) and then apply the bias current (e.g., the reference current IREF) to provide compensation while simultaneously discharging the data line (during the compensation cycle 262). However, the pixel circuit 310 provides data programming via the data line 322j while simultaneously applying the bias current via the bias line 329 during a programming cycle 360. The data line 322j is also utilized to provide a power supply voltage VDD during the emission cycle 364 of the pixel circuit 210.
[00124] The pixel circuit 310 also includes an emission control transistor 322 operated according to an emission control line 25. The emission control transistor 322 is arranged between the drain terminal of the drive transistor 312 and the light emitting device 314 so as to selectively connect the light emitting device 314 to the drive transistor 312. For example, the emission control transistor 322 can be turned on during an emission cycle 364 of the pixel circuit 310 to allow the pixel circuit 310 to drive the light emitting device 314 to emit light according to programming information. By contrast, the emission control transistor 322 can be turned off during cycles of the pixel circuit 310 other than an emission cycle 366, such as, for example, the programming cycle 360. The emission control transistor 322 is selectively turned on and off according to the emission control signal conveyed via the emission control line 25. It is specifically noted that the pixel circuit 310 can be implemented without the emission control transistor 322 by selectively adjusting the voltage of the supply line 27i to increase VSS during the programming cycle 360 so as to turn off the light emitting device 314.
[00125] FIG. 8B is a timing diagram illustrating an exemplary operation of the pixel circuit 310 shown in FIG. 8 A. As shown in FIG. 8B, operation of the pixel circuit 310 includes two phases for each pixel: a programming and compensation cycle 360 and an emission cycle 364. In the timing diagram shown in FIG. 8B, the programming and compensation phase 360 is a time period during which a single row of a pixel array is programmed and compensated. The programming and compensation of other rows of the display panel 20 can be carried out during the time period 362. During the programming and compensation cycle 362 the select line 24i is set low to turn on the switch transistor 318 and the data line 322j is set to a programming voltage VP appropriate for the "ith" row. During the programming and compensation cycle 360, the emission control line 25 is maintained at a high level to keep the emission control transistor 322 turned off. It is specifically noted that the emission control line 25 can convey an emission control signal that is shared by multiple pixels in a pixel array. For example, the emission control signal may be simultaneously conveyed to emission control lines in pixels in more than one row of the display panel 20 or to all pixels in a pixel array of a display.
[00126] During the programming and compensation cycle 360, the application of the programming voltage VP to the data line 322j causes a voltage to develop at the gate node 312g approximately equal to VP - Vth. That is, during the programming and compensation cycle 360, current flows from the data line 322j through the drive transistor 312 and the switch transistor 318 (which is turned on by the select line 24i) and develop a charge at the gate node 312g. The current continues to flow until the gate-source voltage of the drive transistor 312 is roughly equal to Vth, at which point the drive transistor 312 turns off and the current ceases flowing, leaving the voltage at the gate node 312g approximately equal to VP - Vth. Thus, the pixel circuit 310 is configured to allow a programming voltage VP to be applied to the pixel circuit 310 through the drive transistor 312. This arrangement ensures that the voltage developed on the gate node 312g of the drive transistor 312 and stored in the storage capacitor 316 automatically compensates for the threshold voltage Vth of the drive transistor 312.
[00127] The above described automatic compensation feature is advantageous because the threshold voltage Vth of the drive transistor 312 can vary across the panel 20 and over time due to variations in the usage of each pixel (i.e., the gate-source and drain-source voltage applied to each individual drive transistor over their lifetimes), temperature variations applied to each pixel, manufacturing variations in the developing of each pixel in a pixel array, etc.
[00128] In addition, the pixel circuit 310 further accounts for degradation in the pixel 310 by applying the biasing current Ibias via the bias line 329 to the second terminal of the storage capacitor 316 while the programming voltage VP is applied through the drive transistor 312 to the first terminal of the storage capacitor 316. Thus, the bias current Ibias drains a small current through the drive transistor 312 (via the switch transistor 318 and the storage capacitor 316) to allow the gate-source voltage of the drive transistor 312 to be further adjusted. This further adjustment due to the bias current Ibias can account for variations (e.g., shifts, non-uniformities, etc.) in the voltage-current behavior of the drive transistor 312 (e.g., due to mobility, gate oxide, etc.).
[00129] Following the programming and compensation cycle 360, the select line 24i is set high to turn off the switch transistor 318 and the storage capacitor 316 is thus allowed to float between the bias line 329 and the gate node 312g. Following the additional programming and compensation cycles 362 for additional rows of the display, the emission cycle 364 is commenced by setting the bias line 329 to a high supply voltage VDD, setting the data line 322j to the high supply voltage VDD, and setting the emission control line 25 low to turn on the emission control transistor 322. The bias line 329 thereby references the second terminal of the storage capacitor 316 to the high supply voltage VDD while the first terminal of the storage capacitor 316 sets the gate voltage of the drive transistor 312. By combining the programming and compensation operations in the single programming and compensation phase 360, the pixel circuit 310 advantageously allows the length of the time period reserved for programming to be increased relative to pixel circuits utilizing separate, sequentially implemented programming and compensation operations.
[00130] FIG. 9A illustrates an additional configuration of a pixel circuit 410 configured to program the pixel circuit 410 via a programming capacitor 416 ("Cprg") connected to a gate terminal of a drive transistor 412 via a first selection transistor 417. The pixel circuit 410 also includes a storage capacitor 415 ("Cs") connected directly to the gate terminal of the drive transistor 412. The pixel circuit 410 can be implemented in the display system 50 described above in connection with FIG. 1, and can be one of a plurality of similar pixel circuits arranged in rows and columns to form a display panel, such as the display panel 20 described in connection with FIG. 1. However, as shown, the pixel circuit 410 does not utilize a separate monitoring line for providing feedback. Furthermore, the pixel circuit 410 includes both a first select line 23i ("SEL1") and a second select line 24i ("SEL2"). The pixel circuit 410 also includes a connection to an emission control line 25i ("EM") and two voltage supply lines 26i, 27i for supplying a current source and/or sink for a driving current conveyed through the pixel circuit 410 according to programming information.
[00131] The pixel circuit 410 includes a first switch transistor 417 operated according to the first select line 23 i and a second switch transistor 418 operated according to the second select line 24i. The pixel circuit 410 also includes the drive transistor 412, an emission control transistor 422 operated according to the emission control line 25i, and a light emitting device 414, such as an organic light emitting diode. The drive transistor 412, emission control transistor 422, and the light emitting device 414 are connected in series such that while the emission control transistor 422 is turned on, a current conveyed through the drive transistor 412 is also conveyed through the light emitting device 414. The pixel circuit 410 also includes a storage capacitor 415 having a first terminal connected to a gate terminal of the drive transistor 412 at a gate node 412g. A second terminal of the storage capacitor 415 is connected to the voltage supply line 26i. The second switch transistor 418 is connected between the gate node 412g and a connection point between the drive transistor 412 and the emission control transistor 422. The programming capacitor 416 is connected in series between the data line 22j and the first switch transistor 417. Thus, the first switch transistor 417 is connected between a first terminal of the programming capacitor 416 and a gate terminal of the drive transistor 412, while a second terminal of the programming capacitor 416 is connected to the data line 22j.
[00132] Certain transistors in the pixel circuit 410 provide functions similar in some respects to corresponding transistors in the pixel circuit 210. For example, in a manner similar to the drive transistor 212, the drive transistor 412 directs a current from the voltage supply line 26i from a first terminal (e.g., a source terminal) to a second terminal (e.g., a drain terminal) based on the voltage applied to the gate node 412g. The current directed through the drive transistor 412 is conveyed through the light emitting device 414, which emits light according to the current flowing through it similar to the light emitting device 214. In a manner similar to the operation of the emission control transistor 222, the emission control transistor 422 selectively allows current flowing through the drive transistor to be directed to the light emitting device 414, and thereby increases a contrast ratio of the display by reducing accidental emissions of the light emitting device. The second switch transistor 418 is operated by the second select line 24i similarly to the switch transistor 218 so as to selectively connect the second terminal of the drive transistor 412 to the gate node 412g. Thus, while the second switch transistor 418 is turned on, the second switch transistor provides a current path is between the voltage supply line 26i to the gate node 412g, through the drive transistor 412. While the second switch transistor 418 is turned on, the voltage on the gate node 412g can thus adjust to a voltage suitable to convey a current through the drive transistor.
[00133] FIG. 9B is an alternative pixel circuit 410' configured similarly to the pixel circuit 410 shown in FIG. 9A, but with an additional switch transistor 419 connected in series with the second switch transistor 418. Both the additional switch transistor 419 and the second switch transistor 418 are operated according to the second select line 24i, such that setting the second select line 24i at a voltage sufficient to turn on the transistors 418, 419 connects a second terminal (e.g., a drain terminal) of the drive transistor 412 to the gate node 412g. Thus, in the pixel circuit 410', activating the second select line 24i provides a current path from the supply voltage line 26i to the gate node 412g, through the drive transistor 412, similar to the pixel circuit 410 described in connection with FIG. 9A. By including the additional switch transistor 419, however, the pixel circuit 410' offers superior resistance to leakage between the gate node 412g and the second terminal of the drive transistor 412 while the second select line 24i is set to turn off the transistors 418, 419. The description herein of the operation and function of the pixel circuit 410 accordingly applies to the pixel circuit 410' shown in FIG. 9B.
[00134] In comparison to the pixel circuit 210 illustrated and described in connection with FIGS. 4A through 4F, the pixel circuit 410 shown in FIG. 9A includes the first switch transistor 417 for selectively connecting the programming capacitor 416 to the gate node 412g. Furthermore, the pixel circuit 410 includes the storage capacitor 415 connected between the gate node 412g and the voltage supply line 26i. The first switch transistor 417 allows the gate node 412g to be isolated (e.g,. not capacitively coupled) to the data line 22j during an emission operation of the pixel circuit 410. For example, the pixel circuit 410 can be operated such that the first selection transistor 417 is turned off so as to disconnect the gate node 412g from the data line 22j whenever the pixel circuit 410 is not undergoing a compensation operation or a programming operation. Additionally, during an emission operation of the pixel circuit 410, the storage capacitor 415 holds a voltage based on programming information and applies the held voltage to the gate node 412g so as to cause the drive transistor 412 to drive a current through the light emitting device 414 according to the programming information.
[00135] By contrast, again referring to the pixel circuit 210 described in connection with FIGS. 4A through 4F above, the capacitor 216 is allowed to float during the programming of other rows of the display while the selection transistor 218 is turned off. Thus, in order to properly reference the capacitor 216, during the emission period 266, the data line 22j is set to an appropriate reference voltage (e.g. VREF) to reference the second terminal of the capacitor 216 connected to the data line 22j such that the voltage applied to the gate terminal of the drive transistor 212 is based on the previously applied programming voltage. As a result, the entire row of the display is generally programmed with programming voltages row by row, prior to the display being driven. During driving, the data line 22j is assigned to the reference voltage VREF during the emission period and thus programming and/or compensation cannot be carried out on some rows while other rows are driven to emit light. As discussed in connection with FIG. 5, one way to address the issue and provide the ability to conduct simultaneous operations in parallel on distinct segments of the display panel 20 is by segmenting the data line 22j into groups of pixels, such as sets of rows of the display panel. By allowing each segment to be independently connected to the data line 22j, and alternately connected to the reference voltage VREF, parallel operations can be performed on separate segments of the display panel 20.
[00136] Another configuration allowing for simultaneous operations is provided by the pixel circuit 410 described in FIG. 9A (or the pixel circuit 410' of FIG. 9B), the operation of which is described next. The simultaneous parallel operation of different functions (i.e., compensation, programming, and driving) on different rows of the display panel 20 allow for increased duty cycles, higher display refresh rates, longer programming and/or compensation operations, and combinations thereof.
[00137] FIG. 9C is a timing diagram describing an exemplary operation of the pixel circuit 410 of FIG. 9A or the pixel circuit 410' of FIG. 9B. As shown in FIG. 9C, operation of the pixel circuit 410 includes a compensation cycle 440, a program cycle 450, and an emission cycle 460 (alternately referred to herein as a driving cycle). The entire duration that the data line 22j is manipulated to provide compensation and programming to the pixel circuit 410 is a time row period 436 having a duration tROw. The duration of tROw can be determined based on the number of rows in the display panel 20 and the refresh rate of the display system 50. The row period 436 is initiated by a first delay period 432, having duration tdl . The first delay period 432 provides a transition time to allow the data line 22j to be reset from its previous programming voltage (for another row) and set to a reference voltage Vref suitable for commencing the compensation cycle 440. The duration tdl of the first delay period 432 is determined based on the response times of the transistors in the display system 50 and the number of rows in the display panel 20. The compensation cycle 440 is carried out during a time interval with duration tcoMP- The program cycle 450 is carried out during a time interval with duration tpRG. At the initiation of the row period 436 the emission control line 25i ("EM") is set high to turn off the emission control transistor 422. Turning off the emission control transistor 422 during the row period 436 reduces accidental emission form the light emitting device 414 during the row period 436 while the pixel circuit 410 undergoes compensation and programming operations and thereby enhances contrast ratio. [00138] Following the first delay period 432, the compensation cycle 440 is initiated. The compensation cycle 440 includes a reference voltage period 442 and a ramp voltage period 444, which have durations of tREF and tRAMP, respectively. The first and second select lines 423i, 424i are each set low at the start of the compensation cycle 440 so as turn on the first and second selection transistors 417, 418. The data line 22j ("DATA[j]") is set with at a reference voltage Vref, during the reference voltage period 442. The reference voltage period 442 accordingly sets the voltage of the second terminal of the programming capacitor 416 to Vref.
[00139] The reference voltage period 442 is followed by the ramp voltage period 444 where the voltage data line 22j is decreased from the reference voltage Vref to a voltage Vref - VA. During the ramp voltage period 444, the voltage on the data line 22j is decreased by an amount given by the voltage VA- In some embodiments, the ramp voltage can be a voltage that decreases at a substantially constant rate (e.g., has a substantially constant time derivative) so as to generate a substantially constant current through the programming capacitor 416. The programming capacitor 416 thus provides a current Iprg through the drive transistor 412, via the second switch transistor 418 and the first switch transistor 417 during the voltage ramp period 444. The amount of the current Iprg thus applied to the pixel circuit 410 via the programming capacitor 416 can be determined based on the amount of VA, the duration tRAMP, and the capacitance of the programming capacitor 416, which can be referred to as Cprg. Upon determining the current Iprg, the voltage that settles on the gate node 412g can be determined according to equation 19, where Iprg is substituted for Ipixel. Thus the voltage of the gate node 412g at the conclusion of the compensation cycle 440 is a voltage that accounts for variations and/or degradations in transistor device parameters, such as degradations influencing the threshold voltage, mobility, oxide thickness, etc. of the drive transistor 412. At the conclusion of the ramp voltage period 444, the second select line 24i is set high so as to turn off the second switch transistor 418, such that the gate node 412g is no longer allowed to adjust according to a current conveyed through the drive transistor 412.
[00140] Following the compensation cycle 440, the programming cycle 450 is initiated. During the programming cycle 450, the first select line 23i remains low so as to keep the first switch transistor 417 turned on. In some embodiments, the compensation cycle 440 and the programming cycle 450 can be briefly separated temporally by a delay time to allow the data line to transition from conveying the ramp voltage to conveying a programming voltage. To isolate the pixel circuit 410 from any noise on the data line generated during the transition, the first select line 23i can optionally go high briefly, during the delay time, so as to turn off the first switch transistor 417 during the transition. The second switch transistor 418 remains turned off during the programming cycle 450. During the programming cycle 450, the data line 22j is set to a programming voltage Vp and applied to the second terminal of the programming capacitor 416. The programming voltage Vp is determined according to programming data indicative of an amount of light to be emitted from the light emitting device 414, and translated to a voltage based on a look-up table and/or formula that accounts for gamma effects, color corrections, device characteristics, circuit layout, etc.
[00141] While the programming voltage Vp is applied to the second terminal of the programming capacitor 416, the voltage of the gate node 412g is adjusted due to the capacitive coupling of the gate node 412g with the data line 22j, through the first switch transistor 417 and the programming capacitor 416. For example, the amount of change in the voltage on the gate node 412g, during the programming cycle 450, relative to the gate node voltage at the conclusion of the compensation cycle 440, can be given by the relation (Vp - VREF+ VA) [ Cs / (Cs + Cprg) ]. An appropriate value for Vp can be selected according to a function including the capacitances of the programming capacitor 416 and the storage capacitor 415 (i.e., the values Cprg and Cs) and the programming information. Because the programming information is conveyed through the capacitive coupling with the data line 22j, via the programming capacitor 416, DC voltages on the gate node 412g prior to initiation of the programming cycle 440 are not cleared from the gate node 412g. Rather, the voltage on the gate node 412g is adjusted during the programming cycle 440 so as to add (or subtract) from the voltage already on the gate node 412g. In particular, the voltage that settles on the gate node 412g during the compensation cycle 440, which can be referred to as Vcomp, is not cleared by the programming operation, because Vcomp acts as a DC voltage on the gate node 412g while the gate node is adjusted via the capacitive coupling with the data line 22j. The final voltage on the gate node 412g, at the conclusion of the programming cycle 440 is thus an additive combination of Vcomp and a voltage based on Vp. For example, the final voltage can be given by Vcomp + (Vp - VREF+ VA) [ Cs / (Cs + Cprg) ]. The programming cycle concludes with the first select line 23i being set high so as to turn off the first selection transistor 417 and thereby disconnect the pixel circuit 410 from the data line 22j.
[00142] The emission cycle 460 is initiated by setting the emission control line 425i to a low voltage suitable to turn on the emission control transistor 422. The initiation of the driving cycle 460 can be separated from the termination of the programming cycle 450 by a second delay period 434 to allow some temporal separation between turning off the first selection transistor 417 and turning on the emission control transistor 422. The second delay period 434 has a duration td2 determined based on the response times of the transistors 417 and 422.
[00143] Because the pixel circuit 410 is decoupled from the data line 22j during the driving cycle 460, the emission cycle 460 can be carried out independent of the voltage levels on the data line 22j. In particular, the pixel circuit 410 can be operated in the emission mode while the data line 22j is operated to convey a voltage ramp (for compensation) and/or programming voltages (for programming) to other rows in the display panel 20 of the display system 50. In some embodiments, the time available for programming and compensation, (e.g., the values tcomp and tprog) are maximized by implementing the compensation and programming operations to each row in the display panel 20 one after another such that the data line 22j is substantially continuously driven to alternate between voltage ramps and programming voltages, which are applied to each sequentially. By allowing the emission cycle 460 to be carried out independently of the compensation and programming cycles 440, 450, the data line 22j is prevented from requiring wasteful idle time in which no programming or compensation is carried out.
[00144] FIG. 10A illustrates a circuit diagram of a portion of a display panel in which multiple pixel circuits 410a, 410b, 41 Ox are arranged to share a common programming capacitor 416k. The pixel circuits 410a, 410b, 41 Ox represent a portion of a display panel suitable for incorporation in a display system, such as the display system 50 discussed in connection with FIG. 1. The pixel circuits 410a-x are a group of pixel circuits in a common column of a display panel (e.g., the "jth" column) and can be in adjacent rows of the display panel (e.g., the "ith," "(i+l)th," through to the "(i+x)th" rows). The pixel circuits 410a-x are configured similarly to the pixel circuit 410 described above in connection with FIGS. 9A-9C, except that the group of pixels circuits 410a-x all share the common programming capacitor 410k. The group of pixel circuits 410a-x are each connected to a segment data line 470 that is connected to a first terminal of the common programming capacitor 416k while a second terminal of the common programming capacitor is connected to the data line 22j.
[00145] The group of pixel circuits 410a-x that share the common programming capacitor 416k are included in a segment of the display panel 20 which is a sub-group of the pixel circuits in the display panel 20. The segment including the pixel circuits 410a-x can also extend to each of the pixel circuits in a common row with the pixel circuits 410a-x, i.e., the pixel circuits in the display panel 20 having a common first select line with the pixel circuits 410a-x (SEL1 [ i ] to SEL11 [ i + x ]). Among the plurality of pixel circuits in the segment, pixels circuits in a common column of the display panel 20 i.e., the pixel circuits connected to the same data line (DATA[ j ]), share the common programming capacitor 416k and are controlled according to segmented emission and second select lines 24k, 25k. For convenience the group of pixel circuits 410a-x (and the pixel circuits in the same rows as the pixel circuits 410a-x) is referred to herein as the "kth" segment.
[00146] In addition to sharing the common programming capacitor 416k, the "kth" segment also operates according to a segmented emission control line 425k ("EM[k]") which operates the respective emission control transistors (e.g., the emission control transistor 422) in all of the pixel circuits 410a-x in the "kth" segment in a coordinated fashion. In some examples, the entire display panel 20 is divided into a plurality of segments similar to the "kth" segment. Each segment includes a plurality of pixel circuits that are controlled, at least in part, by commonly operated segmented control line. In some examples, each segment can include an equal number of rows of the display panel. As will be explained further in regard to FIGS. 10B and IOC, such a segmented display architecture allows for efficient programming and driving sequences where pixel circuits in each segment (which each include multiple rows of a display panel) can be operated to provide a compensation operation simultaneously, rather than performing the compensation operation on each row consecutively.
[00147] For clarity in explanation, the "kth" segment referred to herein will be described by way of example as a segment including 5 adjacent rows of pixel circuits. In this way an entire display panel can be divided into segments ("sub-groups") of 5 rows each. For example, a display panel with 720 rows can be divided into 144 segments, each having 5 adjacent rows of the display panel. However, it is noted that the discussions herein of segmented display architectures is generally not so limited, and the discussions herein referring to segments having 5 rows can generally be extended to segments having more than, or less than, 5 rows, such as 4 rows, 6 rows, 8 rows, 10 rows, 16 rows, 1, etc., or any number of rows that evenly divides the total number of rows in the display panel, and also to segments including non-adjacent rows of a display panel, such as interleaved rows (odd/even rows), etc.
[00148] Thus, in an example where the "kth" segment includes 5 adjacent rows of a display panel, pixel circuits 410a-410x in the "jth" column of the "kth" segment can be pixel circuits in the "ith," "(i+l)th," "(i+2)th," "(i+3)th," and "(i+4)th" rows of the display panel. Each of the pixel circuits includes connections to respective supply voltage lines, first and second select lines, and emission control lines, which are driven to operate the pixel circuits 410a-410x. For example, the pixel circuit 410a in the "ith" row and "jth" column is connected to the supply voltage lines 26i, 27i and the first select line 23i for the "ith" row. Similarly, the pixel circuit 410b in the "(i+l)th" row and the "jth" column is connected to supply voltage lines 471, 472 and a first select line 474 ("SEL[i+l]") for the "(i+l)th" row, and the pixel circuit 410x in the "(i+4)th" row and "jth" column is connected to supply voltage lines 475, 476 and a first select line 478 ("SEL[i+x]") for the "(i+4)th" row. Each of the pixel circuits in the "kth" segment is also connected to a segmented second select line 24k and a segmented emission control line 25k. The emission control line and second select line are shared by all pixels in the "kth" segment to allow the emission control transistors and second switch transistors in each of the pixels in the "kth" segment to be operated in coordination.
[00149] FIG. 10B is a timing diagram of an exemplary operation of the "kth" segment shown in FIG. 10A. As shown in FIG. 10B, operation of the "kth" segment includes a compensation cycle 510, a programming period 520 and a driving cycle 530. During both the compensation cycle 510 and the programming period 520, the segmented emission control line 25k ("EM[ k ]") is set high to keep the emission control transistors turned off and thereby reduce incidental emission during compensation or programming. During the compensation cycle 510, the segmented second select line 24k is set low to turn on the second switch transistors in each of the pixel circuits 410a-x in the "kth" segment. The first select lines (e.g., 23i, 474, 478, etc.) for each of the pixel circuits 410a-x are also set low during the compensation cycle 510 and a ramp voltage is applied on the data line 22j. Thus, during the compensation cycle 510, a current is conveyed through the pixels circuits in the "kth" segment (due to the ramp voltage applied to the common programming capacitor 416k) and the respective gate nodes in each pixel circuit 410a-x are allowed to adjust according to the current (via the respective turned on second switch transistors). Thus, voltages are established on each of the respective gate nodes of the pixel circuits 410a-x during the compensation cycle that account for variations and/or degradations in the respective drive transistors, such as degradations due to threshold voltage variations, mobility variations, etc. The voltages established on the gate nodes are thus similar to the gate node voltage established during the compensation cycle 440 in connection with FIGS. 9A-9C. [00150] At the conclusion of the compensation cycle 510, the segmented second select line 24k is set high, to turn off the respective second switch transistors in the pixel circuits 410a- x. In order to provide some separation between the compensation cycle 510 and the programming period 520, the compensation cycle 510 can a transition delay period 514 following the ramp period 512. During the ramp period 512, the select lines (e.g., the select lines 24k, 23i, 474, 478, etc.) are all low while the ramp voltage is applied to the data line 22j. During the transition delay period 514, the select lines (e.g., the select lines 24k, 23i, 474, 478, etc.) are all high to separate the pixel circuits 410a-x from the data line 22j while the data line switches from conveying the ramp voltage to conveying programming voltages. The duration of the transition delay period 514 can be determined based on the switching speed of the transistors involved in connecting the data line 22j to a ramp voltage generator and/or programming voltage driver (e.g., the driver 4). The transition of the ramp period 512 is desirably long enough to allow sufficient time for the gate nodes to settle at appropriate voltages related to the currents generated by the ramp voltage applied to the common programming capacitor 416k. In an example embodiment, the duration of the compensation period 510 can be 15 microseconds, with the ramp period 512 lasting over 10 microseconds.
[00151] Once the compensation cycle 510 is complete and the gate nodes of each pixel circuit 410a-x have settled at appropriate voltages to account for transistor degradations, the data line 22j is operated to sequentially provide programming voltages to each of the pixel circuits 410a-x in the "kth" segment during the programming period 520. The segmented second selection line 24k remains high for the duration of the programming period 520. As shown in FIG. 10B, the programming period 520 includes a sequence of programming intervals for each pixel circuit (e.g., the first programming interval 521, the second programming interval 523, the last programming interval 527, etc.) alternated with delay intervals (e.g., the delay intervals 522, 524, 526, etc.). During each programming interval, respective ones of the pixel circuits 410a-x which have their corresponding first switch transistors turned on receive programming voltages applied to the data line 22j. The delay intervals between each programming interval allow the pixel circuits to be disconnected from the data line 22j while the programming voltage is being set to the next value appropriate for the next pixel circuit. Cross-talk effects can occur, for example, if the programming voltage on the data line 22j updates to the value for the next pixel circuit (e.g., the pixel circuit in the next row) before the respective first switch transistor is turned off to disconnect the pixel circuit from the data line 22j. Thus, the delay intervals between the programming intervals reduce cross-talk effects during programming.
[00152] The programming period 520 begins with the first programming interval 521 during which the first select line 423i for the pixel circuit 410a ("SELl [i]") is set low and the data line 22j is set to a programming voltage Vp[i, j]. As used herein Vp[i, j] refers to a programming voltage appropriate for the "ith" row and "jth" column of the display panel 20 during a particular frame. Furthermore, Vp[i+1, j] refers to a programming voltage appropriate for the "(i+l)th" row and "jth" column of the display panel 20 during a particular frame, and so on. The application of the programming voltage adjusts the voltage at the gate node 412g of the pixel circuit 410a due to the capacitive coupling between the gate node 412g and the data line 22j via the common programming capacitor 416k. The adjustment to the voltage of the gate node 412g is carried according to the voltage division relationship between the common programming capacitor 412k and the storage capacitor 415, similar to the description of programming the pixel circuit 410 in connection with FIGS. 9A-9C. At the conclusion of the first programming interval 521, SELl [i] is set high to disconnect the pixel circuit 410a from the data line 22j. The data line 22j adjusts to the next programming voltage during the delay interval 522 and settles at the next programming voltage value Vp[i+1, j] to start the second programming interval 523. During the second programming interval 523, SELl [i+l] is set low to capacitive ly couple the pixel circuit 410b to the data line 22j via the common programming capacitor 416k. The gate node of the second pixel circuit 410b is adjusted by an amount based on the programming voltage Vp[i+1, j] during the second programming interval 523. At the conclusion of the second programming interval 523, SELl [i+l] is set high to disconnect the pixel circuit 410b from the data line 22j, and the data line adjusts to another programming voltage during the delay interval 524.
[00153] The programming period 520 continues by programming each pixel circuit in the "kth" segment, sequentially, row-by-row during programming intervals separated by delay intervals. Each of the respective first select lines for each row being programmed is accordingly set low during the programming interval corresponding to each row. Thus, the period 525 shown in FIG. 10B includes an appropriate number of distinct programming intervals until the second-to-last row of the "kth" segment. For example, where the "kth" segment includes 5 rows, the period 525 includes a programming interval for a third pixel circuit and a fourth pixel circuit, separated by a delay interval. The programming period 520 then continues with a delay interval 526 to separate the final programming interval 527 from the programming of the previous rows (during the period 525). The data line 22j is set to the final programming voltage Vp[i+x, j] during the delay interval 526. In an example where the "kth" segment includes 5 rows, the value "x" can be 4, but in general the value of "x" will be one less than the number of rows in each segment. The first select line for the final row, SELl [i + x] is set low during the final programming period 527 and the gate node of the final pixel circuit 41 Ox is adjusted according to Vp[i+x, j] through the capacitive coupling with the data line 22j via the common programming capacitor 416k. Following the final programming interval 527, a transition delay 528 concludes the programming period 520. The transition delay 528 provides a delay for the data line 22j to adjust to begin driving the next segment of the display, e.g., the "(k+l)th" segment. To prevent cross-talk SELl [i+x] is set high at the conclusion of the final programming interval 527. Thus, all of the select lines in the "kth" segment are high during the transition delay 528. In an example with 5 rows in the "kth" segment, the programming period can have a duration of approximately 50 microseconds, which allows approximately 10 microseconds for each programming interval, and accompanying delay interval, which can be approximately 1 to 3 microseconds. Generally, the length of the delay intervals will depend on the response speeds of the switching transistors and the time required to change programming voltages on the data line.
[00154] After the programming period 520, the "kth" segment is then driven to emit light during an emission interval 530 according to the programming voltages provided during the programming period 520. During the emission interval 530, the segmented emission line ("EM[k]") is set low to allow current to flow through the drive transistors to the light emitting devices in the "kth" segment according to the voltages retained on the respective gate nodes (e.g., the gate node 412g) by the respective storage capacitors (e.g., the storage capacitor 415). Repeating the compensation, programming, and driving procedure for each segment of the display panel causes a single frame to be displayed on the display panel 20. At the conclusion of the drive interval 530, the "kth" segment undergoes another compensation operation and then receives programming information for the next frame. Thus, continuously repeating the compensation, programming and driving sequence for each segment of the display causes video to be displayed on the display panel 20. In a particular implementation, the duration of the driving interval 530, tDRivE is dependent on the refresh rate of the display and/or the frame rate of the incoming video stream. For example, for a refresh rate of approximately 60 Hz, tpRAME can be approximately 16 milliseconds, and tDRivE ~ tFRAME - (tcoMP + tpRo). Furthermore, the duration of the compensation and programming cycles for each frame, i.e., tCoMP + tPRG, is dependent at least in part on the number of segments in the display panel. In particular, the duration tCoMP + tpRG is desirably less than, or approximately equal to, tFRAME / nSeg, where nSeg is the number of segments in the display. Selecting the durations desirably allow each segment to undergo a compensation cycle and a programming cycle in sequence in a single frame, before the sequence is repeated to display the next frame.
[00155] FIG. IOC is a timing diagram of another exemplary operation of the "kth" segment shown in FIG. 10A. Similar to FIG. 10B, operation of the "kth" segment includes a compensation interval 540, a programming period 550, and a driving interval 560. The compensation interval 540 begins similarly to the compensation interval 510 discussed in connection with FIG. 12A, with a ramp period 542 during which a ramp voltage is applied to the pixel circuits 410a, 410b, . . ., 41 Ox to provide a compensation operation to the segment simultaneously. However, during the transition delay period 544, the first selection lines {e.g., SELl [i], SELl [i+l], . . ., SELl [i+x]) are all kept low, rather than being switched high. The segmented second selection line 24k ("SEL2[k]") is set high at the initiation of the transition delay period 544.
[00156] During the programming period 550, the respective first selection lines are kept low until the conclusion of the programming interval for each respective row, at which point they are set high to disconnect the respective pixel circuit from the data line 22j before the next programming voltage is applied. Thus, the later-programmed pixel circuits in the "kth" segment are allowed to float with respect to the programming voltages applied to earlier-programmed pixel circuits. Once the programming voltage corresponding to the particular pixel circuit is applied on the data line 22j, the respective first selection transistor is turned off (by the respective first selection line) before the data line 22j is adjusted to a different value. Because the later-programmed pixel circuits in the "kth" segment are allowed to float during the programming of the earlier-programmed pixel circuits, the amount of adjustment to the gate nodes of the later-programmed pixel circuits retained by the respective storage capacitors {e.g., 415) is determined by the voltage on the data line 22j most recently before the first switch transistor {e.g., All) is turned off. The arrangement in FIG. IOC thus allows for less voltage changes, overall, on the first selection lines (SELl [i], SELl [i+l], . . ., SELl [i+x]) compared to the arrangement in FIG. 10B, which eases the burden on the address driver 8 operating the select lines.
[00157] The first programming interval 551 begins with all of the first selection transistors set low and the data line 22j set to Vp[i, j]. The first programming interval 551 ends with SELl [i+l] being set high before the data line 22j adjusts to Vp[i+1, j] during the delay interval 552. During the delay interval 552, while the first pixel circuit 410a is disconnected from the data line 22j, the next programming voltage Vp[i+1, j] is charged on the data line 22j. The pixel circuit 410b is programmed during the second programming interval 553. SELl [i+l] is set high during the delay interval 554 to disconnect the second pixel circuit 410b from the data line 22j. The remainder of the pixel circuits in the "kth" segment are programmed during the period 555, with each pixel circuit being disconnected from the data line 22j before the data line 22j is adjusted to a programming voltage for the next row, in a manner similar to the procedure for the first two rows described above. The final programming interval 557 is preceded by a delay interval 556 during which the data line 22j adjusts to Vp[i+x, j]. At the conclusion of the final programming interval 557, SELl [i+x] is set high during the transition delay 558, at which point all of the first selection lines SELl [i], SELl [i+l], . . ., SELl [i+x] are set high and the "kth" segment is completely programmed. Once the "kth" segment is programmed, the emission interval 560 is commenced to drive the pixels in the "kth" segment to emit light according to the programming information stored in the respective storage capacitors. During the driving interval 560, other segments in the display are operated to provide compensation and/or programming operations.
[00158] FIG. 11A illustrates an additional configuration of a pixel circuit 610 configured to be programmed via a programming capacitor 616 connected to a gate terminal of a drive transistor 612, via a first selection transistor 617, at a gate node 612g. The pixel circuit 610 also includes a storage capacitor 615 connected to the gate terminal of the drive transistor 612 and a second selection transistor 618 configured to allow the gate terminal of the drive transistor 612 to adjust according to a compensation current flowing through the drive transistor 612. The pixel circuit 610 can be implemented in the display system 50 described above in connection with FIG. 1, and can be one of a plurality of similar pixel circuits arranged in rows and columns to form a display panel, such as the display panel 20 described in connection with FIG. 1. The pixel circuit 610 of FIG. 11A is similar in some respects to the pixel circuits 410, 410' of FIGS. 9A and 9B, but differs in the configuration of the second selection transistor 618. The difference in configuration allows for certain performance benefits of the pixel circuit 610 in comparison to the pixel circuits 410, 410' described above. In particular, the second selection transistor 618 is connected to a point between the programming capacitor 616 and the first selection transistor 617 rather than being connected directly to the gate node 612g.
[00159] Similar to the pixel circuit 610 includes both a first select line 23i ("SEL1") and a second select line 24i ("SEL2") for operating the first selection transistor 617 and the second selection transistor 618, respectively. The pixel circuit 410 also includes a connection to an emission control line 25i ("EM"). The first and second select lines 23i, 24i and the emission control line 25i can be operated by the address driver 8 in the display system 50 according to instructions from the controller 2. Programming information is conveyed as programming voltages on the data line 22j, which is driven by the data driver 4. Two voltage supply lines 26i, 27i supply a current source and/or sink for a driving current conveyed through the pixel circuit 610 according to programming information. Similar to the discussion of the pixel circuits 410, 410' in FIGS. 9A-9C above, the data line 22j is also driven with ramp voltages in order to generate compensation currents through the pixel circuits via the programming capacitor 616. The ramp voltages can be supplied by a system within the data driver 4 or by a separate ramp voltage generator that selectively connects to the data line 22j during periods when the ramp voltage is desired to be supplied to the data line 22j.
[00160] The pixel circuit 610 also includes an emission control transistor 622 operated according to the emission control line 25i, and a light emitting device 614, such as an organic light emitting diode or another emissive device. The drive transistor 612, emission control transistor 622, and the light emitting device 614 are connected in series such that while the emission control transistor 622 is turned on, a current conveyed through the drive transistor 612 is also conveyed through the light emitting device 614. The pixel circuit 610 also includes a storage capacitor 615 having a first terminal connected to a gate terminal of the drive transistor 612 at the gate node 612g. A second terminal of the storage capacitor 615 is connected to the voltage supply line 26i, or to another suitable voltage (e.g. , a reference voltage) to allow the storage capacitor 615 to be charged according to programming information. The programming capacitor 616 is connected in series between the data line 22j and the first switch transistor 617. Thus, the first switch transistor 617 is connected between a first terminal of the programming capacitor 616 and the gate node 612g, while a second terminal of the programming capacitor 616 is connected to the data line 22j. [00161] As noted above, the second switch transistor 618 is connected between a point between the programming capacitor 616 and the first selection transistor 617 and a point between the drive transistor 612 and the emission control transistor 622. Thus, the second selection transistor 618 is connected to the gate terminal of the drive transistor through the first selection transistor 617. In this configuration, the gate terminal of the drive transistor 612 is separated from the emission control transistor 622 by two transistors in series (i.e., the first and second selection transistor 617, 618), similar to the arrangement of the transistors 418, 419 in the pixel circuit 410' of FIG. 9B. Separating the gate node 612g from the path of the driving current by two transistors in series reduces leakage currents through the drive transistor 612 by preventing influences on the source/drain terminals of the drive transistor 612 from influencing the voltage of the gate node 612g.
[00162] Referring again to FIGS. 9 A and 11 A, certain transistors in the pixel circuit 610 provide functions similar in some respects to corresponding transistors in the pixel circuit 410. For example, in a manner similar to the drive transistor 412, the drive transistor 612 directs a current from the voltage supply line 26i from a first terminal (e.g., a source terminal) to a second terminal (e.g., a drain terminal) based on the voltage applied to the gate node 612g. The current directed through the drive transistor 612 is conveyed through the light emitting device 614, which emits light according to the current flowing through it similar to the light emitting device 414. In a manner similar to the operation of the emission control transistor 422, the emission control transistor 622 selectively allows current flowing through the drive transistor 612 to be directed to the light emitting device 614, and thereby increases a contrast ratio of the display by reducing accidental emissions of the light emitting device 614 during non-emission periods. The first selection transistor 617 selectively connecting the programming capacitor 616 to the gate node 612g to allow the gate node 612g to be influenced by programming voltages and/or compensation currents conveyed via the programming capacitor 616 by the capacitive coupling with the data line 22j. The pixel circuit 610 also includes the storage capacitor 615 connected between the gate node 612g and the voltage supply line 26i (or another suitable voltage). The first switch transistor 617 allows the gate node 612g to be isolated (e.g., not capacitively coupled) to the data line 22j during an emission operation of the pixel circuit 610.
[00163] The second selection transistor 618 is operated by the second select line 24i so as to selectively connect the second terminal of the drive transistor 612 to the gate node 612g, via the first selection transistor 617. Thus, while the first and second selection transistors 617, 618 are turned on, a current path is provided between the voltage supply line 26i to the gate node 612g, through the drive transistor 612, to allow the voltage on the gate node 612g to adjust to a voltage suitable to convey a compensation current through the drive transistor 612. The second selection transistor 618 is also operated to selectively connect the programming capacitor 616, while the first selection transistor 617 is turned off, to reset the programming capacitor 616 by discharging the programming capacitor 616 to the OLED capacitance ("COLED") 624 via the emission control transistor 622. Resetting the programming capacitor 616 can be performed prior to compensation and programming to minimize the effects of previous frames on the display.
[00164] While the first selection transistor 617 is turned off, the pixel circuit 610 drives current through the light emitting device 614 according to charge stored on the storage capacitor 615 without influence from the data line 22j. Thus, similar to the pixel circuit 410, a display array including a plurality of pixel circuits similar to the pixel circuit 610 can be operated to allow some pixel circuits to be driven to emit light while others connected to a common data line undergo a compensation or programming operation. In other words, the pixel circuit 610 allows for different functions (e.g., programming, compensation, emission) to be carried out in parallel.
[00165] FIG. 1 IB is a timing diagram describing an exemplary operation of the pixel circuit 610 of FIG. 11 A. Operation of the pixel circuit 610 includes a reset cycle 630, a compensation cycle 640, a program cycle 650, and an emission cycle 660 (alternately referred to herein as a driving cycle). The entire duration that the data line 22j is manipulated to provide compensation and programming to the pixel circuit 610 is a row period 636 having a duration tRow- The duration of tROw can be determined based on the number of rows in the display panel 20 and the refresh rate of the display system 50.
[00166] The reset cycle 630 includes a first phase 632 and a second phase 634. During the first phase 632, the emission control line EM[ i ] is set high to turn off the emission control transistor 622 and cease emission from the pixel circuit. Once the emission control transistor 622 is turned off, the driving current stops flowing through the light emitting device 614 and the voltage across the light emitting device 614 goes to the OLED off voltage, VOLED(0 ff) . While the emission control transistor 622 is turned off, current stops flowing through the drive transistor 612, and the stress on the drive transistor 612 during the first phase 632 is reduced.
[00167] For example, the light emitting device 614 can be an organic light emitting diode with a cathode connected to VSS and an anode connected to the emission control transistor 622 at a node 614a. At the end of the first phase 632, the voltage at the node 614a settles at VoLED(Off), relative to VSS. During the second phase 634, the emission control line 25i is set low while the second select line 24i is also low and the data line 22j is set to a reference voltage VREF- Thus, the second selection transistor 618 and the emission control transistor 622 are turned on to connect the programming capacitor 416 between the data line 22j charged to VREF and the node 614a charged to VoLED(Off). The first selection transistor 617 is held off by the first select line 23i during the second phase 634 such that the gate of the drive transistor 612 is not influenced during the reset cycle 630.
[00168] The light emitting device 614 is illustrated connected in parallel with an OLED capacitance 624 ("COLED"), which represents the capacitance of the light emitting device 614. The OLED capacitance 624 is generally greater than the capacitance of the programming capacitor 616 such that connecting Cprg to COLED during the second phase 634 (via the emission control transistor 622 and the second selection transistor 618) allows the voltage on Cprg 616 to substantially discharge to COLED 624. The OLED capacitance 624 thus acts as a source or sink to discharge the voltage on Cprg 616 and thereby reset the programming capacitor 616. During the second phase 634, Cprg 616 and COLED 624 are connected in series and the voltage difference between VSS and VREF is allocated between them according to a voltage division relationship, with the bulk of the voltage drop being applied across the lesser of the two capacitances. The voltage across Cprg is close to be VREF + VOLED-VSS considering COLED is larger than Cprg. . Because the OLED 614 is turned off during the first phase 632, and the voltage at the node 614a allowed to settle at VoLED(Off), the voltage changes on the node 614a during the second phase 634 are insufficient to turn on the OLED 614, such that no incidental emission occurs.
[00169] Following the reset cycle 630, the first and second select lines 23i, 24i and emission control line 25i are operated to provide the compensation cycle 640, the programming cycle 650, and the driving cycle 660, which are each similar to the compensation, programming, and driving cycles 440, 450, 450 discussed at length in connection with FIG. 9C. Because the operation of the pixel circuit 610 following the reset cycle 630 is substantially the same as the operation of the pixel circuits 410, 410' already discussed above, the compensation cycle 640, programming cycle 650, and driving cycles 660 are only briefly discussed below.
[00170] A ramp voltage is applied on the data line 22j during the compensation cycle 640 to convey a compensation current through pixel circuit 610 via the programming capacitor 616. The compensation cycle 640 is initiated with a reference voltage period 642 where the data line 22j is held constant at the reference voltage VREF- During the ramp period 644, the voltage on the data line 22j is decreased from VREF to VA, at a substantially constant time derivative so as to convey a current through the drive transistor 612 and the second switch transistor 618 and allow the gate node 612g to adjust according to the conveyed current. During the programming cycle 650, the data line 22j is set to a programming voltage VP while the first selection transistor 617 is turned on and the second selection transistor 618 is turned off. One or more delay periods (e.g., the period 652) can separate the reset cycle 630, the compensation cycle 640, the programming cycle 650 and the driving cycle 660.
[00171] Displays are being sought with ever higher pixel densities, which influences designers to create pixel circuits with ever smaller areas to increase the number of pixels per area. To save space, pixel circuit designers look to reduce as many components as possible and to use smaller components whenever possible. Reduced capacitances have been employed, which are inherently more sensitive to dynamic effects on the data lines. Resetting the programming capacitor 616 in the reset cycle 630 reduces the effects of prior frames during the compensation cycle 640 and the programming cycle 650, mitigates the dynamic effects, and thereby allows for the selection of a reduced capacitance value for the programming capacitor, which saves space in the circuit layout and allows for an increase in pixel density.
[00172] FIG. 12A illustrates a circuit diagram of a portion of a display panel in which multiple pixel circuits 610a, 610b, 61 Ox are arranged to share a common programming capacitor 616k. The pixel circuits 610a, 610b, 61 Ox represent a portion of a display panel suitable for incorporation in a display system, such as the display system 50 discussed in connection with FIG. 1. The pixel circuits 610a-x are a group of pixel circuits in a common column of the display panel (e.g., the "jth" column) and can be in adjacent rows of the display panel (e.g., the "ith," "(i+l)th," through to the "(i+x)th" rows). The pixel circuits 610a-x are configured similarly to the pixel circuit 610 described above in connection with FIGS. 1 1 A-l IB, except that the group of pixels circuits 610a-x all share the common programming capacitor 616k. The group of pixel circuits 610a-x are each connected to a segment data line 666 that is connected to a first terminal of the common programming capacitor 616k while a second terminal of the common programming capacitor 616k is connected to the data line 22j.
[00173] The group of pixel circuits 610a-x that share the common programming capacitor 616k are included in a segment of the display panel 20 which is a sub-group of the pixel circuits in the display panel 20. The segment including the pixel circuits 610a-x can also extend to each of the pixel circuits in a common row with the pixel circuits 610a-x, i.e., the pixel circuits in the display panel 20 having a common first select line with the pixel circuits 610a-x (SELl [i] to SEL1 l [i+x]). Among the plurality of pixel circuits in the segment, pixels circuits in a common column of the display panel 20 i.e., the pixel circuits connected to the same data line (DATA[j]), share the common programming capacitor 616k and are controlled according to segmented emission and second select lines 24k, 25k. For convenience the group of pixel circuits 610a-x (and the pixel circuits in the same rows as the pixel circuits 610a-x) is referred to herein as the "kth" segment.
[00174] For clarity in explanation, the "kth" segment referred to herein will be described by way of example as a segment including 5 adjacent rows of pixel circuits. In this way an entire display panel can be divided into segments ("sub-groups") of 5 rows each. For example, a display panel with 720 rows can be divided into 144 segments, each having 5 adjacent rows of the display panel. However, it is noted that the discussions herein of segmented display architectures is generally not so limited, and the discussions herein referring to segments having 5 rows can generally be extended to segments having more than, or less than, 5 rows, such as 4 rows, 6 rows, 8 rows, 10 rows, 16 rows, 1, etc., or a number of rows that evenly divides the total number of rows in the display panel, and also to segments including non-adjacent rows of a display panel, such as interleaved rows (odd/even rows), etc.
[00175] FIG. 12B is a timing diagram of an exemplary operation of the "kth" segment shown in FIG. 12 A. Operation of the "kth" segment includes a reset and compensation period 670, a programming period 680, and a driving cycle 690. The reset and compensation period 670 includes a first phase 672 during which the light emitting devices in the "kth" segment are turned off by operation of the segmented emission control line 25k ("EM[k]"). During the first phase 672, the emission control transistors (e.g., 622) in each pixel circuit in the "kth" segment are turned off, which allows the light emitting devices in each pixel circuit to settle at their respective off voltages. The first phase 672 is followed by a second phase 674 where the segmented second select line 24k ("SEL2[k]") and EM[k] 25k are both set low to allow the programming capacitors 616k for each segment to discharge to the OLED capacitances (e.g., COLED) in each respective segment. During the second phase 674 ("discharge phase"), the OLED capacitances in each segment for a common data line are connected in parallel through the segmented data line 666. The total capacitance of the parallel connected OLED capacitances thus provides a source or sink to discharge the voltage on the segmented programming capacitor 616k and thereby clear the effects of previous frames from the segmented programming capacitor 616k.
[00176] Following the first and second phases 672, 674, the segmented programming capacitor is reset according to the reference voltage VREF applied on the data line 22j during the second phase 674. The segmented emission line 25k is then set high to prevent incidental emission from the light emitting devices 614 in the "kth" segment during the compensation and programming operations. Compensation is carried out by initializing the data line 22j to VREF during a reference period 676 and then providing a ramp voltage on the data line 22j during a ramp period 678. The ramp voltage changes from VREF to VREF - VA with a substantially constant time derivative such that a compensation current is conveyed through the segmented programming capacitor 616k. The first select lines in the segment (e.g., the select lines 23i, 662, 664, etc.) and the segmented second select line 24k are held low during the application of the ramp voltage to allow the gate of the respective drive transistors in the segment to adjust according to the compensation current conveyed through the pixel circuits by the segmented programming capacitor 616k. Thus, voltages are established on each of the respective gate nodes of the pixel circuits 610a-x during the compensation cycle that account for variations and/or degradations in the respective drive transistors, such as degradations due to threshold voltage variations, mobility variations, etc.
[00177] Following the reset and compensation period 670, SEL2[k] is set high during the programming period 680, to fix the compensation voltage on the storage capacitor of each pixel circuit in the segment. The rows in the "kth" segment are sequentially voltage programmed, by sequentially selecting the respective first select lines (SELl [i], SELl [i+l], . . . , SELl [i+x]) for each row during programming intervals separated by delay intervals included in the programming period 680. Programming voltages for each row are provided on the data line 22j, during the appropriate programming intervals. Following the programming of each respective row, the respective first select line is set high to disconnect the drive transistor from the segmented data line 666, and allow for programming of subsequent pixel circuits in the segment without influencing the voltages on the already programmed pixels. The pixel circuits are then driven to emit light according to the voltages stored on their respective storage capacitors (e.g., the storage capacitor 615) during the driving period 690. The programming period 680 and the driving period 690 are thus similar to the programming periods 520, 550 and driving periods 530, 560 discussed above in connection with FIGS. lOB-lOC.
[00178] FIG. 13A illustrates a timing diagram for driving a single frame of a segmented display. The example timing diagram in FIG. 13 A refers to an arrangement where the display panel is segmented into multiple segments each having 5 rows, such that the first segment includes rows 1 through 5, the second segment includes rows 6 through 10, etc. The final segment includes rows Y through NR, where NR is the number of rows in the display, and Y is a number 4 less than NR. However, the present disclosure is not limited to segments having 5 rows or to segments having adjacent rows. For example, a segmented display with two rows can be formed a first segment including all of the even rows and a second segment including all of the odd rows. In another example, a segmented display can include a first segment including pixels in odd rows and odd columns, a second segment including pixels in odd rows and even columns, a third segment including pixels in even rows and odd columns, and a fourth segment including pixels in even rows and even columns. Other examples of segments are also applicable to the present disclosure, but in the interests of brevity it suffices to note that the driving schemes described herein for segmented displays apply to segments having less than, or more than, 5 rows, to segments including non-adjacent rows, and to segments including only portions of rows.
[00179] Referring to FIG. 13 A, the data lines (e.g., 22j, 22m, etc.) of the display system 50 are driven such that rows 1 through 5 (the first segment) are compensated in a compensation cycle (701), and then rows 1 through 5 are programmed in a programming cycle (702), and driven to emit light in an emission cycle (703). The sequence of compensation, programming, and emission can be carried out according to the timing diagrams shown in FIGS. 10B- IOC, for example. The duration of the compensation cycle (701) and the programming cycle (702) for the first segment has a duration t SEGMENT · Where the number of segments is relatively large, the duration of tsEGMENT can be approximately given by tsEGMENT ~ tFRAME / (Number of Segments). Following the programming of the first segment (702), the data lines (e.g., 22j, 22m, etc.) are driven to provide a compensation cycle to the pixels in rows 6 through 10 (704), a programming cycle (705), and an emission cycle (706). The procedure continues to provide compensation and programming to all the segments in the display panel 20 until the final segment (rows Y through NR) is driven in a compensation cycle (708) and a programming cycle (709). [00180] In other examples, a reset period can occur prior to the compensation periods 701, 704, 708, to reset the respective segmented programming capacitors for each segment. The reset period can be similar to the reset cycles discussed above in connection with FIGS. 10A - 12B and include a first phase and a second phase. During the first phase the light emitting devices in the segment are turned off by the segmented emission control line to allow the voltage across the light emitting devices (and the OLED capacitances) to settle at the OLED off voltage. During the second phase, the segmented programming capacitor is connected the OLED capacitances to discharge the segmented programming capacitor while the reference voltage is applied to the data line to reset the segmented programming capacitor and decrease the influence of previous frames on the operation of the pixel circuits. In an example including a reset period, the duration of tsEGMENT is roughly the sum of the durations of the compensation cycle 701, the programming cycle 702, and the second phase of the reset period. The first phase of the reset period is not included in t SEGMENT? because tsEGMENT indicates the duration that each segment operates the data line 22j, and the data line 22j is disconnected from the segment during the first phase of the reset period, i.e., the first and second select lines are set high during the first phase (e.g., 672).
[00181] The driving scheme provided by the timing diagram in FIG. 13A allows the data lines (22j, 22m, etc.) to be substantially continuously utilized by the driver 4 to convey ramp voltages and/or programming voltages, without the need for periods where all pixels are driven to emit light and none undergo programming and/or compensation operations. The parallel operation scheme provided by aspects of the present disclosure thereby maximizes available time for programming and/or compensation. Additionally or alternatively, the parallel operation scheme provided by aspects of the present disclosure maximizes the frame rate that can be provided by a display system operated according to the parallel operation scheme.
[00182] Furthermore, by allowing the pixels to be in driving cycles nearly the entire time they are not being programmed or compensated, which is possible due to the first switch transistor 417 and the storage capacitor 415, the display operates with a duty cycle approaching 100%. As a result, the light emitting devices can be driven to emit light with roughly half the intensity of a display operating at a 50% duty cycle and still maintain the same cumulative light output from the display at each frame. Thus, the relatively high duty cycle enabled by the present disclosure allows the light emitting devices to emit light at a decreased intensity, which corresponds to a decreased driving current. Driving the light emitting devices and the driving transistors at the decreased driving current causes those components to age ("degrade") relatively less than would be the case with higher driving currents that generate relatively more electrical stress on the semi- conductive materials in the light emitting device and/or driving transistor.
[00183] FIG. 13B is a flowchart corresponding to the driving scheme shown in the timing diagram in FIG. 13 A. The operation of the flowchart is described in reference generally to the example display system illustrated in FIG. 10A, however, the flowchart also applies to the display system illustrated in FIG. 12A. The next segment is selected by adjusting the select lines shared by the segment to values appropriate for compensation (710). For example, in the display panel configuration shown in FIG. 10A, the segmented second select line 24k is set low, to allow the current generated by the ramp voltage to be conveyed through the driving transistor, and the segmented emission line 25k is set high, to prevent incidental emission during programming and compensation. In the display panel configuration shown in FIG. 12A, the select lines can be adjusted to provide for reset and compensation, similar to the operation during the reset and compensation period 670 of FIG. 12B. The pixels in the selected segment then undergo a compensation operation (712). The compensation operation can be carried out by generating a voltage ramp on the data line 22j, which is applied to the common programming capacitor 416k to apply a corresponding current to the pixels in the segment (e.g., 410a-x). Each of the first select lines 23i, 474, 478 are also set low during the compensation operation to keep the associated first switch transistors (e.g., 417, 617) turned on. During the compensation operation, the gate nodes of the pixel circuits 410a-x self-adjust to voltages accounting for the variations in driving transistor threshold voltages. The self-adjustment occurs due to the current passing through the respective drive transistors through the second switch transistors, which adjusts the gate nodes of the driving transistors.
[00184] The compensation operation is concluded by turning off the second switch transistors via the segmented second select line 24k. The pixels in the selected segmented are then voltage-programmed one row at a time. The first row is selected by setting the first select line (e.g., 23i) for the first row of the segment low (714). The first row of the segment is then programmed by setting the data lines to provide programming voltages appropriate for the pixels in the first row (716). The first select line for the first row (e.g., 23i) high to disconnect the gate nodes of the pixels and the storage capacitor 415, from the data line 22j, and the programming information is retained by the storage capacitor 415. The next row in the segment is selected (718), and that is voltage programmed similarly to the first row (720). If all the rows in the segment have not yet been programmed (722), the next row of the segment is selected (718) and programmed (720) and the process is repeated until all the rows in the segment have been programmed.
[00185] Once all the rows in the segment have been programmed (722), a driving operation is performed on the segment (724). During the driving operation (724), the segmented emission line 24k for the segment is set low to allow the emission transistors (e.g., 422, 622) in each pixel in the segment to convey current to the light emitting device (e.g., 414, 614) via the driving transistor (e.g., 412, 612). The first and second switch transistors are turned off in each pixel circuit in the segment during the driving operation such that the programming information is retained by the storage capacitors within each pixel circuit independently of the present value on the data line. With the selected segment set in the driving operation (e.g., the driving cycles 530, 560, 690), the driving scheme returns to the beginning to select the next segment in the display (710) and the operation is repeated on the next segment, and each successive segment until returning again to the original segment. A single frame of a video display is displayed in the time passed between successive compensation and programming operations of the same segment of a display.
[00186] FIGS. 14A and 14B provide experimental results of percentage errors in pixel currents given variations in device parameters for pixel circuits such as those shown in FIGS. 9 A and 9B. It is particularly noted that the percentage error in pixel current correlates to a percentage error in luminescence from the light emitting device, because the light emitting device emits light in proportion to the current passing through the device. FIG. 14A provides the simulated error in pixel current from the pixel circuit 410' shown in FIG. 9B when the pixel circuit is programmed at a range of grayscale data values and the drive transistor 412 has a variation in mobility of 40% (e.g., from 0.8 to 1.2). As shown in FIG. 14A, the error in pixel current is under about 6% for most grayscale values, and approaches about 10% for very low pixel currents, even with a mobility variation of 40% on the drive transistor 412.
[00187] FIG. 14B provides the simulated error in pixel current from the pixel circuit 410' shown in FIG. 9B when the pixel circuit is programmed at a range of grayscale data values and the drive transistor 412 has a threshold voltage that varies by 3.5 V (e.g., from -0.5 V to -4.0 V). As shown in FIG. 14B, the error in pixel current is under about 6% for most grayscales, and approaches about 8% for very low pixel currents, even with a threshold voltage variation of 3.5 V on the drive transistor 412.
[00188] The pixel circuit 410' that achieved the simulated error results shown in FIG. 14A and 14B was arranged with transistor components as shown in the Table 1 below. Thus, Table 1 provides a single non-limiting listing of potential values for the components in the pixel circuit 410'. With regard to the capacitor values, it is noted that tests have been performed with storage capacitors at 200 fF and programming capacitors at 270 fF. Generally, the capacitance values of the programming capacitor, Cprg, the storage capacitor, Cs, the dynamic range of the ramp (e.g., voltage change from the maximum to the minimum values of the ramp), and the desired bias current to be generated via the ramp voltage and the programming capacitor allows for calculation of the display timing. For example, where the dynamic range is 4 V, Cprg can be 230 fF and Cs can be 170 fF to provide a desired bias current during a 15 compensation cycle.
Figure imgf000053_0001
Table 1 : Exemplary values of circuit elements in pixel circuit shown in FIG.
[00189] FIGS. 14A and 14B indicate that degradations in the drive transistor 412 due to both mobility variations or threshold voltage variations are well compensated by the pixel circuits described herein. Generally, the pixel circuits described herein provide compensation by applying a current to allow the drive transistor to adjust its gate voltage according to the parameters of the drive transistor (VT, Cox, μ, etc.), as described, for example, in connection with equations 14-20. As shown herein, the compensation operation can be performed before programming (e.g., FIGS. 9A-9C), during programming (e.g., FIGS. 8A-8B), or following programming (FIGS. 4A-4F). Furthermore, aspects and features of the pixel circuits and driving schemes described separately herein can be modified so as to combine separately described features in a single pixel circuit and/or scheme of operation. For example, the use of a ramp voltage to generate a current through the drive transistor during compensation can be applied to the pixel circuit 210 of FIGS. 4A-4F, or the use of a bias current on the data line can be applied to the pixel circuit 410 of FIGS. 9A-9C, or the pixel circuit 310 of FIG. 8A can be modified to include a second capacitor similar to the storage capacitor 415 of FIGS. 9A-9B, etc.
[00190] FIG. 15A is a circuit diagram showing a portion of the gate driver 8 including control lines ("CNTi") 734 to regulate the first select lines for each segment. For example, the address driver 8 can includes outputs for the lines that are shared within each segment, e.g., the segmented emission line 25k and the segmented second select line 24k. The address driver 8 can also include gate outputs ("Gate k") that combines with the control lines 734 to generate the first select lines 740 to each segment of the display array. As shown in FIG. 15 A, the gate output 738 is connected to the first select lines 740 via a first switch 730 operated by the control lines 734. Inverse control lines "(/CNTi") 736 control a second switch 732. One side of the second switch 732 is connected to a high voltage line ("Vgh") 742. The other side of the second switch 732 is electrically connected to a node of the first switch 730 other than the one connected to the gate output 738. That is, the second switch 732 is electrically connected to the node of the first switch 730 that is also connected to the first select lines 740. The second switch 732 thus conveys the voltage on the high voltage line 742 to the first select lines 740 while the second switch 732 is closed and the first switch 730 is open. Selectively receiving the output of the gate output 738 or the high voltage line 742 depending on the status of the control lines 734 and inverse control lines 736.
[00191] The inverse control lines 736 are configured to provide signals opposite to the control lines 734, thus when the CNTi lines are high, the /CNTi lines are low, and vice versa. The switches 734, 736 are switches that are selectively opened and closed according to the signals on the control lines 734 and inverse control lines 736, respectively, such that the first switch 730 is open while the second switch 732 is closed, and vice versa. Thus, when the control line 734 is high (and the inverse control line 736 is low), the first select lines 630 receive the high voltage on the high voltage line 742 via the second switch 732, which is closed. When the control line 734 is low (and the inverse control line 736 is high), the first select lines 740 receive the voltage on the gate output 738.
[00192] FIG. 15B is a diagram of the first two gate outputs 750, 760 which are used to provide the first select lines for the first two segments. Thus, the first gate output ("Gate #0") 750 can be connected to first select lines 751-755 for the first five rows of the display, which first five rows comprise the first segment of the display. The first gate output 750 is connected to each of the first select lines 751-755 via a switch controlled by one of the control lines 734. In at least some examples, the switchable connection between the gate output 750 and each of the first select lines 751-755 is a switchable connection similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 15 A. Each switchable connection can include two switches (similar to the switches 730, 732) that are controlled by a control line and an inverse control line, respectively (similar to the lines 734, 736) such that one switch is on while the other is off and the first select line receives either the voltage on the gate output 750 or a high voltage Vgh, depending on the control line values.
[00193] In one example, the first select line for the first row 751 ("SEL 1(1)") receives a high voltage Vgh while the first control line CNTl is set high. While CNTl is high, the switch between SELl (1) 751 and the first gate output 750 is open, and so SEL 1(1) 751 does not receive the voltage on the first gate output 750. However, while CNTl is high, the inverse of CNTl, which is referred to herein as "/CNTl," is set low, and a switch connected to SEL 1(1) 751, not to the first gate output 750 (switch not shown, but arranged similarly to the switch 622 in FIG. 15A) is turned on so as to connect SEL 1(1) to Vgh. The boxed switches shown in FIG. 15B thus each represent two switches arranged as shown in FIG. 15A to selectively connect the first select lines 751-755 to either the gate output 750 or the high voltage Vgh.
[00194] As arranged in FIGS. 15A-15B, SEL 1(1) 751 is low only when the first gate output 750 is low and the first control line CNTl is also low. During a period when the first gate output 750 is high, such as during a period when the first segment is not being selected for compensation and/or programming, then SEL 1(1) 751 is always high, whether CNTl is low and SEL 1(1) 751 receives the high voltage from the first gate output 750 or CNTl is high and SEL 1(1) 751 receives the high voltage from the high voltage line 742. The first select lines 752-755 for the other rows of the first segment are similarly arranged. Thus, the first select lines 751-755 in the first segment are only low so as to turn on the respective first switch transistors in the pixels of the first segment during periods when the first gate output 750 is set low, otherwise the first select lines 751-755 remain high.
[00195] The second gate output 760 is connected to first select lines 761-765 for the second segment of the display, and each of the first select lines 761-765 receive either the voltage on the second gate output 760 or a high voltage Vgh according to the control line signals. The control line signals (e.g., CNT1, CNT2, . . , CNT5) used to generate the first select lines for the first segment are also used to drive the first select lines for the second segment. A separate gate output (similar to gate outputs 750, 760) is included for each segment in the display array, with each gate output used to drive the first select lines in the respective segment as shown in FIGS. 15A-15B. The final segment is driven by first select lines controlled according to the final gate output ("Gate #n"). In an example where each segment includes 5 rows, the final segment thus includes rows n><5+l through n><5+5, where the number n is an index for the number of segments that starts at zero, and increments for each segment to the "(n+l)th" segment, which is reflected by the first segment being referred to as "Gate #0". In the 5 rows per segment example, the total number of segments is given by (Number of Rows) / 5.
[00196] For convenience in the description above, various signals, such as the gate outputs 750, 760, and control lines are described as "outputs." However, it is understood that an implementation of an address driver, such as the address driver 8 of the display system 50 shown in FIG. 1, may be configured as an integrated unit with outputs for each first select line, segmented second select line, and/or segmented emission control line, as necessary to operate the pixel circuits described herein. In particular, an address driver configured according to the present disclosure can be arranged with one or more of the switches operated by control lines, e.g., the switches 730, 732 shown in FIG. 15 A, internal to the address driver or external to the address driver.
[00197] In some instances, the switches 730, 732 can be transistors and the control lines 734 and inverse control lines 732 can be connected to the gates of the transistors to thereby selectively control the conductivity of the channel regions of the transistors so as to open and close the switches 730, 732.
[00198] FIG. 16 is a timing diagram for a display array operated by an address driver utilizing control lines to generate the first select line signals. The timing diagram shown in FIG. 16 provides a compensation, programming, and driving operation for the "kth" segment of the display similar to the timing diagram shown in FIG. 10B or FIG. 12B. However, the timing diagram of FIG. 16 uses the control lines 734 (e.g., CNT1, CNT2, . . ., CNT5) to generate the first select lines {e.g., SEL[i], SEL[i+l], etc. of FIGS. 10B and 12B). To illustrate the operation of the control lines 734 to generate the select lines, the timing diagram in FIG. 16 illustrates the generation of the select lines employed in FIG. 10B, and accordingly the compensation cycle 510, programming cycle 520, and driving cycle 530 shown in FIG. 16 correspond to the respectively cycles in FIG. 10B.
[00199] The gate output line ("Gate[k]") is set low to start the compensation cycle 510 and held low through the programming period 520. The Gate[k] signal is thus nearly the opposite of the segmented emission line ("EM[k]"). However, the Gate[k] signal is set high at the start of the transition delay 528, whereas the segmented emission line does not go low until after the transition delay 528. During the entire period that the Gate[k] signal is set low, the first select lines in the "kth" segment are low when the respective ones of the control lines are low and the first select lines are high when the respective ones of the control lines are high. Accordingly, the discussion of the timing of the first select lines in FIG. 10B to allow for compensation and programming of the pixel circuits 410, 410' in the "kth" segment applies to the timing of the control lines shown in FIG. 16. It is particularly noted that the driving scheme of FIG. IOC where the first select lines are held low until turning high at the end of each respective programming period 551, 553, etc., can also be implemented using gate outputs and control lines suitably configured to provide the timing shown in FIG. IOC. In addition, the timing scheme shown in FIG. 12B to operate the display system of FIG. 12A to provide a reset operation can be provided using the gate outputs and control lines configured to provide the timing scheme of FIG. 12B.
[00200] Following the compensation and programming of the "kth" segment, the next segment, i.e., the segment following the "kth" segment is initiated by setting the gate output line, Gate[k+1], to low and the control lines CNT1, CNT2, . . . , CNT5 repeat the timing from the previous cycle to generate the first select line signals on the first select lines in the "(k+l)th" segment. It is noted that first select lines in the "kth" segment remain high during the compensation and programming of the "(k+l)th" segment because the gate output Gate[k] for the "kth" segment is high.
[00201] By regulating the first select lines in a segmented fashion according to control lines that are re-used for each segment of the display array, at least some computation burden is removed from the address driver, relative to an address driver that separately generates signals for each first select line in a display array. An address driver including switches similar to those shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is required to produce only the control line signals and each of the gate output signals, and the first select line signals for each row in the display are generated via the switching arrangement according to the gate output signals and control line signals. The address driver can also produce the segmented emission line signals and the segmented second select line signals.
[00202] FIG. 17A is a block diagram of a source driver 770 with an integrated voltage ramp voltage generator 780 for driving each data line in a display panel. In some examples, the source driver 770 can be used as the data driver 4 of the display system 50 shown in FIG. 1 to provide data voltages and/or ramp voltages for programming and compensation pixel circuits in the display system. The source driver 770 also includes data registers 774 and digital-to-analog converters ("DACs") 778. The data registers 774 store digital data corresponding to programming information 772 to provide to each data line (e.g., 790a, 790b, etc.) of the display array. The programming information 772 can be a video data stream conveyed from a video data source, and can be provided via a controller, such as the controller 2 of the display system 50. The data registers 774 convey the digital data to the DACs 778 via a connection 776. The DACs 778 transform the digital data to a programming voltage and provide the programming voltage on one or more analog output lines 784. The DACs 778 can be a resistive ladder or resistive lather type DAC, which generates varying voltage outputs via an array of precise resistors selectively connected to the analog output lines 784 to provide the desired voltage output. Generally, there can be one analog output line 784 for each column of the display array or there can be less than one analog output line 784 for each column where a multiplexer is used to share the analog output lines between multiple columns.
[00203] The data lines 790a, 790b, 790c correspond to the data lines 22j, 22m discussed in connection with the display system 50 of FIG. 1 and the various pixel circuit configurations provided herein. The data lines 790a-c supply programming voltages (from the DACs 778) or a ramp voltage (from the ramp voltage generator 780) to the pixels in the display system. Each data line 790a-c is connected to the analog output lines 784, and the ramp line 782, via a buffer 789. The buffer 789 isolates the DACs 778 and the ramp voltage generator 780 from the load of the display panel. The buffer 789 can be considered an amplifier to condition the voltages on the data lines 790a-c according to the output of the DACs 778 and/or ramp voltage generator 780 while preventing the load of the panel from influencing the DACs. Each buffer 789 is alternately connected to the DACs 778 or the ramp voltage generator 780 via two switches 786, 788. A first switch 786 connects the buffer 789 to the analog output line 784 from the DACs 778. A second switch 788 connects the buffer 789 to the ramp line 782 from the ramp voltage generator 780. The switches 786, 788 are operated according to control signals (e.g., from the controller 4 and/or address driver 8) to convey a ramp voltage during compensation intervals and to convey programming voltages from the DACs 778 during programming intervals.
[00204] The ramp voltage generator 780 desirably produces a time-changing voltage on the ramp line 782 with a substantially constant time derivative suitable for providing the compensation functions described herein in reference to FIGS. 9-13. In particular, the time- changing voltage from the ramp voltage generator 780 is suitable for being applied to the programming capacitor, e.g., the capacitors 416, 416k, 616, 616k to generate the compensation current through the driving transistor 412, 612 so as to allow the gate node of the pixel circuit to adjust according to the degradation of the pixel circuit.
[00205] The ramp voltage generator 780 can include a current source connected to the ramp line 782 across a capacitor, i.e., a current source in series connection with a capacitor. The ramp voltage generator 780 can also include a digital-to-analog converter ("DAC") receiving a time changing series of digital values, which thereby produce a time changing series of voltages generally defining a time-changing voltage ramp. The series of digital values can be sequential digital values or can be monotonically increasing or decreasing digital values such that the voltage ramp provided on the ramp line 782 is continuously increasing or decreasing, as desired.
[00206] The ramp voltage can be a declining voltage ramp or an inclining voltage ramp, with respect to time, depending on the particular pixel circuit configuration selected. Many of the pixel circuits discussed herein describe a declining voltage ramp such that current is drawn through the driving transistor of the pixel circuit. However, pixel circuits disclosed in commonly assigned co-pending U.S. Patent Application No. 12/633,209, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. US 2010/0207920, the contents of which are incorporated entirely herein by reference, discloses at least some pixel circuits utilizing an inclining voltage ramp applied to a data line to generate a bias current across a capacitor internal to the pixel circuit.
[00207] FIG. 17B is a block diagram of another source driver 770' that provides a ramp voltage for each data line in a display panel and includes a cyclic digital-to-analog converter ("cyclic DAC") 799. The cyclic DAC 799 operates by generating a ramp voltage internally, the ramp voltage is compared to a voltage corresponding to a desired output voltage, and when the ramp voltage matches the desired output voltage, the cyclic DAC 799 holds the value corresponding to the programming information and provides the output voltage to the buffer 679.
[00208] The internal ramp voltage generation within the cyclic DAC 799 can be utilized to provide the ramp voltage to the data lines 790a-c for use in compensation by selectively providing a ramp value 798 to a ramp signal line 796, which ramp value 798 indicates to the cyclic DAC 799 to output the ramp signal to the buffer 789. Similar to the source driver 770 with the resistive type DACs 778 switches 792, 794 are selectively activated to determine whether the cyclic DAC 799 outputs a programming voltage or a ramp voltage. When the first switch 792 is closed, the data registers 774 are connected to the input of the cyclic DAC 799, and the cyclic DAC 799 outputs a programming voltage corresponding to the programming data. When the second switch 794 is closed (and the first switch is open), the ramp value 798 is connected to the input of the cyclic DAC 799 and the data lines 790a-c are provided with the ramp voltage generated with the cyclic DAC 799. In some examples, the ramp value 798 can include an indication of a desired dynamic range and/or timing (e.g., increase/decrease rate) of the voltage ramp to be output to the buffer 789.
[00209] Similar to the source driver 770 in FIG. 17A, the source driver 770' of FIG. 17B provides a ramp value to the data lines 790a-c with a substantially constant time derivative such that the pixel circuits disclosed herein can generate a compensation current through the driving transistor while the gate of the driving transistor adjusts according to the degradation of the pixel circuit (e.g., threshold voltage shifts in the driving transistor, changes in mobility or other factors influencing current- voltage characteristics, etc.).
[00210] FIG. 18A is a display system 800 incorporating a demultiplexer 839 to reduce the number of output terminals 840 from the source driver 4. The demultiplexer 839 provides connections between more than one data lines (e.g., the data lines 840a-c) and a single output terminal 840 of the source driver 839. The data lines 840a-c are referred to herein as DL[j] 840a, DL[j+l] 840b, and DL[j+2] 840c, to refer to the "jth," "(j+l)th," and "(j+2)th" data lines in the pixel array of the display system 800. By arranging each output terminal of the source driver 4 to be connected to a demultiplexer (such as the demultiplexer 839), the source driver 4 can have N / n output terminals where N is the total number of data lines to be provided to a pixel array and n is the number of outputs from each demultiplexer. In other words, the number of output terminals of the source driver 4 is reduced by a factor of the number of outputs of each demultiplexer.
[00211] For example purposes, the display system 800 illustrated in FIG. 18A illustrates a single demultiplexer 839 connected to the "kth" output terminal 840 ("OUT[k]") of the source driver 4. The demultiplexer 839 is operated according to a control signal 825 from the controller 2 to sequentially couple the OUT[k] line 840 to the three data lines 840a, 840b, and 840c one at a time. The data lines 840a-c can correspond to, for example, red, green, and blue subpixels for a single pixel position in an RGB display, or can be three other pixels in a common row of a display array. Furthermore, the demultiplexer 839 can sequentially couple the OUT[k] line 840 to less than three or more than three data lines, such as two data lines, four data lines, etc.
[00212] However, display systems incorporating a demultiplexer can encounter problems during programming when some data lines are selected for programming before the programming voltage for the current row is applied to the data line via the demultiplexer. These problems will be described next in connection with FIG. 18B, which is a timing diagram for a display array utilizing a demultiplexer. As shown in the timing diagram of FIG. 18B, during a programming cycle 850, the select line 834 (labeled as "SEL[i]") is set low. The data lines 840a ("DL[j]"), 840b ("DL[j+l]"), and 840c ("DL[j+2]") are then sequentially selected by the demultiplexer 839 according to the control line 825. During the first programming subcycle 851 , OUT[k] 840 is set to VP[j], which is the programming voltage for the "jth" column of the pixel array. The demultiplexer 839 conveys the voltage VP[j] to the data line for the jth column, DL[j] 840a. During the second programming subcycle 852, OUT[k] 840 is adjusted to VP[j+l] by the source driver 4, and the demultiplexer 839 conveys the voltage VP[j+l] to DL[j+l] 840b. Similarly, during the third programming subcycle 853, OUT[k] 840 is adjusted to VP[j+2] by the source driver 4, and the demultiplexer 839 conveys the voltage VP[j+2] to DL[j+2] 840c.
[00213] However, problems in programming the display can occur, in part due to the relatively large parasitic capacitances 841a-c of the data lines 840a-c. In particular, the parasitic capacitances 841a-c of the data lines 840a-c are each substantially larger than the storage capacitances (e.g., the storage capacitor 816) of the respective pixel circuits 810a-c. As a result of the parasitic capacitance 841a-c of the data lines 840a-c, the programming voltages of the previously programmed rows are retained on the parasitic capacitances of the data lines until the rows are programmed again. When the row is selected (e.g., at the start of the first programming subcycle 851), DL[j+l] 840b and DL[j+2] 840c are each charged with the programming voltage for the previously programmed row, which is being maintained on their respective parasitic capacitances 841b, 841c. The parasitic capacitances 841b, 841c act like a voltage source to the respective selected pixel circuits 810b and 810c, which become programmed with the programming voltages for the previously programmed rows. Once the proper programming voltage VP[j+l] for the pixel[i,j+l] 810b is applied to DL[j+l] 840b during the second programming subcycle 852, the pixel[i,j+l] 810b may not be updated with the new programming voltage, (i.e., the pixel[i,j+l] 810b may be unable to change its state). Problems may arise when the pixel circuit is "programmed" by the previous row's value retained in the parasitic capacitance of the data line. For example, once the pixel[i,j+l] 810b has been programmed with the previous row's programming voltage (during the first programming subcycle 856), subsequently applying the current row's programming voltage (e.g., during the second programming subcycle 852) will not influence the state of the pixel circuit 810b due to the relatively large line capacitance of the.
[00214] Similarly, the pixel[i,j+2] 810c may not be updated with the programming voltage for the current row during the third programming subcycle 853 because the pixel[i j+2] may be set, during the first programming subcycle 851, by the programming voltage for the previous row stored on the parasitic capacitance 841c of DL[j+2] 840c. Once programming is complete, the emission cycle 854 ("driving cycle") follows during which the emission control line 836 is set low. Setting the emission control line low turns on the emission transistor 818 to allow current to flow to the light emitting device 814 through the drive transistor 812 according to programming information stored on the storage capacitor 816. As shown in FIG. 18A, the emission control line 836 can initiate the emission cycle 854 for more than one pixel circuit (e.g., the pixel circuits 810a-c) and can initiate the emission cycle 854 for all the pixels in the pixel array of the display system 800 simultaneously. In display systems where pixel circuits are not properly programmed with the programming information for the correct rows, the resulting image displayed during the emission cycle 854 suffers from distortions.
[00215] However, the above-described problems with improperly programming pixel circuits can be addressed by adjusting the programming scheme as shown in the timing diagram in FIG. 18C. FIG. 18C is a timing diagram illustrating the operation of the source driver 4, the demultiplexer 839, and the address driver 8 to pre-charge the parasitic capacitances 841a-c of each data line 840a-c prior to selecting the pixels 810a-c for programming. As shown in FIG. 18C, a first precharging cycle 861 is carried out to charge a programming voltage VP[j] on the parasitic capacitance 841a of DL[j] 840a while the select line 834 remains high. A second precharging cycle 862 is carried out to charge a programming voltage VP[j+l] on the parasitic capacitance 841b of DL[j+l] 840b, and a third precharging cycle 863 is carried out to charge a programming voltage VP[j+2] on the parasitic capacitance 841c of DL[j+2] 740c.
[00216] Following the precharging cycles 861 , 862, 863, a programming select cycle 864 is carried out. During the programming select cycle 864, the select line 834 ("SEL[i]") is set low to select the pixels 810a-c, which are then programmed by the programming voltages stored on the respective parasitic capacitances 841a-c of the respective data lines 840a-c. Because the parasitic capacitances 841a-c are much greater than the capacitances of the storage capacitors in the pixel circuits 810a-c, the parasitic capacitances 841a-c act as voltage sources to force the pixel circuits 810a-c to update to the programming voltages for the current row. An emission cycle 866 follows the programming select cycle 864. The duration of the programming select cycle 864 can be equal to the duration of one of the individual precharging cycles (e.g., the first precharging cycle 861) or can be equal to the cumulative duration of all the precharging cycles 861 , 862, 863. Generally, the duration of the programming select cycle 864 is chosen to provide adequate time for the pixel circuits 810a-c to be updated with the programming voltage stored on the respective parasitic capacitances 841a-c.
[00217] It is specifically noted that other options are available to address updating the programming voltage for the current row. For example, the number of address lines ("select lines") can be increased by a factor of the number of outputs of the demultiplexer 839, and pixels in the same row can be separately selected sequentially to align each selection according to the order of the demultiplexer 839 in providing programming voltages to the respective data lines 840a-c. Implementing the solution of additional select lines in the display system 800 can be accomplished, for example, by providing select lines SEL[i, l], SEL[i,2], and SEL[i,3], which are selected during the first, second, and third programming subcycles of the "ith" row, respectively. However, increasing the number of select lines in such a manner undesirably decreases pixel pitch ("pixel density").
[00218] The programming select cycle 864 is illustrated as following the parasitic capacitance precharging cycles 861 , 862, 863 in FIG. 18C, however, the programming select cycle 864 can coincide with, or at least partially overlap with, the final one of the precharging cycles (e.g., the third precharging cycle 863). For example, the programming select cycle 864 can occur at the same time and have the same duration as the third precharging cycle 863. Alternatively, the programming select cycle 864 can commence during the third precharging cycle 863 and have a duration that extends beyond the end of the third precharging cycle 863.
[00219] Aspects of the present disclosure also provide systems and methods for driving a display with enhanced programming settling time to increase the refresh rate of the display and thereby decrease, or even eliminate, the perception of flickering from the display. This disclosure describes multiple techniques of achieving flicker free operation using the example pixels and panel architecture already described above.
[00220] Flicker free panel driving schemes are illustrated graphically, but are not limited to particular pixel circuits or display architectures. The origins of image flicker and solutions to eliminate the perception of image flicker will be discussed, below
[00221] As described above, some pixel circuits may incorporate VDD toggling during programming to prevent emission from an OLED in the pixel circuit during the programming cycle and other non-emission cycles. This method is effective in ensuring a good contrast ratio, however it may introduce a source of possible image flicker in operation. In addition, the flicker free panel operation schemes and architectures specifically disclosed herein can be generalized to other panel operating schemes where the emission cycle does not persist for an entire frame- time.
[00222] FIG. 19A pictorially illustrates a programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle. The regular programming scheme is pictorially illustrated in FIG. 19A. Here, half of the frame time 900 ("Tp") is used to program the panel sequentially. For example, in an implementation where the frame time is 16 ms, the display panel is programmed in 8 ms. During the panel programming time 902, the supply voltage line (e.g., the voltage line 26i) is set to a low voltage to prevent the pixels from emitting light. The voltage supply and is only toggled high to VDD during the emission time 904. A perception of image flicker originates from the frequency of the emission time 904 between frames which are separated by the programming time 902.
[00223] As shown in FIG. 19A, the frame time 900 (e.g., 16 ms) includes a programming time 902 having a duration of, for example, 8 ms, during which the display is dark while the pixels receive programming and/or compensation operations. The frequency of the emission period 904 can be at 60 Hz, but the effective frequency can be slightly under 60 Hz due to lag in toggling the supply voltages. Hence it is possible for the displayed image to exhibit a moderate level of flicker especially at an angle of peripheral version for the viewer. Nevertheless, it is possible to alter the programming and emission sequence to increase the frequency of the emission period 804 without changing the total duty cycle. Several methods of achieving no- flicker programming are described below in connection with FIGS. 19B to 23B.
[00224] FIG. 19B pictorially illustrates an example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle, which is adapted to decrease flickering associated with the display. To alleviate the image flicker issue, a series of driving mechanism as illustrated in FIG. 19B can be employed. The basis of this driving mechanism is to divide the emission phase into sub-periods 914 and insert an idle period 916 in between. This shortens the time between the individual emission periods 914, thereby increasing the display frequency of the emission period 914 higher than in the example of FIG. 19 A. As illustrated in FIG. 19B, the total emission time is divided into two sections 914 (sub-periods) separated by an idle period. In an implementation where the refresh frequency of the display is 60 Hz, the duration of the programming period 912, the idle period 916, and the two emission sub-periods 914 can each be 4 ms, such that the total frame time 800 is 16 ms.
[00225] During the idle period 916, the panel's supply voltages are changed into those of the programming phase to turn off the display by preventing the light emitting devices in the respective pixels from emitting light, but the pixels are also not being programmed. The idle period 916 can be implemented by stopping the gate driver 8 from addressing any of the rows. The pixel data values programmed in the pixels during the programming period 912 are thus maintained in the storage elements of each pixel and the pixels remain ready to display light according to the same programming information during the next emission period 914 following the idle period 916. During the idle period 916 the pixels in the display are maintained without emission. The total emission duty cycle can be maintained at 50% (or at some other level by adjusting the durations of the respective periods 912, 914, 916) and can thus be similar to the operating scheme, but the frequency is increased to 120Hz. This aids in removing perceived image flicker from the human eye.
[00226] This method of operation can be extended to lower frame-rate operation, as illustrated in FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B, which illustrate implementations where the emission period 914 and idle period 916 are alternated following the initial programming period 912. FIG. 20A pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle similar to FIG. 19B, but with a frame time 920 twice as long as the frame time 900 illustrated by FIG. 16B. FIG. 18B pictorially illustrates yet another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame with a 50% duty cycle similar to FIG. 19B, but with a frame time 930 three times as long as the frame time 900 illustrated by FIG. 19B.
[00227] For example, the scheme illustrated in FIG. 20A can correspond to a display operating at a refresh frequency of 30 Hz. In such an implementation, the frame time 920 has a duration of 32 ms, and each of the periods 912, 914, 916 have durations of approximately 4 ms. In the example operating scheme shown in FIG. 20A, the programming period 912 is followed by the emission period 914, which is then alternated with three idle periods 916 before the next programming period (not shown). Each of the periods 912, 914, 916 can be considered sub- periods of the frame time 920. As shown by FIG. 20A, the first four sub-periods of the operation scheme shown in FIG. 20A are identical to the scheme illustrated by FIG. 19B. However, following the first four sub-periods, instead of programming a next frame (according to the scheme shown in FIG. 19B) the scheme of FIG. 20A alternates the idle period 816 and the emission period 914 twice more each before programming a next frame.
[00228] Similarly, the scheme illustrated in FIG. 20B can correspond to a display operating at refresh frequency of 20 Hz. In such an implementation, the frame time 930 has a duration of 48 ms. The first four sub-periods of the operation scheme of FIG. 20B are unchanged relative to the scheme illustrated in FIG. 20A. In addition, four more sub-periods consisting of alternating idle periods 916 and emission periods 914 are appended to the end of the operating scheme of FIG. 20A. The operating schemes in these extended modes (shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B) are similar to the version shown in FIG. 19B, by simply replacing the subsequent programming periods 912 by additional idle periods 916. The display refresh rate is determined by the frequency of the programming period 912, because the display is not reprogrammed in any of the idle periods 916. However, even at the relatively low display refresh frequencies enabled by the schemes of FIGS. 20A and 20B, the display can still be free of perceived flickering effects, because the frequency of the emission period 914 is increased by a factor of four (FIG. 20A) or six (FIG. 20B).
[00229] This method of driving is effective in removing flicker because the frequency of the emission phase 914 is increased beyond display refresh frequency. However, the idle phase 916 consumes a portion of the frame time 900, 920, 930, thereby reducing the time available for programming the display. For example, the programming time 902 in the operating scheme of FIG. 19A is twice as long as the programming time 912 in FIG. 19B. For a frame time 900 of 16 ms, the panel is programmed in 4 ms. In addition, the idle period 916 can lead to programming voltage signal loss due to TFT leakages. Any signal stored in the pixels might experience a loss during the idle period 916, resulting in subsequent emission periods 914 providing slightly different luminance values than the initial emission period 914 immediately following the programming period 912. This issue is more pronounced in lower display refresh frequency implementations such as in FIGS. 20A and 20B.
[00230] FIG. 21 A pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame while separately programming portions of the display during distinct programming periods 922, 926. The aforementioned programming schemes described in connection with FIGS. 19B, 20A, and 20B required all the rows in the display to be programmed during the single programming period 912, which can be implemented as a period of only 4 ms. However, the idle period 916 can be better utilized by programming only a portion of the panel in a first programming periods 922, and then programming the rest of the panel during a second programming period 926. Thus, both programming and emission are temporally divided in half as pictorially shown in FIG. 21 A. The flicker suppression algorithm is the same as the previous method, by increasing the frequency of the emission periods 924, 928. The performance is similar to the method described in connection with FIG. 19B, while alleviating the limitation on the duration of the programming duration, because only half of the display is programmed during each programming period 922, 926.
[00231] The lower frame-rate operation (e.g., such as for 30 Hz and 20 Hz display refresh frequencies) is still possible in this method by inserting idle periods in subsequent frames after the whole panel is programmed. This mode also offers advantages due to its relative ease of implementation in either integrated or externally connected gate drivers. Panel programming is only required to be paused during the emission period 924 and then resumed for the second half of the panel during the second programming period 926.
[00232] However, depending on how the two separately programmed portions of the display are chosen the leakage of programming information between subsequent emission periods (e.g., 924 and 928) can lead to image abnormalities. For example, in an implementation where the first programming period 922 programs the top half of a display panel, and the second programming period 926 programs the bottom half of the display panel, the two emission periods 924, 928 will be more/less bright on the top/bottom depending on which was most recently programmed. In other words, the portion of the panel that is already programmed experiences a longer duration of leakage time compared to the second half during the emission period 928. This may result in a perceptible brightness difference between the two halves that contributes to an image artifact.
[00233] FIG. 2 IB pictorially illustrates another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame while separately programming interlaced portions of the display during distinct program phases 932, 936. Here, the first programming period 932 is used to program all the odd rows of the display panel, while the second programming period 936 is used for even rows. The sequence of odd and even programming phases is interchangeable, and the data programmed to adjacent rows are not over-written in adjacent programming phases. This implies that the panel will display all odd rows' data in the first emission period 934, while the even rows are still holding data from previous frame. The even rows' data are refreshed in the second programming period 936, and the whole frame's image is displayed in the second emission period 938. This retention of image programming information between the emission periods 934, 938 is a difference with conventional interlacing programming on CRT displays where adjacent rows are programmed black during sub-frame programming of odd or even rows.
[00234] This operating scheme can greatly reduce image flicker, due to the aliasing method. This operating scheme can be extended to lower frame-rate operation by replacing the subsequent frame's programming phase by idle frames, similar to the schemes shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B. In addition, this operation scheme improves upon the previous methods in maintaining a seamless transition between adjacent sub-frames.
[00235] FIG. 21C provides two options in implementing the interlacing mode with slower frame-rate (i.e., longer frame time). In the example shown in FIG. 21C, the frame time 920 can be twice as long as the frame time 900 of FIG. 21B.
[00236] FIG. 21C pictorially illustrates example programming and emission sequences for displaying a single frame during a frame time that is divided into eight sub-periods. In the first scheme (labeled as scheme a), the sequence illustrated in FIG. 21B is followed by additional alternating emission periods 940 and idle periods 938. The second scheme (scheme b) illustrates adding an idle period 940 after the first emission period 934, then programming the even rows during the second programming period 936 following a second emission period 934. In either scheme a or b, during the first emission periods 934, only the odd rows emit light according to programming data for a currently displayed frame. During the second emission periods 940, all the rows in the display emit light according to the programming data for the currently displayed frame. In scheme a, in an implementation where the frame time 920 is 32 ms, the first 16 ms is divided into four parts. The odd rows are first programmed (first programming period 932), followed by an emission period 934 ("EMI"), and then the even rows are programmed (second programming period 936) similarly. The first 16ms of this scheme is identical to the driving mode in FIG. 21B. The first emission period 934 displays only the odd rows, while the second emission period 938 ("EM2") will fill in the even rows without rewriting the data stored in the odd rows. Afterwards, the second half of the frame time 920 frame is inserted to lengthen the frame-rate down to 30Hz. Here, the second half of the frame time 920 is also divided into four equal parts, but the programming sub-frames are replaced by idle frames 940 where the rows are not being programmed. The result of this operation results in the two emission sub-frames 838 ("EM3" and "EM4") to display the same image as EM2 938.
[00237] In scheme b, an idle frame 940 is inserted between the programming sub-frames for odd and even rows 934, 936. This results in the emission periods EMI 934 and EM2 934 sections only displaying the odd rows, while emission periods EM3 938 and EM4 938 will display the full image according to the currently programmed frame. Both schemes contain the same duty cycle period, with the difference in the arrangements of the programming and emission frames.
[00238] As comparison, scheme a exhibits better odd and even rows matching, because the two sub-frames 932, 934 are programmed right after each other. However, the entire image is retained for the rest of the idle frames 940, which can be prone to signal leakage in the pixels. The reduction in signal stored in the pixel will lead to shift in image brightness, which can cause flickering if the frame-rate is low. On the contrary, scheme b allows even rows to be programmed in the programming period 936 and only emits the full image during EM3 938 and EM4 938. The aforementioned overall signal loss is decreased, at an expense of possible brightness difference between adjacent rows. Thus, scheme b will result in less image flickering, but may suffer from "stripes" in flat view images. The two schemes can be naturally extended by virtue of appending idle and emission frames to accommodate still lower display refresh frequencies.
[00239] FIG. 2 ID pictorially illustrates still another example programming and emission sequence for displaying a single frame where portions of the display are sorted into four interlaced groupings according to row numbers and each portion is separately programmed. This scheme advantageously further decreases the demands on the programming time by spreading programming across four different sub-groups of the display. The different subgroups can be, for example, groups of interlaced rows of the display. Instead of limiting row interlacing to two adjacent rows, four or higher number of row interlacing can be utilized. FIG. 2 ID illustrates the sequence of performing four row interlacing.
[00240] The frame time 920 includes eight sub-periods, including four emission periods 944, 948, 952, 956, and four programming periods 942, 946, 950, 954. Programming period 942 writes data to every other four rows, such as the rows numbered 1, 5, 9, 13, etc. Following the first programming period 942, the first emission period 944 displays light according to the recently programmed pixels in rows 1, 5, 9, etc., while other pixels are driven according to the programming information they retained from their most recent programming event (which occurred during a previous frame time). Next, the second programming period 946 programs pixels in rows 2, 6, 10, etc., and the pixels are driven with their most recently programmed values during the second emission period 948. Next, the third programming period 950 programs pixels in rows 3, 7, 11, etc., and the pixels are driven with their most recently programmed values during the third emission period 952. The fourth programmed period 854 programs pixels in rows 4, 8, 12, etc., and the pixels are driven with their most recently programmed values during the fourth emission period 956. In the example described in connection with FIG. 21D, the fourth emission period 956 is the only one of the emission sub- periods 944, 948, 952, 956, where the display is driven according to programming data for the same frame all at once. The other emission periods 944, 948, 952 each include at least some pixels driven according to programming data from a previous frame.
[00241] The operating scheme shown in FIG. 21D benefits from the partial turning ON of the panel during sub-frame programming, which can reduce power consumption. However, this mode is most suitable for static image or slow moving image scenes. This is because the higher level of interlacing will result in image ghosting due to the programming sequence especially in low frame-rate operation.
[00242] FIG. 22A is a block diagram of a circuit layout for connecting alternating rows of a display panel to distinct data lines 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008. Such a configuration is usefully employed where alternating rows of a display array are programmed in distinct programming cycles. For convenience, one subset of data can be referred to as "right," while the other is referred to as "left." In the configuration shown in FIG. 22A, the pixel circuit in the first row and first column is identified as Rl(l) 1011. The pixel circuit in the second row and first column is identified as R2(l) 1021. The pixel circuits in the third, fourth, and fifth rows in the first column are identified as R3(l) 1031, R4(l) 1041, and R5(l) 1051. Similarly, the pixel circuits in the first five rows of the second column are identified as Rl(2) 1012, R2(2) 1022, R3(2) 1032, R4(2) 1042, and R5(2) 1052. The display array is arranged with each column having two parallel data lines, one for the "right" data (e.g., the data lines Vdata R(l) 1002 and Vdata_R(2) 906), and one for the "left" data (e.g., the data lines Vdata L(l) 1004 and Vdata_R(2) 1008). The pixels in the odd rows are connected to the "right" data on the data lines Vdata R(l) 1002, Vdata_R(2) 1006, etc. for each column across the array. The pixels in the even rows are connected to the "left" data on the data lines Vdata L(l) 1004, Vdata_L(2) 1008, etc. for each column across the array. For example, the pixels Rl(l) 1011 and Rl(2) 1012 in the first row are connected to "right" data lines Vdata R(l) 1002 and Vdata_R(2) 1006, respectively. The pixels R2(l) 1021 and R2(2) 1022 in the second row are connected to "left" data lines Vdata L(l) 1004 and Vdata_L(2) 1008, respectively. Such a display array configuration can be employed in connection with the driving scheme illustrated and described in connection with the two driving schemes shown in FIG. 21C, and which will be described below in FIG. 23B.
[00243] FIG. 22B is a block diagram of a circuit layout for connecting interlaced pixels of a display panel to distinct data lines 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008. The two columns of pixels shown in FIG. 22B are similar to the pixels in FIG. 22A, except that the second column of pixels is now connected to the opposite data line, relative to the pixels in FIG. 22A. Thus, in the arrangement of FIG. 22B, pixels in odd rows and odd columns, and pixels in even rows and even columns are connected to "right" data. Pixels in odd rows and even columns, and pixels in even rows and odd columns are connected to "left" data. For example, the pixels Rl(l) 1011 and R2(2) 1022 in the first row, first column, and second row, second column, respectively, are connected to "right" data lines Vdata R(l) 1002 and Vdata_R(2) 1006, respectively. The pixels R2(l) 1021 and Rl(2) 1012 in the second row, first column, and first row, second column, respectively, are connected to "left" data lines Vdata L(l) 1004 and Vdata_L(2) 1008, respectively. The "right" and "left" data lines are arranged to be connected to interlaced pixels in a checkerboard configuration across the display array.
[00244] The arrangement of the "left" and "right" data lines correspond to regions which are simultaneously programmed by the display array by the "right" and "left" data sets, which can be arbitrarily arranged to divide the display into one or more regions that are programmed by the respective sets of data lines during distinct programming intervals. Of course, a display array can also be divided into "left" and "right" portions providing separate data lines for the distinct portions, such that the distinct portions still share common data lines, but are addressed to receive programming during distinct intervals. An exemplary timing diagram corresponding to a display panel with distinct portions that share data lines is provided in FIG. 23A. An exemplary timing diagram corresponding to a display panel with distinct data lines for distinct portions is provided in FIG. 23B.
[00245] FIGS. 23 A and 23B are timing diagrams for displays which are divided into "left" and "right" data lines. The timing diagrams in FIGS. 23A and 23B correspond to a pixel circuit such as the ones described in FIGS. 4 through 8, where the data line is set at a reference value, during the driving interval to reference the storage capacitor to the reference voltage and thereby prevent the storage capacitor from floating during the driving interval. Because the pixel circuits in FIGS. 4 through 8 are not isolated from the data line during the driving interval, variations on the data line influence the driving transistor, and as a result pixels cannot be simultaneously driven to emit light, in a first row of the display, while pixels in a second row of the display sharing the same data line are programmed, since the programming on the second row will influence the driving on the first row via the same data line.
[00246] Several of the flicker-free operating schemes described above are described with roughly 50% duty cycles, however it is specifically noted that other duty cycles can be achieved according to the present disclosure. The timing diagram in FIG. 23A demonstrates a 60% duty cycle because the duration of programming (e.g., the programming periods 1060, 1072), are roughly two-thirds the length of the driving intervals (e.g., the driving periods 1062, 1070). Thus, each pixel in the display driven according the timing diagram of FIG. 23A is driven to emit light roughly 60% of the time. It is specifically noted that aspects of the present disclosure apply to other duty cycles as well, and the duty cycle is generally determined by the refresh rate of the video content and the duration required for programming the display, which is influenced by the timing resolution of the drivers, switching speed of the transistors, charging times for the storage capacitors within each pixel, etc.
[00247] As shown in FIG. 23A, during the first interval, the "right" pixels are programmed in sequence (1060) via the "right" data lines while the "left pixels" are maintained black (1068). Keeping the "left" pixels black can be carried out by adjusting one or more of the the supply voltages to voltages sufficient to keep the light emitting devices turned off. While the "left" pixels are kept black (1068), the programming voltages stored in the pixels is retained within the storage capacitors, which float until the data line is returned to an appropriate reference voltage during the driving periods 1062, 1070. Thus, during the driving 1062, 1070, the "right" pixels are driven according to the programming provided in the interval 1060 while the "left" pixels are driven according to programming provided during a previous interval (not shown) prior to the black interval 1068.
[00248] After the driving 1062, 1070, the "right pixels" are maintained black (1064) while the "left" pixels are programmed in sequence (1072) via the "left" data lines. The programming interval 1072 and the black interval 1072 is followed by driving intervals 1066, 1072 where the "left" pixels are driven according to the programming provided during the programming interval 1072 and the "right" pixels are driven according to the programming provided during the programming interval 1060. Data for a single frame is provided to the display across the two programming intervals 1060, 1072. A frame time for displaying a single frame includes programming the "right" pixels while the "left" pixels are maintained black (1060, 1072), driving the pixels at the values they are programmed with (1062, 1070), programming the "left" pixels while the "right" pixels are maintained black (1062, 1064), and driving the pixels again (1066, 1074).
[00249] FIG. 23B provides a driving scheme for a display panel with distinct portions (e.g., the "right" and "left" portions described herein) programmed during distinct intervals, where the distinct portions also have distinct data lines (e.g., Vdata R, Vdata L described in connection with FIGS 22A and 22B). In the driving scheme of FIG. 23B, the "right" pixels are programmed (1060) via the "right" data lines which are generally connected only to the "right" pixels (e.g., Vdata R in FIGS. 22A-22B). During the programming of the "right" pixels (1060), the "left" pixels continue to be driven according to programming provided in a previous interval (not shown). Because the "right" and "left" pixels do not share data lines, the programming of the "right" pixels (1060) does not influence the driving of the "left" pixels. For example, the data lines for the "left" pixels can be fixed at a reference voltage during the programming interval 1060 such that the storage capacitors within the "left" pixels remain referenced to the reference voltage and the driving of the "left" pixels is not influenced. Following the programming interval 1060, the "right" pixels are driven (1080) according to the programming provided during the programming interval 1060. During a time while the "right" pixels continue to be driven, the "left" pixels are programmed via the "left" data lines which are generally connected only to the "left" pixels (e.g., Vdata L in FIGS. 22A-22B).
[00250] For a display system with similar programming durations and display refresh rates to the display described in connection with FIG. 23 A, the programming intervals 1060, 1072 are substantially the same length in both driving schemes. However, in the driving scheme of FIG. 23B, the pixels are not set to black to avoid cross-talk interference between pixels in distinct portions of the display sharing common data lines. As a result, the duty cycle of pixels in the display system driven according to FIG. 23B is generally greater than in a system driven according to FIG. 23A. In comparison to FIG. 23A, the duty cycle for the driving scheme in FIG. 23B is roughly 80%, because pixels are turned off only during the programming intervals 1060, 1072 for their respective "left" or "right" portions, and the programming intervals last roughly 20% of the frame time. Each programming interval 1060, 1072 is followed by a driving interval 1080, 1082 for the respective portion that lasts roughly 80% of the frame time.
[00251] A current driving technique using a differentiator/convertor to convert a time- variant voltage to a current is described. In the description, a capacitor is used to convert a ramp voltage to a current (e.g., a DC current). Referring to FIG. 24, there is illustrated a current source developed based on a capacitance. The current source 1 1 10 of FIG. 24 is a bidirectional current source that can provide positive and negative currents. The current source 1 1 10 includes a voltage generator 1 1 12 for generating a time-variant voltage and a driving capacitor 1 1 14. The voltage generator 1 1 12 is coupled to one end terminal 1 1 16 of the driving capacitor 1 1 14. A node "lout" is coupled to the other end terminal 1 1 18 of the driving capacitor 1 1 14. In this example, a ramp voltage is generated by the voltage generator 1 1 12. In the embodiments, the terms "capacitive current source", "capacitive current source driver", "capacitive driver" and "current source" may be used interchangeably. In the embodiments, the terms "voltage generator" and "ramp voltage generator" may be used interchangeably. In FIG. 24, the current source 1 1 10 includes the ramp voltage generator 11 12, however, the current source 1 1 10 may be formed by the driving capacitor 11 14 that receives the ramp voltage.
[00252] It is assumed that the node "lout" is a virtual ground. A ramp voltage is applied to the terminal 1 1 16 of the driving capacitor 11 14, resulting in a fixed current passing the driving capacitor 1 1 14 and going to lout. i(t)=C dVR(t)/dt (C: Capacitance, VR(t): ramp voltage). Amplitude and sign of the ramp's slope are controllable (changeable), which can change the value and direction of the output current. Also, the amount of the driving capacitor 14 can change the current value. As a result, a digitized capacitance based on the capacitive current source 1 1 10 can be used to develop a simple and effective current mode analog-to-digital convertor (ADC) resulting in small and low power driver. Also it provides a simple source driver that can be easily integrated on the panel, independent of fabrication technology, resulting in improving the yield and simplicity of the display and reducing the system cost significantly.
[00253] In one example, the capacitive current source 11 10 can be used to provide a programming current to a current programmed pixel (e.g., OLED pixels). In another example, the capacitive current source 1 1 10 can be used to provide a bias current for accelerating the programming of a pixel, such as in the pixels 210, 310, 410, 610 disclosed herein. In a further example, the capacitive current source 1 1 10 can be used to drive a pixel. The capacitive driving technique with the capacitive current source 1 1 10 improves the settling time of the programming/driving, which is suitable for larger and higher resolution displays, and thus a low- power high resolution emissive display can be realized with the capacitive current source 1 1 10, as described below. The capacitive driving technique with the capacitive current source 10 compensates for TFT aging (e.g., threshold voltage variations), and thus can improve the uniformity and lifetime of the display, as described below.
[00254] In a further example, the capacitive current source 1 1 10 may be used with a current mode analog-to-digital convertor (ADC), for example, to provide a reference current to the current mode ADC where input current is converted to digital signals. In a further example, the capacitive driving may be used for a digital to analog convertor (DAC) where current is generated based on the ramp voltage and the capacitor.
[00255] Referring to FIG. 25, there is illustrated an example of an integrated display system with the capacitive driver 1 1 10. The integrated display system 1 120 of FIG. 25 includes a pixel array 1 122 having a plurality of pixels 1 124a-1 124d arranged in columns and rows, a gate driver 1 128 for selecting a pixel, and a source driver 1 127 for providing programming current to the selected pixel.
[00256] The pixels 1 124a-1 124d are current programmed pixel circuits. Each pixel includes, for example, a storage capacitor, a driving transistor, a switch transistor (or a driving and switching transistor), and a light emitting device. In FIG. 25, four pixels are shown; however, it would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that the number of the pixels in the pixel array 1 122 is not limited to four and may vary. The pixel array 1 122 may include a current biased voltage programmed (CBVP) pixel or a voltage biased voltage programmed (VBCP) pixel where the pixel is operated based on current and voltage. The CBVP driving technique and the VBCP driving technique are suitable for the use in AMOLED displays where they enhance the settling time of the pixels.
[00257] Each pixel is coupled to an address line 1130 and a data line 1132. Each address line 1130 is shared among the pixels in a row. Each data line 1132 is, shared among the pixels in a column. The gate driver 1128 drives a gate terminal of the switch transistor in the pixel via the address line 1130. The source driver 1127 includes the capacitive driver 1110 for each column. The capacitive driver 1110 is coupled to the data line 1132 in the corresponding column. The capacitive driver 1110 drives the data line 1132. A controller 1129 is provided to control and schedule programming, calibration, driving and other operations for the display array 22. The controller 1129 controls the operation of the source driver 1127 and the gate driver 28. Each ramp voltage generator 1112 may be calibrated. In the display system 1120, the driving capacitor 1114 is implemented, for example, on the edge of the display.
[00258] At the beginning of providing a ramp voltage, the capacitance (driving capacitor 1114) acts as a voltage source and adjusting the voltage of the data line 1132. After the voltage of the data line 1132 reaches a certain proper voltage, the data line 1132 acts as a virtual ground ("lout" of FIG. 24). Thus, the capacitance will act as a current source for providing a constant current, after this point. This duality results in a fast settling programming.
[00259] In FIG. 25, the driving capacitor 1114 and the storage capacitor of the pixel are separately allocated. However, the driving capacitor 1114 may be shared with the storage capacitor of the pixel as shown in FIG. 26.
[00260] Referring to FIG. 26, there is illustrated another example of an integrated display system with the capacitive driver 1110 of FIG. 24. The integrated display system 1140 of FIG. 26 includes a pixel array 1142 having a plurality of pixels 1144a-l 144d arranged in columns and rows. The pixels 1144a-1144d are current programmed pixel circuits, and may be same as the pixels 1124a-1124d of FIG. 25. In FIG. 26, four pixels are shown; however, it would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that the number of the pixels in the pixel array 1142 is not limited to four and may vary. Each pixel includes, for example, a storage capacitor, a driving transistor, a switch transistor (or a driving and switching transistor), and a light emitting device. For example, the pixel array 1142 may include the pixel of FIG. 29A where the pixel is operated based on programming voltage and current bias. [00261] Each pixel is coupled to the address line 1150 and the data line 1152. Each address line 1150 is shared among the pixels in a row. A gate driver 1148 drives a gate terminal of the switch transistor in the pixel via the address line 1150. Each data line 1152 is shared among the pixels in a column, and is coupled to a capacitor 1146 in each pixel in the column. The capacitor 1146 in each pixel in the column is coupled to the ramp voltage generator 1112 via the data line 1152. A source driver 1147 includes the ramp voltage generator 1112. The ramp voltage generator 1112 is allocated to each column. A controller 1149 is provided to control and schedule programming, calibration, driving and other operations for the display array 1142. The controller 1149 controls the gate driver 1148 and the source driver 1147 having the ramp voltage generator 1112. In the display system 1140, the capacitor 1146 in the pixel acts as a storage capacitor for the pixel and also acts as driving capacitance (capacitor 1114 of FIG. 24).
[00262] Referring to FIG. 27, there is illustrated a further example of an integrated display system with the capacitive driver 1110 of FIG. 24. The integrated display system 1160 of FIG. 27 includes a pixel array 1162 having a plurality of pixels 1164a-1164d arranged in columns and rows. In FIG. 27, four pixels are shown; however, it would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that the number of the pixels in the pixel array 1162 is not limited to four and may vary. The pixels 1164a-1164d are CBVP pixel circuits, each coupling to an address line 1170, a data line 1172, and a current bias line 1174.
[00263] Each address line 1170 is shared among the pixels in a row. A gate driver 1168 drives a gate terminal of a switch transistor in the pixel via the address line 1170. Each data line 1172 is shared among the pixels in a column, and is coupled to a source driver 1167 for providing programming data. The source driver 1167 may further provide bias voltage (e.g., Vdd of FIG. 29). Each bias line 1174 is shared among the pixels in a column. The driving capacitor 1114 is allocated to each column and is coupled to the bias line 1174 and the ramp voltage generator 1112. The ramp voltage generator 1112 is shared by more than one column. A controller 1169 is provided to control and schedule programming, calibration, driving and other operations for the display array 1162. The controller 1169 controls the source driver 1167, the gate driver 1168, and the ramp voltage generator 1112. In the display system 1160, the capacitive current sources are easily put on the peripheral of the panel, resulting in reducing the implementation cost. In FIG. 27, the ramp voltage generator 1112 is illustrated separately from the source driver 1167. However, the source driver 1167 may provide the ramp voltage. [00264] A display system having a CBVP pixel circuit uses voltage to provide for different gray scales (voltage programming), and uses a bias to accelerate the programming and compensate for the time dependent parameters of a pixel, such as a threshold voltage shift and OLED voltage shift. A driver for driving a display array having the CBVP pixel circuit converts pixel luminance data into voltage. According to the CBVP driving scheme, the overdrive voltage is generated and provided to the driving transistor, which is independent from its threshold voltage and the OLED voltage. The shift(s) of the characteristic(s) of a pixel element(s) (e.g. the threshold voltage shift of a driving transistor and the degradation of a light emitting device under prolonged display operation) is compensated for by voltage stored in a storage capacitor and applying it to the gate of the driving transistor. Thus, the pixel circuit can provide a stable current though the light emitting device without any effect of the shifts, which improves the display operating lifetime. Moreover, because of the circuit simplicity, it ensures higher product yield, lower fabrication cost and higher resolution than conventional pixel circuits. Since the settling time of the pixel circuits is much smaller than conventional pixel circuits, it is suitable for large-area display such as high definition TV, but it also does not preclude smaller display areas either. The capacitive driving technique is applicable to the CBVP display to further improve the settling time suitable for larger and higher resolution displays.
[00265] The capacitive driving technique provides a unique opportunity to share the current bias line and voltage data line in CBVP displays. Referring to FIG. 28 there is illustrated a further example of an integrated display system with the capacitive driver 1110 of FIG. 24. The integrated display system 1180 of FIG. 28 includes a pixel array 1182 having a plurality of pixels 1184a-1184d arranged in columns and rows. The pixels 1184a-1184d are CBVP pixel circuits, and may be same as the pixels 1164a-1 164d of FIG. 23. In FIG. 24, four pixels are shown; however, it would be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that the number of the pixels in the pixel array 1182 is not limited to four and may vary. Each pixel is coupled to the address line 1190 and the voltage data/current bias line 1192.
[00266] Each address line 1190 is shared among the pixels in a row. A gate driver 1188 drives a gate terminal of the switch transistor in the pixel via the address line 1190. Each voltage data/current bias line 1192 is shared among the pixels in a column, and is coupled to a capacitor 1186 in each pixel in the column. The capacitor 1186 in each pixel in the column is coupled to the ramp voltage generator 1112 via the voltage data/current bias line 1192. A source driver 1187 has the ramp voltage generator 1112. The ramp voltage generator 1112 is allocated to each column. A controller 1189 is provided to control and schedule programming, calibration, driving and other operations for the display array 1182. The controller 1189 controls the gate driver 1188 and the source driver 1187 having the ramp voltage generator 1112. The data voltage and the biasing current are carried over through the voltage data/current bias line 1192. In the display system 1180, the capacitor 1186 in the pixel acts as a storage capacitor for the pixel and also acts as driving capacitance (capacitor 1114 of FIG. 24).
[00267] Referring to FIG. 29A, there is illustrated an example of a CBVP pixel circuit which is applicable to the pixel of FIG. 28. The pixel circuit CBVPOl of FIG. 29 includes a driving transistor 1202, a switch transistor 1204, a light emitting device 1206, and a capacitor 1208. In FIG. 29A, the transistors 1202 and 1204 are p-type transistors; however, one of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate that a CBVP pixel having n-type transistors is also applicable as the pixel of FIG. 28.
[00268] The gate terminal of the driving transistor 1202 is coupled to the capacitor 1208 at B01. One of the first and second terminals of the driving transistor 1202 is coupled a power supply (Vdd) 1210 and the other is coupled to the light emitting device 1206 at node A01. The light emitting device 1206 is coupled to a power supply (Vss) 1212. The gate terminal of the switch transistor 1204 is coupled to an address line SEL. One of the first and second terminals of the switch transistor 1204 is coupled to the gate of the driving transistor 1202 and the other is coupled to the light emitting device 1206 and the driving transistor 1202 at A01. The capacitor 1208 is coupled between a data line Vdata and the gate terminal of the driving transistor 1202. The capacitor 1208 acts as a storage capacitor and a capacitive current source (1114 of FIG. 24) as a driver element.
[00269] The capacitor 1208 corresponds to the capacitor 1186 of FIG. 28. The address line SEL corresponds to the address line 1190 of FIG. 28. The data line Vdata corresponds to the voltage data/current bias line 1192 of FIG. 28, and is coupled to the ramp voltage generator (1112 of FIG. 24). The source driver 1187 of FIG. 28 operates on the data line Vdata to provide a bias signal and programming data (Vp) to the pixel.
[00270] In FIG. 29A, the ramp voltage is used to carry the bias current while the initial voltage of the ramp (Vp + Vrefl) is used to send the programming voltage to the pixel circuit CBVPOl, as shown in FIG. 29B.
[00271] Referring to FIGS. 29A and 29B, the operation cycles of the pixel circuit CBVPOl includes a programming cycle 1220 and a driving cycle 1226. The power supply Vdd coupled to the driving transistor 1202 is low during the programming cycle 1220. In the initial stage 1222 of the programming cycle 1220, a ramp voltage is provided to the data line Vdata. The voltage of the Vdata goes from (Vp + Vrefl) to Vp where Vp is a programming voltage for programming the pixel and Vrefl is a reference voltage. During the initial stage 1222, the address line SEL is set to a low voltage so that the switch transistor 1204 is on. During the initial stage 1222, the capacitor 1208 acts as a current source. The voltage of node A01 goes to VBTi where VB is a function of Tl's characteristics (Tl : the driving transistor 1202) and the voltage of node B01 goes to VBTi+VrT2 where VrT2 is the voltage drop across T2 (T2: the switch transistor 1204).
[00272] At the next stage 1224 after the initial stage 1222, the voltage of Vdata remains Vp, and the address line SEL goes high to render the switch transistor 1204 off. During the stage 1224, the capacitor 1208 acts as a storage element. During the driving cycle 1226, the data line Vdata goes to Vref2 and stay at Vref2 for the rest of the frame.
[00273] Vrefl defines the level of bias current Ibias and it is determined, for example, based on TFT, OLED, and display characteristics and specifications. Vref2 is a function of Vrefl and pixel characteristics.
[00274] Referring to FIGS. 30A-30B, there are illustrated graphs showing simulation results for the pixel circuit of FIG. 29A using the operation of FIG. 29B. In FIG. 30A, "AVT" represents variation of driving transistor threshold VT, and "μ" represents mobility (cm2Ns). As shown in FIGS. 30A-30B, despite variation in the driving transistor threshold VT and mobility, the pixel current is stable for all gray scales.
[00275] Circuits disclosed herein generally refer to circuit components being connected or coupled to one another. In many instances, the connections referred to are made via direct connections, i.e., with no circuit elements between the connection points other than conductive lines. Although not always explicitly mentioned, such connections can be made by conductive channels defined on substrates of a display panel such as by conductive transparent oxides deposited between the various connection points. Indium tin oxide is one such conductive transparent oxide. In some instances, the components that are coupled and/or connected may be coupled via capacitive coupling between the points of connection, such that the points of connection are connected in series through a capacitive element. While not directly connected, such capacitively coupled connections still allow the points of connection to influence one another via changes in voltage which are reflected at the other point of connection via the capacitive coupling effects and without a DC bias.
[00276] Furthermore, in some instances, the various connections and couplings described herein can be achieved through non-direct connections, with another circuit element between the two points of connection. Generally, the one or more circuit element disposed between the points of connection can be a diode, a resistor, a transistor, a switch, etc. Where connections are non-direct, the voltage and/or current between the two points of connection are sufficiently related, via the connecting circuit elements, to be related such that the two points of connection can influence each another (via voltage changes, current changes, etc.) while still achieving substantially the same functions as described herein. In some examples, voltages and/or current levels may be adjusted to account for additional circuit elements providing non-direct connections, as can be appreciated by individuals skilled in the art of circuit design.
[00277] Any of the circuits disclosed herein can be fabricated according to many different fabrication technologies, including for example, poly-silicon, amorphous silicon, organic semiconductor, metal oxide, and conventional CMOS. Any of the circuits disclosed herein can be modified by their complementary circuit architecture counterpart (e.g., n-type transistors can be converted to p-type transistors and vice versa).
[00278] While particular embodiments and applications of the present disclosure have been illustrated and described, it is to be understood that the present disclosure is not limited to the precise construction and compositions disclosed herein and that various modifications, changes, and variations can be apparent from the foregoing descriptions without departing from the scope of the invention as defined in the appended claims.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A pixel circuit comprising:
a driving transistor for conveying a driving current through a light emitting device during an emission cycle, the driving current being conveyed according to programming information;
a capacitor coupled in series between a gate terminal of the driving transistor and a line conveying compensation signals; and
a switching transistor coupled between the gate terminal of the driving transistor and a terminal of the driving transistor other than the gate terminal,
wherein the capacitor and the driving transistor are coupled via the switching transistor such that while the switching transistor is turned on, a compensation current is conveyed through the driving transistor, the switching transistor, and across the storage capacitor while the gate terminal of the driving transistor adjusts according to the compensation current.
2. The pixel circuit according to claim 1, wherein the line conveying compensation signals is a line providing a changing voltage having a substantially constant time derivative such that the compensation current generated across the capacitor has a substantially constant value.
3. The pixel circuit according to claim 1, further comprising:
a second switching transistor connected in series between the gate terminal of the drive transistor and the capacitor such that the gate terminal of the driving transistor is selectively connected to the capacitor, and
a second capacitor coupled to the gate terminal of the driving transistor for being charged according to the programming information during a programming cycle preceding the emission cycle, such that the driving transistor conveys the driving current according to a charge on the second capacitor.
4. The pixel circuit according to claim 3, wherein the switching transistor is coupled to the gate terminal of the driving transistor through the second switching transistor, the switching transistor being directly connected to the capacitor.
5. The pixel circuit according to claim 4, wherein the pixel circuit is further configured to reset the capacitor by discharging voltage on the capacitor, via the switching transistor, while the second switching transistor is turned off to thereby isolate the gate terminal of the driving transistor from the capacitor during the reset.
6. The pixel circuit according to claim 5, wherein the second switching transistor is coupled to a capacitance associated with the light emitting device during the reset, and the discharge of the capacitor is carried out by discharging the capacitor to the capacitance associated with the light emitting device.
7. The pixel circuit according to claim 3, further comprising a third switching transistor connected in series with the switching transistor and operated according to select line that also operates the switching transistor such that the switching transistor is coupled to the gate terminal of the driving transistor through the third switching transistor, thereby isolating the gate terminal of the driving transistor from the current path through the light emitting device by both the switching transistor and the third switching transistor.
8. The pixel circuit according to claim 3, wherein the line conveying compensation signals is a data line providing a programming voltage according to the programming information during the programming cycle, and wherein the second switching transistor is operated by a second select line and the switching transistor is operated by a first select line such that the switching transistor and the second switching transistor are both turned on while the compensation current is conveyed through the driving transistor and such that the second switching transistor is turned on and the switching transistor is turned off while the programming voltage is applied to the data line to set the voltage of the gate terminal of the driving transistor based on the programming voltage.
9. The pixel circuit according to claim 8, further comprising an emission transistor operated according to an emission select line for selectively coupling the driving transistor to the light emitting device during the emission cycle, the emission transistor being configured to prevent the light emitting device from emitting light during the programming cycle or while the gate terminal of the driving transistor adjusts according to the compensation current.
10. The pixel circuit according to claim 1, wherein the capacitor is a storage capacitor for being charged according to programming information during a programming cycle preceding the emission cycle, such that the driving transistor conveys the driving current according to a charge on the storage capacitor.
11. The pixel circuit according to claim 1 , wherein the calibration current is drained through the capacitor to a current source drawing a reference current, the reference current including the compensation current and a data line discharge current.
12. The pixel circuit according to claim 1, wherein the line conveying compensation signals is a data line configured to provide:
a programming voltage to charge the capacitor according to the programming information, and
a reference current to simultaneously drain the compensation current through the capacitor and discharge the data line.
13. The pixel circuit according to claim 12, wherein the data line is further configured to apply a reference voltage during the emission cycle to thereby reference the capacitor to the reference voltage.
14. The pixel circuit according to claim 1, wherein the line conveying compensation signals is configured to provide a reference current to the capacitor and a terminal of the driving transistor not connected to the switching transistor is connected to a data line configured to provide a programming voltage simultaneously with the reference current such that the programming voltage is conveyed through the drive transistor and the switching transistor to the capacitor simultaneously with the reference current being conveyed through the driving transistor and the switching transistor and across the capacitor.
15. The pixel circuit according to claim 1, further comprising an emission transistor operated according to an emission select line for selectively coupling the driving transistor to the light emitting device during the emission cycle, the emission transistor being configured to prevent the light emitting device from emitting light during a programming cycle.
16. The pixel circuit according to claim 1, wherein a first terminal of the capacitor, a first terminal of the switching transistor, and a gate terminal of the driving transistor are connected at a node, the node being charged, during a pre-charge cycle, while the switching transistor is turned on, with a voltage given by the difference of a supply line voltage and a threshold voltage of the driving transistor.
17. The pixel circuit according to claim 1, wherein the light emitting device is an organic light emitting diode, and wherein the driving transistor is a p-type thin film transistor.
18. A system for driving a display, the system comprising:
a pixel circuit including:
a driving transistor for driving a light emitting device to emit light according to programming information during an emission cycle; a capacitor coupled in series between a gate terminal of the driving transistor and a line conveying compensation signals; and
a switching transistor coupled between the gate terminal of the driving transistor and a terminal of the driving transistor other than the gate terminal; and a data driver for applying a programming voltage to the pixel circuit via a data line during a programming cycle, the data line being coupled to the pixel circuit, the programming voltage being provided according to the programming information; and
a current source or voltage ramp generator for generating a reference current or a voltage with a substantially constant rate of change on the data line or another line coupled to the pixel circuit, to thereby convey a compensation current through the driving transistor and the switching transistor and across the storage capacitor while the gate terminal of the driving transistor adjusts according to the compensation current.
19. The system according to claim 18, wherein a capacitance of the data line combines with the capacitor to form a current divider such that the reference current applied to the data line is divided between the compensation current conveyed through the capacitor and a discharge current for discharging the capacitance of the data line.
20. The system according to claim 18, wherein the pixel circuit further comprises:
a second switching transistor connected in series between a gate terminal of the driving transistor and the capacitor such that the gate terminal of the driving transistor is selectively connected to the capacitor to thereby capacitively couple the gate terminal of the driving transistor with the line conveying compensation signals, and
a second capacitor coupled to the gate terminal of the driving transistor for being charged according to the programming information during a programming cycle preceding the emission cycle, such that the driving transistor conveys the driving current according to a charge on the second capacitor.
21. The system according to claim 20, wherein the switching transistor is coupled to the gate terminal of the driving transistor through the second switching transistor, the switching transistor being directly connected to the capacitor.
22. The system according to claim 21, wherein the pixel circuit is further configured to reset the capacitor by discharging voltage on the capacitor, via the switching transistor, while the second switching transistor is turned off to thereby isolate the gate terminal of the driving transistor from the capacitor during the reset.
23. The system according to claim 22, wherein the second switching transistor is coupled to a capacitance associated with the light emitting device during the reset, and the discharge of the capacitor is carried out by discharging the capacitor to the capacitance associated with the light emitting device.
24. The system according to claim 20, further comprising a third switching transistor connected in series with the switching transistor and operated according to select line that also operates the switching transistor such that the switching transistor is coupled to the gate terminal of the driving transistor through the third switching transistor, thereby isolating the gate terminal of the driving transistor from the current path through the light emitting device by both the switching transistor and the third switching transistor.
25. The system according to claim 18, wherein the line conveying compensation signals is a data line providing a programming voltage according to the programming information during a programming cycle, and wherein the second switching transistor is operated by a second select line and the switching transistor is operated by a first select line such that the switching transistor and the second switching transistor are both turned on while the compensation current is conveyed through the driving transistor and such that the second switching transistor is turned on and the switching transistor is turned off while the programming voltage is applied to the data line to set the voltage of the gate terminal of the driving transistor based on the programming voltage.
26. The system according to claim 18, wherein the data driver includes a cyclic digital to analog converter and the voltage ramp generator includes a ramp value signal source that is selectively connected to the cyclic digital to analog converter to generate a ramp voltage on the data line via the cyclic digital to analog converter.
27. The system according to claim 18, wherein the data driver includes a resistive digital to analog converter and the voltage ramp generator is selectively connected to the data line via one or more switches while the compensation current is conveyed through the driving transistor.
28. The system according to claim 18, further comprising an address driver for controlling a select line coupled to the switching transistor, the switching transistor being operated according to the select line to selectively turn on the switching transistor during the programming cycle.
29. The system according to claim 18, further comprising a reference voltage generator for providing a reference voltage on the data line, during the emission cycle, thereby referencing the storage capacitor to the reference voltage.
30. The system according to claim 18, wherein the pixel circuit further includes an emission control transistor for selectively coupling the driving transistor to the light emitting device during the emission cycle, the emission control transistor being operated according to an emission select line so as to prevent leakage currents from driving the light emitting device during periods other than the emission cycle.
31. A display system comprising a plurality of pixel circuits arranged in rows and columns in a display array, each pixel circuit including:
a driving transistor for driving a light emitting device to emit light according to programming information during an emission cycle;
a storage capacitor coupled to the gate terminal of the driving transistor and arranged to be charged according to the programming information during a programming cycle;
a first switching transistor operated according to first select line and connected between the gate terminal of the driving transistor and a terminal of the driving transistor other than the gate terminal;
a second switching transistor operated according to a second select line and connected to the gate terminal of the driving transistor ; and
wherein the gate terminal of each driving transistor being connected, through the second switching transistor, to a programming capacitor connected in series between the second switching transistor and a data line,
a data driver for applying a programming voltage to the plurality of pixel circuits via respective data lines during a programming cycle, the programming voltage being provided according to the programming information for each pixel circuit; and a current source or voltage ramp generator for generating a reference current or a voltage with a substantially constant rate of change on the data line or another line coupled to at least one of the plurality of pixel circuits, to thereby convey a compensation current through the driving transistor and the switching transistor and across the storage capacitor while the gate terminal of the driving transistor adjusts according to the compensation current.
32. The display system according to claim 31, wherein the display array is segmented into a plurality of segments, each of the plurality of segments comprising a plurality of the plurality of pixel circuits, and wherein, within each of the plurality of segments, the programming capacitor is shared by more than one pixel circuit connected to a common data line.
33. The display system according to claim 32, wherein the first switching transistors within pixel circuits in each segment are operated according to a common segmented control line to simultaneously operate the first switching transistors in the pixel circuits in each of the plurality of segments, respectively.
34. The display system according to claim 33, wherein the segmented control lines for each segment are operated to simultaneously convey the compensation current through the pixel circuits in a segment, via the respective first switching transistors, to allow the respective driving transistors in the segment to adjust according to the compensation current, during a compensation cycle.
35. The display system according to claim 31, wherein each pixel circuit further comprises an emission control transistor operated according to an emission control line to selectively connect the driving transistor to the light emitting device, the emission control line being operated to prevent the light emitting device from emitting light while the compensation current is conveyed through the driving transistor.
36. The display system according to claim 31, wherein each pixel circuit is configured with the first switching transistor coupled to the gate terminal of the driving transistor through the second switching transistor, the first switching transistor being directly connected to the programming capacitor.
37. The display system according to claim 36, wherein each pixel circuit is further configured to reset the programming capacitor by discharging voltage on the programming capacitor, via the first switching transistor, while the second switching transistor is turned off to isolate the gate terminal of the driving transistor from the programming capacitor during the reset.
38. The display system according to claim 37, wherein each pixel circuit is configured with the second switching transistor coupled to a capacitance associated with the light emitting device during the reset, and the discharge of the capacitor is carried out by discharging the programming capacitor to the capacitance associated with the light emitting device.
39. The display system according to claim 31, wherein each pixel circuit further includes a third switching transistor connected in series with the first switching transistor and operated according to the first select line such that the first switching transistor is coupled to the gate terminal of the driving transistor through the third switching transistor, thereby isolating the gate terminal of the driving transistor from the current path through the light emitting device by both the switching transistor and the third switching transistor.
40. The display system according to claim 31, wherein the light emitting device is an organic light emitting diode and the driving transistor is a p-type thin film transistor.
41. A method of driving a display comprising:
a pixel circuit including:
a driving transistor for conveying a driving current through a light emitting device according to programming information;
a capacitor for being charged according to the programming information, the capacitor having a first terminal coupled to a first conductive line and a second terminal coupled to a gate terminal of the driving transistor, and a switching transistor coupled between the gate terminal of the driving transistor and another terminal of the driving transistor, and
wherein the method comprises:
charging the first or second terminal of the capacitor with a programming voltage during a programming cycle while the switching transistor is selected;
applying a reference current to the first conductive line during the programming cycle such that a compensation current is drained across the capacitor and through the switching transistor and the driving transistor.
42. The method according to claim 41, wherein the compensation current adjusts a gate- source voltage of the driving transistor so as to calibrate the pixel circuit to account for a degradation of the pixel circuit.
43. The method according to claim 41, further comprising setting the first conductive line to a reference voltage level during an emission cycle that follows the program cycle such that the storage capacitor is referenced to the reference voltage.
44. The method according to claim 41, further comprising:
pre-charging the first conductive line with a programming voltage, during a pre-charging cycle included in the program cycle; and
providing a voltage with a substantially constant rate of change on the first conductive line, during a compensation cycle included in the program cycle, the voltage on the first conductive line being constantly changed due to application of the reference current simultaneously draining a discharge current to thereby simultaneously discharge a parasitic capacitance of the first conductive line and provide the compensation current across the capacitor.
45. A display system comprising:
a pixel circuit including:
a driving transistor for driving a light emitting device during an emission cycle, and
a capacitor for being charged with a proper voltage to cause the driving transistor to drive the light emitting device according to programming information; a data driver for applying a programming voltage to the pixel circuit via a data line during a programming cycle, the data line being coupled to the pixel circuit, the programming voltage being provided according to the programming information; and
a current source for applying a reference current to a bias line during the programming cycle and thereby draining a compensation current through the driving transistor and across the capacitor while simultaneously discharging the data line.
46. The display system according to claim 45, wherein the pixel circuit further comprises an emission control transistor configured to selectively allow current to flow through the light emitting device and wherein the data line is coupled to a first terminal of the driving transistor, a second terminal of the driving transistor being coupled to the light emitting device via the emission control transistor, the pixel circuit further including a switching transistor providing a current path for the compensation current to flow through the drive transistor and across the capacitor.
47. The display system according to claim 45, wherein the capacitor and the capacitance of the data line are arranged to divide the reference current such that a first portion discharges the capacitance associated with the data line while a second portion calibrates the pixel circuit by providing the compensation current.
48. The display system according to claim 47, wherein the reference current is divided according to the capacitance of the data line and the capacitance of the capacitor.
49. A method of operating a display having a pixel circuit for driving a light emitting device, the method comprising:
pre-charging the pixel circuit, during a pre-charge cycle, by turning on a switching transistor such that a voltage given by a difference between a supply line voltage and a threshold voltage of a driving transistor is charged on a node of the pixel circuit coupled to both a capacitor and the gate terminal of the driving transistor; conveying a compensation current through the driving transistor, the switching transistor, and across the capacitor, during a compensation cycle, to allow the driving transistor to adjust the voltage of the node to allow the compensation current to be conveyed; and
applying a reference voltage to a terminal of the capacitor other than a terminal of the storage capacitor coupled to the node, during an emission cycle during which the pixel circuit is driven to emit light according to programming information.
50. The method according to claim 49, wherein the compensation current adjusts a gate- source voltage of the driving transistor so as to calibrate the pixel circuit to account for a degradation of the pixel circuit.
51. The method according to claim 49, further comprising setting the terminal of the capacitor other than the terminal of the capacitor coupled to the node at a programming voltage during the pre-charge cycle.
52. A method of operating a display, the display having a plurality of pixel circuits for driving light emitting devices, the method comprising:
programming a first plurality of pixel circuits with display information;
driving the first plurality of pixel circuits to emit light according to the programmed display information during a first emission interval;
ceasing to drive the first plurality of pixel circuits during an idle interval; and
prior to reprogramming the first plurality of pixel circuits, and following the ceasing, driving the first plurality of pixel circuits to emit light according to the programmed display information during a second emission interval.
53. The method according to claim 52, wherein the programming the first plurality of pixel circuits includes applying a plurality of programming voltages on a plurality of data lines connected to the first plurality of pixel circuits, and the driving includes setting the plurality of data lines to a reference voltage such that storage capacitors in each of the first plurality of pixel circuits are referenced to the reference voltage during the emission intervals.
54. The method according to claim 52, further comprising programming a second plurality of pixel circuits with second display information during the idle interval.
55. The method according to claim 54, wherein the first plurality of pixel circuits are pixel circuits in even rows of the display, and the second plurality of pixel circuits are pixel circuits in odd rows of the display.
56. The method according to claim 54, further comprising driving the second plurality of pixel circuits to emit light according to the second programmed display information during the second emission interval.
57. The method according to claim 56, further comprising:
ceasing to drive the second plurality of pixel circuits during a second idle interval while the first plurality of pixel circuits are programmed with updated display information; and
driving, during a third display interval, the first plurality of pixel circuits according to the updated display information and the second plurality of pixel circuits according to the second display information.
58. The method according to claim 52, wherein the driving is carried out repeatedly during a plurality of driving intervals, the plurality of driving intervals each having a duration substantially equal to a duration of the idle interval, each of the plurality of driving intervals separated by an idle interval.
59. The method according to claim 52, further comprising repeatedly driving the first plurality of pixel circuits during a plurality of driving intervals, each of the plurality of driving intervals driving the first plurality of pixel circuits to emit light according to the programmed display information, and each of the plurality of driving intervals occurring prior to a subsequent programming interval, the subsequent programming interval programming the first plurality of pixel circuits to emit light according to subsequent display data.
60. The method according to claim 52, wherein a rate of successive driving operations exceeds a frame rate of an incoming video stream.
61. A display system comprising:
a plurality of pixel circuits arranged to form a display panel, each of the plurality of pixel circuit connected to respective ones of a plurality of select lines and data lines and including:
a light emitting device driven according to programming information by current conveyed via a driving transistor,
a storage capacitor connected between a gate terminal of the driving transistor and a data line, and
a switch transistor operated by a select line and connected between the storage capacitor and a terminal of the driving transistor other than the gate terminal such that the storage capacitor is charged according to a voltage on the data line while the switch transistor is turned on;
an address driver for operating the select lines in the display panel so as to control the switch transistors in each of the plurality of pixel circuits for receiving programming information;
a data driver for applying a reference voltage and programming voltages on the data lines in the display panel so as to program the plurality of pixel circuits while selected to receive programming and to reference the storage capacitors in the plurality of pixel circuits to the reference voltage while the pixel circuits are driven to emit light; and
a controller for operating the address driver and the driver to control the programming and emission of the plurality of pixel circuits according to an incoming video stream, the controller configured such that:
a first plurality of pixel circuits are programmed with display information during a first programming interval,
the first plurality of pixel circuits are driven to emit light according to the programmed display information during a first emission interval;
the first plurality of pixel circuits cease emitting light during an idle interval; and prior to being re-programmed, the first plurality of pixel circuits are driven to emit light according to the programmed display information during a second emission interval.
62. The display system according to claim 61, wherein the controller is further configured such that a second plurality of pixel circuits are programmed with second display information during the idle interval for the first plurality of pixel circuits.
63. The display system according to claim 62, wherein the first plurality of pixel circuits are pixel circuits in even rows of the display panel, and the second plurality of pixel circuits are pixel circuits in odd rows of the display panel.
64. The display system according to claim 61, wherein a rate of successive driving operations exceeds a frame rate of the incoming video stream.
65. The display system according to claim 61, wherein the light emitting devices in the plurality of pixel circuits include organic light emitting diodes.
66. A display system comprising a pixel array including a plurality of pixels and a plurality of data lines for conveying voltage programming information to one or more pixels of the plurality of pixels, the display system further comprising:
a source driver for providing the voltage programming information to the data lines via one or more data output terminals;
a demultiplexer for coupling a subset of the plurality of data lines to one of the one or more data output terminals of the source driver, the subset including a plurality of the plurality of data lines; and
a controller configured to operate the source driver to charge a parasitic capacitance of the subset of data lines with respective voltage programming information prior to the subset being selected for programming such that, once selected, the selected pixels programmed via the subset of data lines are programmed according to the voltage programming information charged on the parasitic capacitance of the respective ones of the subset of data lines.
67. The display system according to claim 66, wherein the controller is further configured to operate the source driver such that the initiation of the selection of the subset occurs during the coupling of the final one of the subset of the plurality of data lines by the demultiplexer.
68. The display system according to claim 66, wherein the controller is further configured to operate the source driver such that the initiation of the selection of the subset occurs after the entire duration of the coupling of the final one of the subset of the plurality of data lines by the demultiplexer.
69. The display system according to claim 66, wherein the light emitting devices in the plurality of pixel circuits include organic light emitting diodes.
70. A method of driving a display system comprising a pixel array including a plurality of pixels and a plurality of data lines for conveying voltage programming information to one or more pixels of the plurality of pixels, the display system comprising a source driver for providing the voltage programming information to the data lines via one or more data output terminals, the method comprising:
sequentially coupling, via a demultiplexer, a subset of the plurality of data lines to one of the one or more data output terminals of the source driver to thereby charge respective parasitic capacitances of the subset of the plurality of data lines, the subset including a plurality of the plurality of data lines; and
selecting for programming, via an address driver, pixels coupled to the subset of the plurality of data lines, so as to program the pixels according to the charge stored on the respective parasitic capacitances of the subset of the plurality of data lines.
71. The method according to claim 70, wherein the selecting is initiated during the coupling of the final one of the subset of the plurality of data lines by the demultiplexer.
72. The method according to claim 70, wherein the selecting is initiated after the entire duration of the coupling of the final one of the subset of the plurality of data lines by the demultiplexer.
PCT/IB2012/052651 2011-05-28 2012-05-26 System and method for fast compensation programming of pixels in a display WO2012164474A2 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP15173106.4A EP2945147B1 (en) 2011-05-28 2012-05-26 Method for fast compensation programming of pixels in a display
EP18181961.6A EP3404646B1 (en) 2011-05-28 2012-05-26 Method for fast compensation programming of pixels in a display
JP2014513288A JP2014522506A (en) 2011-05-28 2012-05-26 System and method for fast compensation programming of display pixels
CN201280026192.2A CN103597534B (en) 2011-05-28 2012-05-26 System and method for fast compensation programming of pixels in a display
EP12792894.3A EP2715711A4 (en) 2011-05-28 2012-05-26 System and method for fast compensation programming of pixels in a display

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201161491165P 2011-05-28 2011-05-28
US61/491,165 2011-05-28
US201261600316P 2012-02-17 2012-02-17
US61/600,316 2012-02-17

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2012164474A2 true WO2012164474A2 (en) 2012-12-06
WO2012164474A3 WO2012164474A3 (en) 2013-03-21

Family

ID=47259993

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/IB2012/052651 WO2012164474A2 (en) 2011-05-28 2012-05-26 System and method for fast compensation programming of pixels in a display

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (5) US9881587B2 (en)
EP (3) EP2945147B1 (en)
JP (1) JP2014522506A (en)
CN (2) CN103597534B (en)
WO (1) WO2012164474A2 (en)

Cited By (60)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103280183A (en) * 2013-05-31 2013-09-04 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 AMOLED pixel circuit and driving method
WO2014141148A1 (en) * 2013-03-13 2014-09-18 Ignis Innovation Inc. Integrated compensation datapath
US8994617B2 (en) 2010-03-17 2015-03-31 Ignis Innovation Inc. Lifetime uniformity parameter extraction methods
US9059117B2 (en) 2009-12-01 2015-06-16 Ignis Innovation Inc. High resolution pixel architecture
WO2015116187A1 (en) * 2014-01-31 2015-08-06 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Return path capacitor for connected devices
US9275579B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2016-03-01 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US9280933B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2016-03-08 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
JP2016038425A (en) * 2014-08-06 2016-03-22 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optic device, electronic equipment, and method for driving electro-optic device
JP2016038402A (en) * 2014-08-05 2016-03-22 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optic device, electronic equipment, and method for driving electro-optic device
US9336717B2 (en) 2012-12-11 2016-05-10 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for AMOLED displays
US9343006B2 (en) 2012-02-03 2016-05-17 Ignis Innovation Inc. Driving system for active-matrix displays
US9355584B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2016-05-31 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US9418587B2 (en) 2009-06-16 2016-08-16 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation technique for color shift in displays
US9437137B2 (en) 2013-08-12 2016-09-06 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation accuracy
US9466240B2 (en) 2011-05-26 2016-10-11 Ignis Innovation Inc. Adaptive feedback system for compensating for aging pixel areas with enhanced estimation speed
US9472139B2 (en) 2003-09-23 2016-10-18 Ignis Innovation Inc. Circuit and method for driving an array of light emitting pixels
US9489897B2 (en) 2010-12-02 2016-11-08 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for thermal compensation in AMOLED displays
US9530349B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2016-12-27 Ignis Innovations Inc. Charged-based compensation and parameter extraction in AMOLED displays
US9530352B2 (en) 2006-08-15 2016-12-27 Ignis Innovations Inc. OLED luminance degradation compensation
US9536460B2 (en) 2012-05-23 2017-01-03 Ignis Innovation Inc. Display systems with compensation for line propagation delay
US9536465B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-01-03 Ignis Innovation Inc. Re-interpolation with edge detection for extracting an aging pattern for AMOLED displays
JP2017083799A (en) * 2015-10-30 2017-05-18 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optical device, electronic apparatus, and driving method of electro-optical device
US9721512B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-08-01 Ignis Innovation Inc. AMOLED displays with multiple readout circuits
US9741282B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2017-08-22 Ignis Innovation Inc. OLED display system and method
US9747834B2 (en) 2012-05-11 2017-08-29 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits including feedback capacitors and reset capacitors, and display systems therefore
US9761170B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2017-09-12 Ignis Innovation Inc. Correction for localized phenomena in an image array
US9773439B2 (en) 2011-05-27 2017-09-26 Ignis Innovation Inc. Systems and methods for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US9786223B2 (en) 2012-12-11 2017-10-10 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for AMOLED displays
US9786209B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2017-10-10 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US9842544B2 (en) 2006-04-19 2017-12-12 Ignis Innovation Inc. Stable driving scheme for active matrix displays
US9881532B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2018-01-30 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and method for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US9947293B2 (en) 2015-05-27 2018-04-17 Ignis Innovation Inc. Systems and methods of reduced memory bandwidth compensation
US9970964B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2018-05-15 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for programming, calibrating and driving a light emitting device display
US10012678B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2018-07-03 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for programming, calibrating and/or compensating, and driving an LED display
US10013907B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2018-07-03 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for programming, calibrating and/or compensating, and driving an LED display
US10019941B2 (en) 2005-09-13 2018-07-10 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation technique for luminance degradation in electro-luminance devices
US10032399B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2018-07-24 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10074304B2 (en) 2015-08-07 2018-09-11 Ignis Innovation Inc. Systems and methods of pixel calibration based on improved reference values
US10089921B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2018-10-02 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10089924B2 (en) 2011-11-29 2018-10-02 Ignis Innovation Inc. Structural and low-frequency non-uniformity compensation
JP2018159928A (en) * 2018-05-07 2018-10-11 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus
US10121430B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2018-11-06 Apple Inc. Displays with series-connected switching transistors
US10163401B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2018-12-25 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10176736B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2019-01-08 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10181282B2 (en) 2015-01-23 2019-01-15 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation for color variations in emissive devices
US10192479B2 (en) 2014-04-08 2019-01-29 Ignis Innovation Inc. Display system using system level resources to calculate compensation parameters for a display module in a portable device
USRE47257E1 (en) 2004-06-29 2019-02-26 Ignis Innovation Inc. Voltage-programming scheme for current-driven AMOLED displays
US10304390B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2019-05-28 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US10311780B2 (en) 2015-05-04 2019-06-04 Ignis Innovation Inc. Systems and methods of optical feedback
US10319307B2 (en) 2009-06-16 2019-06-11 Ignis Innovation Inc. Display system with compensation techniques and/or shared level resources
US10325537B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2019-06-18 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US10388221B2 (en) 2005-06-08 2019-08-20 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for driving a light emitting device display
US10439159B2 (en) 2013-12-25 2019-10-08 Ignis Innovation Inc. Electrode contacts
US10573231B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2020-02-25 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10607544B2 (en) 2016-09-23 2020-03-31 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Organic light-emitting display panel, organic light-emitting display device, data driver, and low power driving method
US10699613B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2020-06-30 Ignis Innovation Inc. Resetting cycle for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US10867536B2 (en) 2013-04-22 2020-12-15 Ignis Innovation Inc. Inspection system for OLED display panels
US10996258B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2021-05-04 Ignis Innovation Inc. Defect detection and correction of pixel circuits for AMOLED displays
US11187772B2 (en) 2016-07-19 2021-11-30 Hefei Xinsheng Optoelectronics Method for calibrating current measurement device, current measurement method and device, display device
US11984064B2 (en) 2020-08-12 2024-05-14 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display apparatus, its operating method, and electronic device

Families Citing this family (89)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8824553B2 (en) 2003-05-12 2014-09-02 Google Inc. Video compression method
US9370075B2 (en) 2008-12-09 2016-06-14 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and method for fast compensation programming of pixels in a display
KR101929426B1 (en) * 2011-09-07 2018-12-17 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device and driving method thereof
CN102708824B (en) * 2012-05-31 2014-04-02 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Threshold voltage offset compensation circuit for thin film transistor, gate on array (GOA) circuit and display
US8819525B1 (en) * 2012-06-14 2014-08-26 Google Inc. Error concealment guided robustness
KR20140058283A (en) * 2012-11-06 2014-05-14 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device and method of driving thereof
KR102022519B1 (en) * 2013-05-13 2019-09-19 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Pixel and Organic Light Emitting Display Device Using the same
KR20140140272A (en) * 2013-05-29 2014-12-09 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Pixel and Organic Light Emitting Display Device Using the same
KR102115475B1 (en) * 2013-09-27 2020-05-27 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device and one body type driving device for display device
JP2015187672A (en) * 2014-03-27 2015-10-29 ソニー株式会社 Display device, driving method of display device and electronic apparatus
WO2015162651A1 (en) 2014-04-21 2015-10-29 株式会社Joled Display device and method for driving display device
TWI512716B (en) * 2014-04-23 2015-12-11 Au Optronics Corp Display panel and driving method thereof
KR102133225B1 (en) * 2014-06-02 2020-07-14 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Apparatus and method for monitoring pixel data and display system for adapting the same
KR20150142943A (en) * 2014-06-12 2015-12-23 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Organic light emitting display device
KR20160020650A (en) * 2014-08-13 2016-02-24 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Data driver and driving method thereof
KR102303685B1 (en) * 2014-09-12 2021-09-23 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Method of testing display apparatus and display apparatus tested by the same
US9952642B2 (en) 2014-09-29 2018-04-24 Apple Inc. Content dependent display variable refresh rate
JP6618779B2 (en) * 2014-11-28 2019-12-11 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Semiconductor device
US9552769B2 (en) * 2014-12-17 2017-01-24 Apple Inc. Display with a reduced refresh rate
CN104575395B (en) * 2015-02-03 2017-10-13 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 AMOLED pixel-driving circuits
US10115339B2 (en) * 2015-03-27 2018-10-30 Apple Inc. Organic light-emitting diode display with gate pulse modulation
KR102290613B1 (en) * 2015-06-30 2021-08-19 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Organic Light Emitting Display And Driving Method Thereof
WO2017010286A1 (en) * 2015-07-10 2017-01-19 シャープ株式会社 Pixel circuit, display device, and method for driving same
KR102460992B1 (en) * 2015-08-31 2022-11-01 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Compensation marging controller and organic light emitting display device and method for driving the same
WO2017053477A1 (en) 2015-09-25 2017-03-30 Sxaymiq Technologies Llc Hybrid micro-driver architectures having time multiplexing for driving displays
US10467964B2 (en) * 2015-09-29 2019-11-05 Apple Inc. Device and method for emission driving of a variable refresh rate display
JP6597192B2 (en) * 2015-10-30 2019-10-30 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optical device, electronic apparatus, and driving method of electro-optical device
US10129837B2 (en) * 2015-12-14 2018-11-13 Skyworks Solutions, Inc. Variable capacitor
JP6733361B2 (en) * 2016-06-28 2020-07-29 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Display device and electronic equipment
KR102566655B1 (en) * 2016-07-11 2023-08-14 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device
CN106157890B (en) * 2016-08-15 2018-03-30 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 A kind of lines identification display device and driving method
US10339855B2 (en) 2016-08-30 2019-07-02 Apple, Inc. Device and method for improved LED driving
US10304411B2 (en) 2016-08-31 2019-05-28 Apple Inc. Brightness control architecture
KR102593457B1 (en) * 2016-10-25 2023-10-25 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Display Device and Method for Driving the same
KR102594294B1 (en) 2016-11-25 2023-10-25 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Electro luminescence display apparatus and method for driving the same
KR102636682B1 (en) * 2016-12-21 2024-02-15 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Display device and driving method therof
KR102241717B1 (en) * 2016-12-27 2021-04-16 선전 로욜 테크놀로지스 컴퍼니 리미티드 Pixel circuit driving method, pixel circuit group, and organic light emitting display device
CN106935725A (en) * 2017-02-17 2017-07-07 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 Organic electroluminescence display device and method of manufacturing same
KR102209416B1 (en) * 2017-02-22 2021-01-29 쿤산 고-비젼녹스 옵토-일렉트로닉스 씨오., 엘티디. Pixel driving circuit, driving method thereof, and layout structure of transistor
CN106873340B (en) * 2017-03-17 2019-07-05 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Addressing method, holographic display and its control method of spatial light modulator
US10311808B1 (en) 2017-04-24 2019-06-04 Facebook Technologies, Llc Display latency calibration for liquid crystal display
US10140955B1 (en) 2017-04-28 2018-11-27 Facebook Technologies, Llc Display latency calibration for organic light emitting diode (OLED) display
CN106991975B (en) * 2017-06-08 2019-02-05 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 A kind of pixel circuit and its driving method
CN109032541B (en) * 2017-06-09 2021-11-02 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Refresh rate adjusting method and assembly, display device and storage medium
CN107086025B (en) * 2017-06-30 2019-12-27 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display panel, display device and control method of display panel
CN107093403B (en) * 2017-06-30 2019-03-15 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 The compensation method of pixel-driving circuit for OLED display panel
CN109817164B (en) * 2017-11-20 2020-10-27 上海视涯技术有限公司 AMOLED display panel and image display device
KR20230164225A (en) 2018-02-01 2023-12-01 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Display device and electronic apparatus
US10665157B2 (en) * 2018-04-18 2020-05-26 Apple Inc. Pre-compensation for pre-toggling-induced artifacts in electronic displays
US10854129B2 (en) * 2018-06-18 2020-12-01 Apple Inc. Hybrid architecture for zero border display
JP7389039B2 (en) * 2018-08-20 2023-11-29 ソニーセミコンダクタソリューションズ株式会社 Electro-optical devices, electronic devices and driving methods
US11271181B1 (en) * 2018-09-21 2022-03-08 Apple Inc. Electronic display visual artifact mitigation
KR102651754B1 (en) * 2018-10-12 2024-03-29 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device and driving method of the display device
CN111726912B (en) * 2019-03-21 2022-03-15 联咏科技股份有限公司 Light emitting diode driving apparatus for driving light emitting diode array
US11341878B2 (en) * 2019-03-21 2022-05-24 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display panel and method of testing display panel
JP7345268B2 (en) * 2019-04-18 2023-09-15 Tianma Japan株式会社 Display device and its control method
US10803789B1 (en) * 2019-06-12 2020-10-13 Innolux Corporation Light-emitting device
KR102681594B1 (en) * 2019-06-19 2024-07-04 삼성전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for driving display based on frequency operaion cycle set differntly according to frequency
TWI701647B (en) * 2019-07-10 2020-08-11 大陸商北京歐錸德微電子技術有限公司 Picture display method, display device and information processing device capable of automatically adjusting frame rate
US11847988B2 (en) * 2019-08-02 2023-12-19 Sitronix Technology Corporation Driving method for flicker suppression of display panel and driving circuit thereof
US11250780B2 (en) 2019-08-15 2022-02-15 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Estimation of pixel compensation coefficients by adaptation
US11087656B2 (en) 2019-08-15 2021-08-10 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Fully differential front end for sensing
US11069282B2 (en) 2019-08-15 2021-07-20 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Correlated double sampling pixel sensing front end
KR20210059469A (en) * 2019-11-15 2021-05-25 삼성전자주식회사 Pixel array, and image sensor comprising thereof
KR20220113371A (en) * 2019-12-17 2022-08-12 소니 세미컨덕터 솔루션즈 가부시키가이샤 Display device, method of driving display device, and electronic device
US11081064B1 (en) * 2020-01-13 2021-08-03 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Reference signal generation by reusing the driver circuit
US11257416B2 (en) 2020-02-14 2022-02-22 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Voltage mode pre-emphasis with floating phase
US11074854B1 (en) * 2020-03-09 2021-07-27 Novatek Microelectronics Corp. Driving device and operation method thereof
US11250753B2 (en) * 2020-04-16 2022-02-15 Synaptics Incorporated EMI mitigation by shifted source line pre-charge
CN114207703B (en) * 2020-05-09 2022-08-12 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display panel and display device
CN111477179B (en) * 2020-05-20 2021-10-22 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Pixel driving circuit, driving method thereof and display device
CN111696482B (en) * 2020-06-10 2023-10-03 福建华佳彩有限公司 OLED pixel compensation circuit and driving method
KR20210157642A (en) 2020-06-22 2021-12-29 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Electroluminescence Display Device
KR20220012546A (en) * 2020-07-23 2022-02-04 주식회사 엘엑스세미콘 Display driving apparatus
CN111862890B (en) * 2020-08-28 2022-05-24 武汉天马微电子有限公司 Display panel, driving method thereof and display device
US11719738B2 (en) 2020-10-15 2023-08-08 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Two-domain two-stage sensing front-end circuits and systems
CN112198721A (en) * 2020-10-29 2021-01-08 Tcl华星光电技术有限公司 Backlight module and display device
CN112259049A (en) * 2020-10-30 2021-01-22 合肥京东方卓印科技有限公司 Display control method and device
CN112530369B (en) * 2020-12-25 2022-03-25 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display panel, display device and driving method
CN115050308A (en) * 2021-03-08 2022-09-13 隆达电子股份有限公司 Display device
CN113299241A (en) * 2021-05-21 2021-08-24 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 GOA circuit, GOA circuit driving method and display panel
CN113506540A (en) * 2021-06-09 2021-10-15 深圳职业技术学院 Pixel circuit beneficial to high-order display
US11735280B2 (en) * 2021-08-13 2023-08-22 Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd. Memory device and operating method of the same
CN113823222B (en) * 2021-09-26 2023-08-18 合肥维信诺科技有限公司 Driving method and driving device of display panel and display device
KR20230046700A (en) * 2021-09-30 2023-04-06 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Pixel circuit nd display device including the same
US11538427B1 (en) 2022-01-07 2022-12-27 Stmicroelectronics S.R.L. High efficiency ghost illumination cancelation in emissive and non-emissive display panels
US11978416B2 (en) 2022-01-07 2024-05-07 Stmicroelectronics S.R.L. High efficiency ghost illumination cancelation in emissive and non-emissive display panels
CN115655154B (en) * 2022-12-26 2023-03-10 常州微亿智造科技有限公司 High-resolution phase measurement deflection technique dynamic defect detection device and method
CN117935726B (en) * 2024-03-22 2024-05-17 深圳市元亨光电股份有限公司 Mini-LED display screen color homogenization method and device

Family Cites Families (417)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU153946B2 (en) 1952-01-08 1953-11-03 Maatschappij Voor Kolenbewerking Stamicarbon N. V Multi hydrocyclone or multi vortex chamber and method of treating a suspension therein
US3506851A (en) 1966-12-14 1970-04-14 North American Rockwell Field effect transistor driver using capacitor feedback
DE2039669C3 (en) 1970-08-10 1978-11-02 Klaus 5500 Trier Goebel Bearing arranged in the area of a joint crossing of a panel layer for supporting the panels
US3774055A (en) 1972-01-24 1973-11-20 Nat Semiconductor Corp Clocked bootstrap inverter circuit
JPS52119160A (en) 1976-03-31 1977-10-06 Nec Corp Semiconductor circuit with insulating gate type field dffect transisto r
US4354162A (en) 1981-02-09 1982-10-12 National Semiconductor Corporation Wide dynamic range control amplifier with offset correction
JPS61161093A (en) 1985-01-09 1986-07-21 Sony Corp Device for correcting dynamic uniformity
US4996523A (en) 1988-10-20 1991-02-26 Eastman Kodak Company Electroluminescent storage display with improved intensity driver circuits
US5170158A (en) 1989-06-30 1992-12-08 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Display apparatus
US5134387A (en) 1989-11-06 1992-07-28 Texas Digital Systems, Inc. Multicolor display system
GB9020892D0 (en) 1990-09-25 1990-11-07 Emi Plc Thorn Improvements in or relating to display devices
US5153420A (en) 1990-11-28 1992-10-06 Xerox Corporation Timing independent pixel-scale light sensing apparatus
US5204661A (en) 1990-12-13 1993-04-20 Xerox Corporation Input/output pixel circuit and array of such circuits
US5589847A (en) 1991-09-23 1996-12-31 Xerox Corporation Switched capacitor analog circuits using polysilicon thin film technology
US5266515A (en) 1992-03-02 1993-11-30 Motorola, Inc. Fabricating dual gate thin film transistors
US5572444A (en) 1992-08-19 1996-11-05 Mtl Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for automatic performance evaluation of electronic display devices
JP3221085B2 (en) 1992-09-14 2001-10-22 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Parallel processing unit
EP0693210A4 (en) 1993-04-05 1996-11-20 Cirrus Logic Inc System for compensating crosstalk in lcds
JPH0799321A (en) 1993-05-27 1995-04-11 Sony Corp Method and device for manufacturing thin-film semiconductor element
JPH07120722A (en) 1993-06-30 1995-05-12 Sharp Corp Liquid crystal display element and its driving method
US5408267A (en) 1993-07-06 1995-04-18 The 3Do Company Method and apparatus for gamma correction by mapping, transforming and demapping
US5479606A (en) 1993-07-21 1995-12-26 Pgm Systems, Inc. Data display apparatus for displaying patterns using samples of signal data
JP3067949B2 (en) 1994-06-15 2000-07-24 シャープ株式会社 Electronic device and liquid crystal display device
US5714968A (en) 1994-08-09 1998-02-03 Nec Corporation Current-dependent light-emitting element drive circuit for use in active matrix display device
US5498880A (en) 1995-01-12 1996-03-12 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Image capture panel using a solid state device
US5745660A (en) 1995-04-26 1998-04-28 Polaroid Corporation Image rendering system and method for generating stochastic threshold arrays for use therewith
US5619033A (en) 1995-06-07 1997-04-08 Xerox Corporation Layered solid state photodiode sensor array
US5748160A (en) 1995-08-21 1998-05-05 Mororola, Inc. Active driven LED matrices
JP3272209B2 (en) 1995-09-07 2002-04-08 アルプス電気株式会社 LCD drive circuit
JPH0990405A (en) 1995-09-21 1997-04-04 Sharp Corp Thin-film transistor
US5835376A (en) 1995-10-27 1998-11-10 Total Technology, Inc. Fully automated vehicle dispatching, monitoring and billing
US6694248B2 (en) 1995-10-27 2004-02-17 Total Technology Inc. Fully automated vehicle dispatching, monitoring and billing
US7113864B2 (en) 1995-10-27 2006-09-26 Total Technology, Inc. Fully automated vehicle dispatching, monitoring and billing
US5949398A (en) 1996-04-12 1999-09-07 Thomson Multimedia S.A. Select line driver for a display matrix with toggling backplane
AU764896B2 (en) 1996-08-30 2003-09-04 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Mounting method for a combination solar battery and roof unit
JP3266177B2 (en) 1996-09-04 2002-03-18 住友電気工業株式会社 Current mirror circuit, reference voltage generating circuit and light emitting element driving circuit using the same
US5783952A (en) 1996-09-16 1998-07-21 Atmel Corporation Clock feedthrough reduction system for switched current memory cells
US5874803A (en) 1997-09-09 1999-02-23 The Trustees Of Princeton University Light emitting device with stack of OLEDS and phosphor downconverter
US5990629A (en) 1997-01-28 1999-11-23 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Electroluminescent display device and a driving method thereof
US5917280A (en) 1997-02-03 1999-06-29 The Trustees Of Princeton University Stacked organic light emitting devices
TW578130B (en) 1997-02-17 2004-03-01 Seiko Epson Corp Display unit
JPH10254410A (en) 1997-03-12 1998-09-25 Pioneer Electron Corp Organic electroluminescent display device, and driving method therefor
US5903248A (en) 1997-04-11 1999-05-11 Spatialight, Inc. Active matrix display having pixel driving circuits with integrated charge pumps
US5952789A (en) 1997-04-14 1999-09-14 Sarnoff Corporation Active matrix organic light emitting diode (amoled) display pixel structure and data load/illuminate circuit therefor
US6229506B1 (en) * 1997-04-23 2001-05-08 Sarnoff Corporation Active matrix light emitting diode pixel structure and concomitant method
US6018452A (en) 1997-06-03 2000-01-25 Tii Industries, Inc. Residential protection service center
KR100430091B1 (en) 1997-07-10 2004-07-15 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 Liquid Crystal Display
US6023259A (en) 1997-07-11 2000-02-08 Fed Corporation OLED active matrix using a single transistor current mode pixel design
KR100323441B1 (en) 1997-08-20 2002-06-20 윤종용 Mpeg2 motion picture coding/decoding system
US20010043173A1 (en) 1997-09-04 2001-11-22 Ronald Roy Troutman Field sequential gray in active matrix led display using complementary transistor pixel circuits
JPH1187720A (en) 1997-09-08 1999-03-30 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Semiconductor device and liquid crystal display device
JP3229250B2 (en) 1997-09-12 2001-11-19 インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション Image display method in liquid crystal display device and liquid crystal display device
US6100868A (en) 1997-09-15 2000-08-08 Silicon Image, Inc. High density column drivers for an active matrix display
JPH1196333A (en) 1997-09-16 1999-04-09 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Color image processor
US6229508B1 (en) 1997-09-29 2001-05-08 Sarnoff Corporation Active matrix light emitting diode pixel structure and concomitant method
US6909419B2 (en) 1997-10-31 2005-06-21 Kopin Corporation Portable microdisplay system
US6069365A (en) 1997-11-25 2000-05-30 Alan Y. Chow Optical processor based imaging system
GB2333174A (en) 1998-01-09 1999-07-14 Sharp Kk Data line driver for an active matrix display
JPH11231805A (en) 1998-02-10 1999-08-27 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Display device
JP3595153B2 (en) 1998-03-03 2004-12-02 株式会社 日立ディスプレイズ Liquid crystal display device and video signal line driving means
US6097360A (en) 1998-03-19 2000-08-01 Holloman; Charles J Analog driver for LED or similar display element
JP3252897B2 (en) 1998-03-31 2002-02-04 日本電気株式会社 Element driving device and method, image display device
JP3702096B2 (en) 1998-06-08 2005-10-05 三洋電機株式会社 Thin film transistor and display device
CA2242720C (en) 1998-07-09 2000-05-16 Ibm Canada Limited-Ibm Canada Limitee Programmable led driver
US6417825B1 (en) 1998-09-29 2002-07-09 Sarnoff Corporation Analog active matrix emissive display
US6473065B1 (en) 1998-11-16 2002-10-29 Nongqiang Fan Methods of improving display uniformity of organic light emitting displays by calibrating individual pixel
US6501098B2 (en) 1998-11-25 2002-12-31 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co, Ltd. Semiconductor device
US6384804B1 (en) 1998-11-25 2002-05-07 Lucent Techonologies Inc. Display comprising organic smart pixels
JP3423232B2 (en) 1998-11-30 2003-07-07 三洋電機株式会社 Active EL display
JP3031367B1 (en) 1998-12-02 2000-04-10 日本電気株式会社 Image sensor
JP2000174282A (en) 1998-12-03 2000-06-23 Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd Semiconductor device
CA2354018A1 (en) 1998-12-14 2000-06-22 Alan Richard Portable microdisplay system
US6639244B1 (en) 1999-01-11 2003-10-28 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Semiconductor device and method of fabricating the same
JP3686769B2 (en) 1999-01-29 2005-08-24 日本電気株式会社 Organic EL element driving apparatus and driving method
JP2000231346A (en) 1999-02-09 2000-08-22 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Electro-luminescence display device
US7122835B1 (en) 1999-04-07 2006-10-17 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Electrooptical device and a method of manufacturing the same
JP4565700B2 (en) 1999-05-12 2010-10-20 ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 Semiconductor device
KR100296113B1 (en) 1999-06-03 2001-07-12 구본준, 론 위라하디락사 ElectroLuminescent Display
JP3556150B2 (en) 1999-06-15 2004-08-18 シャープ株式会社 Liquid crystal display method and liquid crystal display device
JP4627822B2 (en) 1999-06-23 2011-02-09 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display device
EP1130565A4 (en) 1999-07-14 2006-10-04 Sony Corp Current drive circuit and display comprising the same, pixel circuit, and drive method
JP2003509728A (en) 1999-09-11 2003-03-11 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ Active matrix EL display device
JP4686800B2 (en) * 1999-09-28 2011-05-25 三菱電機株式会社 Image display device
WO2001027910A1 (en) 1999-10-12 2001-04-19 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Led display device
US6392617B1 (en) 1999-10-27 2002-05-21 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Active matrix light emitting diode display
JP2001147659A (en) 1999-11-18 2001-05-29 Sony Corp Display device
TW587239B (en) 1999-11-30 2004-05-11 Semiconductor Energy Lab Electric device
GB9929501D0 (en) 1999-12-14 2000-02-09 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Image sensor
US6307322B1 (en) 1999-12-28 2001-10-23 Sarnoff Corporation Thin-film transistor circuitry with reduced sensitivity to variance in transistor threshold voltage
WO2001054107A1 (en) 2000-01-21 2001-07-26 Emagin Corporation Gray scale pixel driver for electronic display and method of operation therefor
US6639265B2 (en) 2000-01-26 2003-10-28 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Semiconductor device and method of manufacturing the semiconductor device
US7030921B2 (en) 2000-02-01 2006-04-18 Minolta Co., Ltd. Solid-state image-sensing device
US6414661B1 (en) 2000-02-22 2002-07-02 Sarnoff Corporation Method and apparatus for calibrating display devices and automatically compensating for loss in their efficiency over time
KR100327374B1 (en) 2000-03-06 2002-03-06 구자홍 an active driving circuit for a display panel
TW521226B (en) 2000-03-27 2003-02-21 Semiconductor Energy Lab Electro-optical device
JP2001284592A (en) 2000-03-29 2001-10-12 Sony Corp Thin-film semiconductor device and driving method therefor
US6528950B2 (en) 2000-04-06 2003-03-04 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Electronic device and driving method
US6611108B2 (en) 2000-04-26 2003-08-26 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Electronic device and driving method thereof
US6583576B2 (en) 2000-05-08 2003-06-24 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Light-emitting device, and electric device using the same
EP1158483A3 (en) 2000-05-24 2003-02-05 Eastman Kodak Company Solid-state display with reference pixel
JP4703815B2 (en) 2000-05-26 2011-06-15 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 MOS type sensor driving method and imaging method
TW503565B (en) 2000-06-22 2002-09-21 Semiconductor Energy Lab Display device
JP3437152B2 (en) 2000-07-28 2003-08-18 ウインテスト株式会社 Apparatus and method for evaluating organic EL display
US6828950B2 (en) 2000-08-10 2004-12-07 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device and method of driving the same
US7008904B2 (en) 2000-09-13 2006-03-07 Monsanto Technology, Llc Herbicidal compositions containing glyphosate and bipyridilium
US7315295B2 (en) 2000-09-29 2008-01-01 Seiko Epson Corporation Driving method for electro-optical device, electro-optical device, and electronic apparatus
US6781567B2 (en) 2000-09-29 2004-08-24 Seiko Epson Corporation Driving method for electro-optical device, electro-optical device, and electronic apparatus
JP2002162934A (en) 2000-09-29 2002-06-07 Eastman Kodak Co Flat-panel display with luminance feedback
JP4925528B2 (en) 2000-09-29 2012-04-25 三洋電機株式会社 Display device
JP2002123226A (en) 2000-10-12 2002-04-26 Hitachi Ltd Liquid crystal display device
TW550530B (en) 2000-10-27 2003-09-01 Semiconductor Energy Lab Display device and method of driving the same
JP2002141420A (en) 2000-10-31 2002-05-17 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Semiconductor device and manufacturing method of it
JP3858590B2 (en) 2000-11-30 2006-12-13 株式会社日立製作所 Liquid crystal display device and driving method of liquid crystal display device
KR100405026B1 (en) 2000-12-22 2003-11-07 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 Liquid Crystal Display
TW518532B (en) 2000-12-26 2003-01-21 Hannstar Display Corp Driving circuit of gate control line and method
TW561445B (en) 2001-01-02 2003-11-11 Chi Mei Optoelectronics Corp OLED active driving system with current feedback
US6580657B2 (en) 2001-01-04 2003-06-17 International Business Machines Corporation Low-power organic light emitting diode pixel circuit
JP3593982B2 (en) 2001-01-15 2004-11-24 ソニー株式会社 Active matrix type display device, active matrix type organic electroluminescence display device, and driving method thereof
US20030001858A1 (en) 2001-01-18 2003-01-02 Thomas Jack Creation of a mosaic image by tile-for-pixel substitution
US6323631B1 (en) 2001-01-18 2001-11-27 Sunplus Technology Co., Ltd. Constant current driver with auto-clamped pre-charge function
WO2002063383A1 (en) 2001-02-05 2002-08-15 International Business Machines Corporation Liquid crystal display device
JP2002244617A (en) 2001-02-15 2002-08-30 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Organic el pixel circuit
CA2507276C (en) 2001-02-16 2006-08-22 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel current driver for organic light emitting diode displays
JP4392165B2 (en) 2001-02-16 2009-12-24 イグニス・イノベイション・インコーポレーテッド Organic light emitting diode display with shielding electrode
EP1488454B1 (en) 2001-02-16 2013-01-16 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel driver circuit for an organic light emitting diode
US7569849B2 (en) 2001-02-16 2009-08-04 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel driver circuit and pixel circuit having the pixel driver circuit
US7061451B2 (en) 2001-02-21 2006-06-13 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd, Light emitting device and electronic device
JP2002278513A (en) 2001-03-19 2002-09-27 Sharp Corp Electro-optical device
JP2002351401A (en) 2001-03-21 2002-12-06 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Self-light emission type display device
JPWO2002075709A1 (en) 2001-03-21 2004-07-08 キヤノン株式会社 Driver circuit for active matrix light emitting device
US7164417B2 (en) 2001-03-26 2007-01-16 Eastman Kodak Company Dynamic controller for active-matrix displays
JP3819723B2 (en) 2001-03-30 2006-09-13 株式会社日立製作所 Display device and driving method thereof
JP3862966B2 (en) 2001-03-30 2006-12-27 株式会社日立製作所 Image display device
JP4785271B2 (en) 2001-04-27 2011-10-05 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Liquid crystal display device, electronic equipment
US7136058B2 (en) 2001-04-27 2006-11-14 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Display apparatus, digital-to-analog conversion circuit and digital-to-analog conversion method
JP4282919B2 (en) 2001-04-27 2009-06-24 インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション register
JP2002351409A (en) 2001-05-23 2002-12-06 Internatl Business Mach Corp <Ibm> Liquid crystal display device, liquid crystal display driving circuit, driving method for liquid crystal display, and program
JP3610923B2 (en) 2001-05-30 2005-01-19 ソニー株式会社 Active matrix display device, active matrix organic electroluminescence display device, and driving method thereof
JP3743387B2 (en) 2001-05-31 2006-02-08 ソニー株式会社 Active matrix display device, active matrix organic electroluminescence display device, and driving method thereof
US7012588B2 (en) 2001-06-05 2006-03-14 Eastman Kodak Company Method for saving power in an organic electroluminescent display using white light emitting elements
JP4982014B2 (en) 2001-06-21 2012-07-25 株式会社日立製作所 Image display device
KR100743103B1 (en) 2001-06-22 2007-07-27 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 Electro Luminescence Panel
WO2003001496A1 (en) 2001-06-22 2003-01-03 Ibm Corporation Oled current drive pixel circuit
HU225955B1 (en) 2001-07-26 2008-01-28 Egis Gyogyszergyar Nyilvanosan Novel 2h-pyridazin-3-one derivatives, process for their preparation, their use and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
JP2003043994A (en) 2001-07-27 2003-02-14 Canon Inc Active matrix type display
US7501770B2 (en) * 2001-08-01 2009-03-10 Raja Singh Tuli Laser guided display device
JP3800050B2 (en) 2001-08-09 2006-07-19 日本電気株式会社 Display device drive circuit
CN100371962C (en) 2001-08-29 2008-02-27 株式会社半导体能源研究所 Luminous device and its driving method, element substrate and electronic apparatus
US7209101B2 (en) 2001-08-29 2007-04-24 Nec Corporation Current load device and method for driving the same
JP2003076331A (en) 2001-08-31 2003-03-14 Seiko Epson Corp Display device and electronic equipment
US7027015B2 (en) 2001-08-31 2006-04-11 Intel Corporation Compensating organic light emitting device displays for color variations
WO2003023752A1 (en) * 2001-09-07 2003-03-20 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. El display, el display driving circuit and image display
JP4075505B2 (en) 2001-09-10 2008-04-16 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electronic circuit, electronic device, and electronic apparatus
CN107230450A (en) 2001-09-21 2017-10-03 株式会社半导体能源研究所 Display device and its driving method
JP2003099000A (en) 2001-09-25 2003-04-04 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Driving method of current driving type display panel, driving circuit and display device
JP3725458B2 (en) 2001-09-25 2005-12-14 シャープ株式会社 Active matrix display panel and image display device having the same
JP4230744B2 (en) 2001-09-29 2009-02-25 東芝松下ディスプレイテクノロジー株式会社 Display device
JP3601499B2 (en) 2001-10-17 2004-12-15 ソニー株式会社 Display device
US20030169241A1 (en) 2001-10-19 2003-09-11 Lechevalier Robert E. Method and system for ramp control of precharge voltage
AU2002348472A1 (en) 2001-10-19 2003-04-28 Clare Micronix Integrated Systems, Inc. System and method for providing pulse amplitude modulation for oled display drivers
US6861810B2 (en) 2001-10-23 2005-03-01 Fpd Systems Organic electroluminescent display device driving method and apparatus
US7180479B2 (en) 2001-10-30 2007-02-20 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Signal line drive circuit and light emitting device and driving method therefor
KR100433216B1 (en) 2001-11-06 2004-05-27 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 Apparatus and method of driving electro luminescence panel
KR100940342B1 (en) 2001-11-13 2010-02-04 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Display device and method for driving the same
TW518543B (en) 2001-11-14 2003-01-21 Ind Tech Res Inst Integrated current driving framework of active matrix OLED
US7071932B2 (en) 2001-11-20 2006-07-04 Toppoly Optoelectronics Corporation Data voltage current drive amoled pixel circuit
TW529006B (en) 2001-11-28 2003-04-21 Ind Tech Res Inst Array circuit of light emitting diode display
JP2003177709A (en) 2001-12-13 2003-06-27 Seiko Epson Corp Pixel circuit for light emitting element
JP2003186437A (en) 2001-12-18 2003-07-04 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Display device
JP3800404B2 (en) 2001-12-19 2006-07-26 株式会社日立製作所 Image display device
GB0130411D0 (en) 2001-12-20 2002-02-06 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Active matrix electroluminescent display device
JP2003186439A (en) 2001-12-21 2003-07-04 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd El display device and its driving method, and information display device
CN1293421C (en) 2001-12-27 2007-01-03 Lg.菲利浦Lcd株式会社 Electroluminescence display panel and method for operating it
JP2003195809A (en) 2001-12-28 2003-07-09 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd El display device and its driving method, and information display device
US7274363B2 (en) 2001-12-28 2007-09-25 Pioneer Corporation Panel display driving device and driving method
KR100408005B1 (en) 2002-01-03 2003-12-03 엘지.필립스디스플레이(주) Panel for CRT of mask stretching type
JP4029840B2 (en) 2002-01-17 2008-01-09 日本電気株式会社 Semiconductor device having matrix type current load driving circuit and driving method thereof
JP2003295825A (en) 2002-02-04 2003-10-15 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Display device
US6720942B2 (en) 2002-02-12 2004-04-13 Eastman Kodak Company Flat-panel light emitting pixel with luminance feedback
JP3627710B2 (en) 2002-02-14 2005-03-09 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Display drive circuit, display panel, display device, and display drive method
JP2003308046A (en) 2002-02-18 2003-10-31 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Display device
WO2003075256A1 (en) 2002-03-05 2003-09-12 Nec Corporation Image display and its control method
JP3613253B2 (en) 2002-03-14 2005-01-26 日本電気株式会社 Current control element drive circuit and image display device
JP4218249B2 (en) 2002-03-07 2009-02-04 株式会社日立製作所 Display device
GB2386462A (en) 2002-03-14 2003-09-17 Cambridge Display Tech Ltd Display driver circuits
JP4274734B2 (en) 2002-03-15 2009-06-10 三洋電機株式会社 Transistor circuit
KR100488835B1 (en) 2002-04-04 2005-05-11 산요덴키가부시키가이샤 Semiconductor device and display device
US6911781B2 (en) 2002-04-23 2005-06-28 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Light emitting device and production system of the same
JP3637911B2 (en) 2002-04-24 2005-04-13 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electronic device, electronic apparatus, and driving method of electronic device
JP3861743B2 (en) * 2002-05-01 2006-12-20 ソニー株式会社 Driving method of electroluminescent element
TWI345211B (en) 2002-05-17 2011-07-11 Semiconductor Energy Lab Display apparatus and driving method thereof
JP3972359B2 (en) 2002-06-07 2007-09-05 カシオ計算機株式会社 Display device
JP4195337B2 (en) 2002-06-11 2008-12-10 三星エスディアイ株式会社 Light emitting display device, display panel and driving method thereof
GB2389951A (en) 2002-06-18 2003-12-24 Cambridge Display Tech Ltd Display driver circuits for active matrix OLED displays
US20030230980A1 (en) 2002-06-18 2003-12-18 Forrest Stephen R Very low voltage, high efficiency phosphorescent oled in a p-i-n structure
US6668645B1 (en) 2002-06-18 2003-12-30 Ti Group Automotive Systems, L.L.C. Optical fuel level sensor
JP3970110B2 (en) 2002-06-27 2007-09-05 カシオ計算機株式会社 CURRENT DRIVE DEVICE, ITS DRIVE METHOD, AND DISPLAY DEVICE USING CURRENT DRIVE DEVICE
TWI220046B (en) 2002-07-04 2004-08-01 Au Optronics Corp Driving circuit of display
JP2004045488A (en) 2002-07-09 2004-02-12 Casio Comput Co Ltd Display driving device and driving control method therefor
JP4115763B2 (en) 2002-07-10 2008-07-09 パイオニア株式会社 Display device and display method
TW594628B (en) 2002-07-12 2004-06-21 Au Optronics Corp Cell pixel driving circuit of OLED
TW569173B (en) 2002-08-05 2004-01-01 Etoms Electronics Corp Driver for controlling display cycle of OLED and its method
GB0218172D0 (en) 2002-08-06 2002-09-11 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Electroluminescent display device
US6927434B2 (en) 2002-08-12 2005-08-09 Micron Technology, Inc. Providing current to compensate for spurious current while receiving signals through a line
US7385956B2 (en) 2002-08-22 2008-06-10 At&T Mobility Ii Llc LAN based wireless communications system
JP4103500B2 (en) 2002-08-26 2008-06-18 カシオ計算機株式会社 Display device and display panel driving method
JP2004145278A (en) 2002-08-30 2004-05-20 Seiko Epson Corp Electronic circuit, method for driving electronic circuit, electrooptical device, method for driving electrooptical device, and electronic apparatus
JP4194451B2 (en) 2002-09-02 2008-12-10 キヤノン株式会社 Drive circuit, display device, and information display device
US7385572B2 (en) 2002-09-09 2008-06-10 E.I Du Pont De Nemours And Company Organic electronic device having improved homogeneity
KR100450761B1 (en) 2002-09-14 2004-10-01 한국전자통신연구원 Active matrix organic light emission diode display panel circuit
TW564390B (en) 2002-09-16 2003-12-01 Au Optronics Corp Driving circuit and method for light emitting device
TW588468B (en) 2002-09-19 2004-05-21 Ind Tech Res Inst Pixel structure of active matrix organic light-emitting diode
GB0223304D0 (en) 2002-10-08 2002-11-13 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Electroluminescent display devices
JP3832415B2 (en) 2002-10-11 2006-10-11 ソニー株式会社 Active matrix display device
US6911964B2 (en) 2002-11-07 2005-06-28 Duke University Frame buffer pixel circuit for liquid crystal display
JP2004157467A (en) 2002-11-08 2004-06-03 Tohoku Pioneer Corp Driving method and driving-gear of active type light emitting display panel
JP3659246B2 (en) * 2002-11-21 2005-06-15 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Driving circuit, electro-optical device, and driving method
AU2003280850A1 (en) 2002-11-27 2004-06-18 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display apparatus and electronic device
JP3707484B2 (en) 2002-11-27 2005-10-19 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optical device, driving method of electro-optical device, and electronic apparatus
JP2004191627A (en) 2002-12-11 2004-07-08 Hitachi Ltd Organic light emitting display device
JP2004191752A (en) 2002-12-12 2004-07-08 Seiko Epson Corp Electrooptical device, driving method for electrooptical device, and electronic equipment
KR101245125B1 (en) 2002-12-27 2013-03-26 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Display device
US7079091B2 (en) 2003-01-14 2006-07-18 Eastman Kodak Company Compensating for aging in OLED devices
JP2004246320A (en) 2003-01-20 2004-09-02 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Active matrix drive type display device
KR100490622B1 (en) 2003-01-21 2005-05-17 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Organic electroluminescent display and driving method and pixel circuit thereof
US7564433B2 (en) 2003-01-24 2009-07-21 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Active matrix display devices
JP4048969B2 (en) 2003-02-12 2008-02-20 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optical device driving method and electronic apparatus
US20040160516A1 (en) 2003-02-19 2004-08-19 Ford Eric Harlen Light beam display employing polygon scan optics with parallel scan lines
US7604718B2 (en) 2003-02-19 2009-10-20 Bioarray Solutions Ltd. Dynamically configurable electrode formed of pixels
TW594634B (en) 2003-02-21 2004-06-21 Toppoly Optoelectronics Corp Data driver
JP4734529B2 (en) 2003-02-24 2011-07-27 奇美電子股▲ふん▼有限公司 Display device
US7612749B2 (en) 2003-03-04 2009-11-03 Chi Mei Optoelectronics Corporation Driving circuits for displays
JP3925435B2 (en) 2003-03-05 2007-06-06 カシオ計算機株式会社 Light emission drive circuit, display device, and drive control method thereof
JP2004287118A (en) 2003-03-24 2004-10-14 Hitachi Ltd Display apparatus
KR100502912B1 (en) 2003-04-01 2005-07-21 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Light emitting display device and display panel and driving method thereof
JP2005004147A (en) 2003-04-16 2005-01-06 Okamoto Isao Sticker and its manufacturing method, photography holder
CN1781135A (en) 2003-04-25 2006-05-31 维申尼尔德图像系统公司 Led illumination source/display with individual led brightness monitoring capability and calibration method
KR100955735B1 (en) 2003-04-30 2010-04-30 크로스텍 캐피탈, 엘엘씨 Unit pixel for cmos image sensor
KR100515299B1 (en) 2003-04-30 2005-09-15 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Image display and display panel and driving method of thereof
JP2006525539A (en) 2003-05-02 2006-11-09 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ Active matrix OLED display with threshold voltage drift compensation
JP4012168B2 (en) 2003-05-14 2007-11-21 キヤノン株式会社 Signal processing device, signal processing method, correction value generation device, correction value generation method, and display device manufacturing method
JP4484451B2 (en) 2003-05-16 2010-06-16 奇美電子股▲ふん▼有限公司 Image display device
JP4623939B2 (en) 2003-05-16 2011-02-02 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display device
JP4049018B2 (en) * 2003-05-19 2008-02-20 ソニー株式会社 Pixel circuit, display device, and driving method of pixel circuit
JP3772889B2 (en) 2003-05-19 2006-05-10 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optical device and driving device thereof
JP4360121B2 (en) 2003-05-23 2009-11-11 ソニー株式会社 Pixel circuit, display device, and driving method of pixel circuit
JP4526279B2 (en) 2003-05-27 2010-08-18 三菱電機株式会社 Image display device and image display method
JP4346350B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2009-10-21 三菱電機株式会社 Display device
US20040257352A1 (en) 2003-06-18 2004-12-23 Nuelight Corporation Method and apparatus for controlling
TWI227031B (en) 2003-06-20 2005-01-21 Au Optronics Corp A capacitor structure
FR2857146A1 (en) 2003-07-03 2005-01-07 Thomson Licensing Sa Organic LED display device for e.g. motor vehicle, has operational amplifiers connected between gate and source electrodes of modulators, where counter reaction of amplifiers compensates threshold trigger voltages of modulators
GB0315929D0 (en) 2003-07-08 2003-08-13 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Display device
US7262753B2 (en) 2003-08-07 2007-08-28 Barco N.V. Method and system for measuring and controlling an OLED display element for improved lifetime and light output
US7161570B2 (en) 2003-08-19 2007-01-09 Brillian Corporation Display driver architecture for a liquid crystal display and method therefore
CA2438363A1 (en) 2003-08-28 2005-02-28 Ignis Innovation Inc. A pixel circuit for amoled displays
JP2005099714A (en) 2003-08-29 2005-04-14 Seiko Epson Corp Electrooptical device, driving method of electrooptical device, and electronic equipment
JP2005099715A (en) 2003-08-29 2005-04-14 Seiko Epson Corp Driving method of electronic circuit, electronic circuit, electronic device, electrooptical device, electronic equipment and driving method of electronic device
GB0320503D0 (en) 2003-09-02 2003-10-01 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Active maxtrix display devices
CN100373435C (en) 2003-09-22 2008-03-05 统宝光电股份有限公司 Active array organic LED pixel drive circuit and its drive method
CA2443206A1 (en) 2003-09-23 2005-03-23 Ignis Innovation Inc. Amoled display backplanes - pixel driver circuits, array architecture, and external compensation
US7038392B2 (en) 2003-09-26 2006-05-02 International Business Machines Corporation Active-matrix light emitting display and method for obtaining threshold voltage compensation for same
US7310077B2 (en) 2003-09-29 2007-12-18 Michael Gillis Kane Pixel circuit for an active matrix organic light-emitting diode display
US7075316B2 (en) 2003-10-02 2006-07-11 Alps Electric Co., Ltd. Capacitance detector circuit, capacitance detection method, and fingerprint sensor using the same
KR100599726B1 (en) 2003-11-27 2006-07-12 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Light emitting display device, and display panel and driving method thereof
US7224332B2 (en) 2003-11-25 2007-05-29 Eastman Kodak Company Method of aging compensation in an OLED display
US6995519B2 (en) 2003-11-25 2006-02-07 Eastman Kodak Company OLED display with aging compensation
KR100578911B1 (en) 2003-11-26 2006-05-11 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Current demultiplexing device and current programming display device using the same
US20050123193A1 (en) 2003-12-05 2005-06-09 Nokia Corporation Image adjustment with tone rendering curve
GB0400216D0 (en) 2004-01-07 2004-02-11 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Electroluminescent display devices
JP4263153B2 (en) 2004-01-30 2009-05-13 Necエレクトロニクス株式会社 Display device, drive circuit for display device, and semiconductor device for drive circuit
US7502000B2 (en) 2004-02-12 2009-03-10 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Drive circuit and image forming apparatus using the same
US6975332B2 (en) 2004-03-08 2005-12-13 Adobe Systems Incorporated Selecting a transfer function for a display device
JP4945063B2 (en) 2004-03-15 2012-06-06 東芝モバイルディスプレイ株式会社 Active matrix display device
US20050212787A1 (en) 2004-03-24 2005-09-29 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Display apparatus that controls luminance irregularity and gradation irregularity, and method for controlling said display apparatus
JP4977460B2 (en) 2004-03-29 2012-07-18 ローム株式会社 Organic EL drive circuit and organic EL display device
JP2005311591A (en) 2004-04-20 2005-11-04 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Current driver
US20050248515A1 (en) 2004-04-28 2005-11-10 Naugler W E Jr Stabilized active matrix emissive display
JP4401971B2 (en) 2004-04-29 2010-01-20 三星モバイルディスプレイ株式會社 Luminescent display device
US20050258867A1 (en) 2004-05-21 2005-11-24 Seiko Epson Corporation Electronic circuit, electro-optical device, electronic device and electronic apparatus
TWI261801B (en) 2004-05-24 2006-09-11 Rohm Co Ltd Organic EL drive circuit and organic EL display device using the same organic EL drive circuit
US7944414B2 (en) 2004-05-28 2011-05-17 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Display drive apparatus in which display pixels in a plurality of specific rows are set in a selected state with periods at least overlapping each other, and gradation current is supplied to the display pixels during the selected state, and display apparatus
JPWO2005119637A1 (en) 2004-06-02 2008-04-03 松下電器産業株式会社 Plasma display panel driving apparatus and plasma display
GB0412586D0 (en) 2004-06-05 2004-07-07 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Active matrix display devices
JP2005352483A (en) * 2004-06-09 2005-12-22 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Liquid crystal display device and its driving method
KR100578813B1 (en) 2004-06-29 2006-05-11 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Light emitting display and method thereof
US20050285822A1 (en) 2004-06-29 2005-12-29 Damoder Reddy High-performance emissive display device for computers, information appliances, and entertainment systems
CA2472671A1 (en) 2004-06-29 2005-12-29 Ignis Innovation Inc. Voltage-programming scheme for current-driven amoled displays
CA2567076C (en) 2004-06-29 2008-10-21 Ignis Innovation Inc. Voltage-programming scheme for current-driven amoled displays
JP2006030317A (en) 2004-07-12 2006-02-02 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Organic el display device
JP2006309104A (en) 2004-07-30 2006-11-09 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Active-matrix-driven display device
US7868856B2 (en) 2004-08-20 2011-01-11 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Data signal driver for light emitting display
US7053875B2 (en) 2004-08-21 2006-05-30 Chen-Jean Chou Light emitting device display circuit and drive method thereof
KR100662978B1 (en) * 2004-08-25 2006-12-28 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Light Emitting Display and Driving Method Thereof
CN100346387C (en) 2004-09-08 2007-10-31 友达光电股份有限公司 Organic light-emitting display and its display unit
DE102004045871B4 (en) 2004-09-20 2006-11-23 Novaled Gmbh Method and circuit arrangement for aging compensation of organic light emitting diodes
JP2006091681A (en) 2004-09-27 2006-04-06 Hitachi Displays Ltd Display device and display method
KR100670134B1 (en) 2004-10-08 2007-01-16 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 A data driving apparatus in a display device of a current driving type
KR100658619B1 (en) 2004-10-08 2006-12-15 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Digital/analog converter, display device using the same and display panel and driving method thereof
KR100592636B1 (en) 2004-10-08 2006-06-26 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Light emitting display
KR100604053B1 (en) * 2004-10-13 2006-07-24 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Light emitting display
KR100612392B1 (en) 2004-10-13 2006-08-16 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Light emitting display and light emitting display panel
JP4111185B2 (en) 2004-10-19 2008-07-02 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optical device, driving method thereof, and electronic apparatus
EP1650736A1 (en) 2004-10-25 2006-04-26 Barco NV Backlight modulation for display
CA2523841C (en) 2004-11-16 2007-08-07 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and driving method for active matrix light emitting device display
EP2383721B1 (en) 2004-11-16 2015-04-08 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and Driving Method for Active Matrix Light Emitting Device Display
KR100611660B1 (en) * 2004-12-01 2006-08-10 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Organic Electroluminescence Display and Operating Method of the same
WO2006059813A1 (en) * 2004-12-03 2006-06-08 Seoul National University Industry Foundation Picture element structure of current programming method type active matrix organic emitting diode display and driving method of data line
US7317434B2 (en) 2004-12-03 2008-01-08 Dupont Displays, Inc. Circuits including switches for electronic devices and methods of using the electronic devices
CA2490858A1 (en) * 2004-12-07 2006-06-07 Ignis Innovation Inc. Driving method for compensated voltage-programming of amoled displays
US7663615B2 (en) 2004-12-13 2010-02-16 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Light emission drive circuit and its drive control method and display unit and its display drive method
CA2590366C (en) 2004-12-15 2008-09-09 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for programming, calibrating and driving a light emitting device display
KR20070101275A (en) 2004-12-15 2007-10-16 이그니스 이노베이션 인크. Method and system for programming, calibrating and driving a light emitting device display
KR100604066B1 (en) 2004-12-24 2006-07-24 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Pixel and Light Emitting Display Using The Same
KR100599657B1 (en) 2005-01-05 2006-07-12 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Display device and driving method thereof
CA2495726A1 (en) 2005-01-28 2006-07-28 Ignis Innovation Inc. Locally referenced voltage programmed pixel for amoled displays
US20060209012A1 (en) 2005-02-23 2006-09-21 Pixtronix, Incorporated Devices having MEMS displays
JP2006285116A (en) 2005-04-05 2006-10-19 Eastman Kodak Co Driving circuit
JP2006292817A (en) 2005-04-06 2006-10-26 Renesas Technology Corp Semiconductor integrated circuit for display driving and electronic equipment with self-luminous display device
FR2884639A1 (en) 2005-04-14 2006-10-20 Thomson Licensing Sa ACTIVE MATRIX IMAGE DISPLAY PANEL, THE TRANSMITTERS OF WHICH ARE POWERED BY POWER-DRIVEN POWER CURRENT GENERATORS
TW200701167A (en) 2005-04-15 2007-01-01 Seiko Epson Corp Electronic circuit, and driving method, electrooptical device, and electronic apparatus thereof
US20070008297A1 (en) 2005-04-20 2007-01-11 Bassetti Chester F Method and apparatus for image based power control of drive circuitry of a display pixel
KR100707640B1 (en) 2005-04-28 2007-04-12 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Light emitting display and driving method thereof
EP1720148A3 (en) 2005-05-02 2007-09-05 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device and gray scale driving method with subframes thereof
TWI302281B (en) 2005-05-23 2008-10-21 Au Optronics Corp Display unit, display array, display panel and display unit control method
US20070263016A1 (en) 2005-05-25 2007-11-15 Naugler W E Jr Digital drive architecture for flat panel displays
EP1904995A4 (en) 2005-06-08 2011-01-05 Ignis Innovation Inc Method and system for driving a light emitting device display
JP4552844B2 (en) * 2005-06-09 2010-09-29 セイコーエプソン株式会社 LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE, ITS DRIVE METHOD, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE
US7364306B2 (en) 2005-06-20 2008-04-29 Digital Display Innovations, Llc Field sequential light source modulation for a digital display system
US8692740B2 (en) 2005-07-04 2014-04-08 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device and driving method thereof
JP5010814B2 (en) 2005-07-07 2012-08-29 グローバル・オーエルイーディー・テクノロジー・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニー Manufacturing method of organic EL display device
US7639211B2 (en) 2005-07-21 2009-12-29 Seiko Epson Corporation Electronic circuit, electronic device, method of driving electronic device, electro-optical device, and electronic apparatus
KR100762677B1 (en) 2005-08-08 2007-10-01 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Organic Light Emitting Diode Display and control method of the same
US7551179B2 (en) 2005-08-10 2009-06-23 Seiko Epson Corporation Image display apparatus and image adjusting method
KR100630759B1 (en) * 2005-08-16 2006-10-02 삼성전자주식회사 Driving method of liquid crystal display device having multi channel - 1 amplifier structure
KR100743498B1 (en) 2005-08-18 2007-07-30 삼성전자주식회사 Current driven data driver and display device having the same
JP4633121B2 (en) 2005-09-01 2011-02-16 シャープ株式会社 Display device, driving circuit and driving method thereof
GB2430069A (en) 2005-09-12 2007-03-14 Cambridge Display Tech Ltd Active matrix display drive control systems
CA2518276A1 (en) 2005-09-13 2007-03-13 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation technique for luminance degradation in electro-luminance devices
US7639222B2 (en) 2005-10-04 2009-12-29 Chunghwa Picture Tubes, Ltd. Flat panel display, image correction circuit and method of the same
JP2007108378A (en) 2005-10-13 2007-04-26 Sony Corp Driving method of display device and display device
KR101267019B1 (en) 2005-10-18 2013-05-30 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Flat panel display
KR101159354B1 (en) 2005-12-08 2012-06-25 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Apparatus and method for driving inverter, and image display apparatus using the same
KR101333749B1 (en) 2005-12-27 2013-11-28 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Charge pump circuit and semiconductor device having the same
EP2458579B1 (en) 2006-01-09 2017-09-20 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for driving an active matrix display circuit
CA2535233A1 (en) 2006-01-09 2007-07-09 Ignis Innovation Inc. Low-cost stable driving scheme for amoled displays
KR20070075717A (en) 2006-01-16 2007-07-24 삼성전자주식회사 Display device and driving method thereof
US20120119983A2 (en) 2006-02-22 2012-05-17 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device and method for driving same
TWI323864B (en) 2006-03-16 2010-04-21 Princeton Technology Corp Display control system of a display device and control method thereof
TWI603307B (en) 2006-04-05 2017-10-21 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device
US20070236440A1 (en) 2006-04-06 2007-10-11 Emagin Corporation OLED active matrix cell designed for optimal uniformity
US20080048951A1 (en) 2006-04-13 2008-02-28 Naugler Walter E Jr Method and apparatus for managing and uniformly maintaining pixel circuitry in a flat panel display
US7652646B2 (en) 2006-04-14 2010-01-26 Tpo Displays Corp. Systems for displaying images involving reduced mura
US7903047B2 (en) 2006-04-17 2011-03-08 Qualcomm Mems Technologies, Inc. Mode indicator for interferometric modulator displays
DE202006007613U1 (en) 2006-05-11 2006-08-17 Beck, Manfred Photovoltaic system for production of electrical energy, has thermal fuse provided in connecting lines between photovoltaic unit and hand-over point, where fuse has preset marginal temperature corresponding to fire temperature
CA2567113A1 (en) 2006-05-16 2007-11-16 Tribar Industries Inc. Large scale flexible led video display and control system therefor
WO2007134991A2 (en) 2006-05-18 2007-11-29 Thomson Licensing Driver for controlling a light emitting element, in particular an organic light emitting diode
KR20070121865A (en) * 2006-06-23 2007-12-28 삼성전자주식회사 Method and circuit of selectively generating gray-scale voltage
GB2439584A (en) * 2006-06-30 2008-01-02 Cambridge Display Tech Ltd Active Matrix Organic Electro-Optic Devices
US7385545B2 (en) 2006-08-31 2008-06-10 Ati Technologies Inc. Reduced component digital to analog decoder and method
GB2441354B (en) 2006-08-31 2009-07-29 Cambridge Display Tech Ltd Display drive systems
TWI348677B (en) 2006-09-12 2011-09-11 Ind Tech Res Inst System for increasing circuit reliability and method thereof
TWI326066B (en) 2006-09-22 2010-06-11 Au Optronics Corp Organic light emitting diode display and related pixel circuit
JP2008122517A (en) 2006-11-09 2008-05-29 Eastman Kodak Co Data driver and display device
JP4415983B2 (en) 2006-11-13 2010-02-17 ソニー株式会社 Display device and driving method thereof
KR100872352B1 (en) 2006-11-28 2008-12-09 한국과학기술원 Data driving circuit and organic light emitting display comprising thereof
CN101191923B (en) * 2006-12-01 2011-03-30 奇美电子股份有限公司 Liquid crystal display system and relevant driving process capable of improving display quality
JP2008203478A (en) 2007-02-20 2008-09-04 Sony Corp Display device and driving method thereof
CN101578648B (en) 2007-03-08 2011-11-30 夏普株式会社 Display device and its driving method
JP4306753B2 (en) 2007-03-22 2009-08-05 ソニー株式会社 Display device, driving method thereof, and electronic apparatus
JP2008250118A (en) 2007-03-30 2008-10-16 Seiko Epson Corp Liquid crystal device, drive circuit of liquid crystal device, drive method of liquid crystal device, and electronic equipment
KR101526475B1 (en) 2007-06-29 2015-06-05 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Display device and driving method thereof
JP2009020340A (en) 2007-07-12 2009-01-29 Renesas Technology Corp Display device and display device driving circuit
KR20090019237A (en) * 2007-08-20 2009-02-25 삼성전자주식회사 Back-light assembly, display apparatus having the back-light assembly, method of driving the back-light assembly and method of driving the display apparatus
TW200910943A (en) * 2007-08-27 2009-03-01 Jinq Kaih Technology Co Ltd Digital play system, LCD display module and display control method
US7884278B2 (en) 2007-11-02 2011-02-08 Tigo Energy, Inc. Apparatuses and methods to reduce safety risks associated with photovoltaic systems
KR20090058694A (en) 2007-12-05 2009-06-10 삼성전자주식회사 Driving apparatus and driving method for organic light emitting device
JP5176522B2 (en) * 2007-12-13 2013-04-03 ソニー株式会社 Self-luminous display device and driving method thereof
US8405585B2 (en) 2008-01-04 2013-03-26 Chimei Innolux Corporation OLED display, information device, and method for displaying an image in OLED display
KR100922071B1 (en) 2008-03-10 2009-10-16 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 Pixel and Organic Light Emitting Display Using the same
JP5352101B2 (en) 2008-03-19 2013-11-27 グローバル・オーエルイーディー・テクノロジー・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニー Display panel
JP5063433B2 (en) 2008-03-26 2012-10-31 富士フイルム株式会社 Display device
CA2660598A1 (en) 2008-04-18 2009-06-22 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and driving method for light emitting device display
GB2460018B (en) 2008-05-07 2013-01-30 Cambridge Display Tech Ltd Active matrix displays
TW200947026A (en) 2008-05-08 2009-11-16 Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd Pixel circuit and driving method thereof
US7696773B2 (en) 2008-05-29 2010-04-13 Global Oled Technology Llc Compensation scheme for multi-color electroluminescent display
CA2637343A1 (en) 2008-07-29 2010-01-29 Ignis Innovation Inc. Improving the display source driver
KR101307552B1 (en) 2008-08-12 2013-09-12 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Liquid Crystal Display and Driving Method thereof
JP2010085695A (en) 2008-09-30 2010-04-15 Toshiba Mobile Display Co Ltd Active matrix display
JP5012775B2 (en) 2008-11-28 2012-08-29 カシオ計算機株式会社 Pixel drive device, light emitting device, and parameter acquisition method
KR20100064620A (en) 2008-12-05 2010-06-15 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 Pixel and organic light emitting display device using the same
CA2686497A1 (en) * 2008-12-09 2010-02-15 Ignis Innovation Inc. Low power circuit and driving method for emissive displays
KR101040816B1 (en) * 2009-02-27 2011-06-13 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 Pixel and Organic Light Emitting Display Device Using the Same
US8194063B2 (en) 2009-03-04 2012-06-05 Global Oled Technology Llc Electroluminescent display compensated drive signal
US8769589B2 (en) 2009-03-31 2014-07-01 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. System and method to create a media content summary based on viewer annotations
JP2010249955A (en) * 2009-04-13 2010-11-04 Global Oled Technology Llc Display device
US20100269889A1 (en) 2009-04-27 2010-10-28 MHLEED Inc. Photoelectric Solar Panel Electrical Safety System Permitting Access for Fire Suppression
US20100277400A1 (en) 2009-05-01 2010-11-04 Leadis Technology, Inc. Correction of aging in amoled display
US8896505B2 (en) 2009-06-12 2014-11-25 Global Oled Technology Llc Display with pixel arrangement
CA2669367A1 (en) 2009-06-16 2010-12-16 Ignis Innovation Inc Compensation technique for color shift in displays
KR101082283B1 (en) * 2009-09-02 2011-11-09 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 Organic Light Emitting Display Device and Driving Method Thereof
KR101058108B1 (en) 2009-09-14 2011-08-24 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 Pixel circuit and organic light emitting display device using the same
US20110069089A1 (en) 2009-09-23 2011-03-24 Microsoft Corporation Power management for organic light-emitting diode (oled) displays
JP2011095720A (en) 2009-09-30 2011-05-12 Casio Computer Co Ltd Light-emitting apparatus, drive control method thereof, and electronic device
US8497828B2 (en) 2009-11-12 2013-07-30 Ignis Innovation Inc. Sharing switch TFTS in pixel circuits
JP2011145344A (en) 2010-01-12 2011-07-28 Seiko Epson Corp Electric optical apparatus, driving method thereof and electronic device
CA2692097A1 (en) 2010-02-04 2011-08-04 Ignis Innovation Inc. Extracting correlation curves for light emitting device
US8354983B2 (en) 2010-02-19 2013-01-15 National Cheng Kung University Display and compensation circuit therefor
KR101693693B1 (en) 2010-08-02 2017-01-09 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Pixel and Organic Light Emitting Display Device Using the same
US9351368B2 (en) 2013-03-08 2016-05-24 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for AMOLED displays
US20140368491A1 (en) 2013-03-08 2014-12-18 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for amoled displays
US9053665B2 (en) * 2011-05-26 2015-06-09 Innocom Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. Display device and control method thereof without flicker issues
US9466240B2 (en) 2011-05-26 2016-10-11 Ignis Innovation Inc. Adaptive feedback system for compensating for aging pixel areas with enhanced estimation speed
JP2014517940A (en) 2011-05-27 2014-07-24 イグニス・イノベイション・インコーポレーテッド System and method for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US9324268B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-04-26 Ignis Innovation Inc. Amoled displays with multiple readout circuits
US9747834B2 (en) 2012-05-11 2017-08-29 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits including feedback capacitors and reset capacitors, and display systems therefore
US9336717B2 (en) 2012-12-11 2016-05-10 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for AMOLED displays
US9721505B2 (en) 2013-03-08 2017-08-01 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for AMOLED displays

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See references of EP2715711A4 *

Cited By (107)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9472139B2 (en) 2003-09-23 2016-10-18 Ignis Innovation Inc. Circuit and method for driving an array of light emitting pixels
US9852689B2 (en) 2003-09-23 2017-12-26 Ignis Innovation Inc. Circuit and method for driving an array of light emitting pixels
USRE47257E1 (en) 2004-06-29 2019-02-26 Ignis Innovation Inc. Voltage-programming scheme for current-driven AMOLED displays
US9280933B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2016-03-08 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US10699624B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2020-06-30 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for programming, calibrating and/or compensating, and driving an LED display
US10012678B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2018-07-03 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for programming, calibrating and/or compensating, and driving an LED display
US10013907B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2018-07-03 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for programming, calibrating and/or compensating, and driving an LED display
US9275579B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2016-03-01 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US9970964B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2018-05-15 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for programming, calibrating and driving a light emitting device display
US10388221B2 (en) 2005-06-08 2019-08-20 Ignis Innovation Inc. Method and system for driving a light emitting device display
US10019941B2 (en) 2005-09-13 2018-07-10 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation technique for luminance degradation in electro-luminance devices
US10453397B2 (en) 2006-04-19 2019-10-22 Ignis Innovation Inc. Stable driving scheme for active matrix displays
US10127860B2 (en) 2006-04-19 2018-11-13 Ignis Innovation Inc. Stable driving scheme for active matrix displays
US9842544B2 (en) 2006-04-19 2017-12-12 Ignis Innovation Inc. Stable driving scheme for active matrix displays
US10325554B2 (en) 2006-08-15 2019-06-18 Ignis Innovation Inc. OLED luminance degradation compensation
US9530352B2 (en) 2006-08-15 2016-12-27 Ignis Innovations Inc. OLED luminance degradation compensation
US9418587B2 (en) 2009-06-16 2016-08-16 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation technique for color shift in displays
US10319307B2 (en) 2009-06-16 2019-06-11 Ignis Innovation Inc. Display system with compensation techniques and/or shared level resources
US10553141B2 (en) 2009-06-16 2020-02-04 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation technique for color shift in displays
US10679533B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2020-06-09 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US9786209B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2017-10-10 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US10996258B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2021-05-04 Ignis Innovation Inc. Defect detection and correction of pixel circuits for AMOLED displays
US10699613B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2020-06-30 Ignis Innovation Inc. Resetting cycle for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US10304390B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2019-05-28 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US9059117B2 (en) 2009-12-01 2015-06-16 Ignis Innovation Inc. High resolution pixel architecture
US10176736B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2019-01-08 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10032399B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2018-07-24 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US9881532B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2018-01-30 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and method for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10395574B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2019-08-27 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10089921B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2018-10-02 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US11200839B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2021-12-14 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10163401B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2018-12-25 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10971043B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2021-04-06 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and method for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US10573231B2 (en) 2010-02-04 2020-02-25 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extracting correlation curves for an organic light emitting device
US8994617B2 (en) 2010-03-17 2015-03-31 Ignis Innovation Inc. Lifetime uniformity parameter extraction methods
US10460669B2 (en) 2010-12-02 2019-10-29 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for thermal compensation in AMOLED displays
US9489897B2 (en) 2010-12-02 2016-11-08 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for thermal compensation in AMOLED displays
US9997110B2 (en) 2010-12-02 2018-06-12 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for thermal compensation in AMOLED displays
US10127846B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2018-11-13 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US10325537B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2019-06-18 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US10580337B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2020-03-03 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US9355584B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2016-05-31 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US9589490B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2017-03-07 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US10475379B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2019-11-12 Ignis Innovation Inc. Charged-based compensation and parameter extraction in AMOLED displays
US9799248B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2017-10-24 Ignis Innovation Inc. System and methods for extraction of threshold and mobility parameters in AMOLED displays
US9530349B2 (en) 2011-05-20 2016-12-27 Ignis Innovations Inc. Charged-based compensation and parameter extraction in AMOLED displays
US9978297B2 (en) 2011-05-26 2018-05-22 Ignis Innovation Inc. Adaptive feedback system for compensating for aging pixel areas with enhanced estimation speed
US9640112B2 (en) 2011-05-26 2017-05-02 Ignis Innovation Inc. Adaptive feedback system for compensating for aging pixel areas with enhanced estimation speed
US9466240B2 (en) 2011-05-26 2016-10-11 Ignis Innovation Inc. Adaptive feedback system for compensating for aging pixel areas with enhanced estimation speed
US10706754B2 (en) 2011-05-26 2020-07-07 Ignis Innovation Inc. Adaptive feedback system for compensating for aging pixel areas with enhanced estimation speed
US10417945B2 (en) 2011-05-27 2019-09-17 Ignis Innovation Inc. Systems and methods for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US9773439B2 (en) 2011-05-27 2017-09-26 Ignis Innovation Inc. Systems and methods for aging compensation in AMOLED displays
US10380944B2 (en) 2011-11-29 2019-08-13 Ignis Innovation Inc. Structural and low-frequency non-uniformity compensation
US10089924B2 (en) 2011-11-29 2018-10-02 Ignis Innovation Inc. Structural and low-frequency non-uniformity compensation
US10043448B2 (en) 2012-02-03 2018-08-07 Ignis Innovation Inc. Driving system for active-matrix displays
US9343006B2 (en) 2012-02-03 2016-05-17 Ignis Innovation Inc. Driving system for active-matrix displays
US9792857B2 (en) 2012-02-03 2017-10-17 Ignis Innovation Inc. Driving system for active-matrix displays
US10453394B2 (en) 2012-02-03 2019-10-22 Ignis Innovation Inc. Driving system for active-matrix displays
US9747834B2 (en) 2012-05-11 2017-08-29 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits including feedback capacitors and reset capacitors, and display systems therefore
US10176738B2 (en) 2012-05-23 2019-01-08 Ignis Innovation Inc. Display systems with compensation for line propagation delay
US9536460B2 (en) 2012-05-23 2017-01-03 Ignis Innovation Inc. Display systems with compensation for line propagation delay
US9741279B2 (en) 2012-05-23 2017-08-22 Ignis Innovation Inc. Display systems with compensation for line propagation delay
US9940861B2 (en) 2012-05-23 2018-04-10 Ignis Innovation Inc. Display systems with compensation for line propagation delay
US10140925B2 (en) 2012-12-11 2018-11-27 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for AMOLED displays
US9786223B2 (en) 2012-12-11 2017-10-10 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for AMOLED displays
US9336717B2 (en) 2012-12-11 2016-05-10 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for AMOLED displays
US10311790B2 (en) 2012-12-11 2019-06-04 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for amoled displays
US9685114B2 (en) 2012-12-11 2017-06-20 Ignis Innovation Inc. Pixel circuits for AMOLED displays
CN105210138A (en) * 2013-03-13 2015-12-30 伊格尼斯创新公司 Integrated compensation datapath
WO2014141148A1 (en) * 2013-03-13 2014-09-18 Ignis Innovation Inc. Integrated compensation datapath
US9536465B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-01-03 Ignis Innovation Inc. Re-interpolation with edge detection for extracting an aging pattern for AMOLED displays
US9818323B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-11-14 Ignis Innovation Inc. Re-interpolation with edge detection for extracting an aging pattern for AMOLED displays
US10198979B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-02-05 Ignis Innovation Inc. Re-interpolation with edge detection for extracting an aging pattern for AMOLED displays
US10460660B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-10-29 Ingis Innovation Inc. AMOLED displays with multiple readout circuits
US9997107B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-06-12 Ignis Innovation Inc. AMOLED displays with multiple readout circuits
US9721512B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-08-01 Ignis Innovation Inc. AMOLED displays with multiple readout circuits
US10867536B2 (en) 2013-04-22 2020-12-15 Ignis Innovation Inc. Inspection system for OLED display panels
CN103280183A (en) * 2013-05-31 2013-09-04 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 AMOLED pixel circuit and driving method
CN103280183B (en) * 2013-05-31 2015-05-20 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 AMOLED pixel circuit and driving method
US10600362B2 (en) 2013-08-12 2020-03-24 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation accuracy
US9437137B2 (en) 2013-08-12 2016-09-06 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation accuracy
US9990882B2 (en) 2013-08-12 2018-06-05 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation accuracy
US9761170B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2017-09-12 Ignis Innovation Inc. Correction for localized phenomena in an image array
US10186190B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2019-01-22 Ignis Innovation Inc. Correction for localized phenomena in an image array
US9741282B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2017-08-22 Ignis Innovation Inc. OLED display system and method
US10395585B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2019-08-27 Ignis Innovation Inc. OLED display system and method
US10439159B2 (en) 2013-12-25 2019-10-08 Ignis Innovation Inc. Electrode contacts
WO2015116187A1 (en) * 2014-01-31 2015-08-06 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Return path capacitor for connected devices
US10192479B2 (en) 2014-04-08 2019-01-29 Ignis Innovation Inc. Display system using system level resources to calculate compensation parameters for a display module in a portable device
JP2016038402A (en) * 2014-08-05 2016-03-22 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optic device, electronic equipment, and method for driving electro-optic device
US10152919B2 (en) 2014-08-06 2018-12-11 Seiko Epson Corporation Electro-optical device, electronic apparatus, and method of driving electro-optical device
US10769996B2 (en) 2014-08-06 2020-09-08 Seiko Epson Corporation Electro-optical device, electronic apparatus, and method of driving electro-optical device
US11335259B2 (en) 2014-08-06 2022-05-17 Seiko Epson Corporation Electro-optical device, electronic apparatus, and method of driving electro-optical device
JP2016038425A (en) * 2014-08-06 2016-03-22 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optic device, electronic equipment, and method for driving electro-optic device
US10181282B2 (en) 2015-01-23 2019-01-15 Ignis Innovation Inc. Compensation for color variations in emissive devices
US10311780B2 (en) 2015-05-04 2019-06-04 Ignis Innovation Inc. Systems and methods of optical feedback
US9947293B2 (en) 2015-05-27 2018-04-17 Ignis Innovation Inc. Systems and methods of reduced memory bandwidth compensation
US10403230B2 (en) 2015-05-27 2019-09-03 Ignis Innovation Inc. Systems and methods of reduced memory bandwidth compensation
US10339860B2 (en) 2015-08-07 2019-07-02 Ignis Innovation, Inc. Systems and methods of pixel calibration based on improved reference values
US10074304B2 (en) 2015-08-07 2018-09-11 Ignis Innovation Inc. Systems and methods of pixel calibration based on improved reference values
JP2017083799A (en) * 2015-10-30 2017-05-18 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optical device, electronic apparatus, and driving method of electro-optical device
US10388239B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-08-20 Apple Inc. Displays with series-connected switching transistors
US10121430B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2018-11-06 Apple Inc. Displays with series-connected switching transistors
US11187772B2 (en) 2016-07-19 2021-11-30 Hefei Xinsheng Optoelectronics Method for calibrating current measurement device, current measurement method and device, display device
US10607544B2 (en) 2016-09-23 2020-03-31 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Organic light-emitting display panel, organic light-emitting display device, data driver, and low power driving method
JP2018159928A (en) * 2018-05-07 2018-10-11 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus
US11984064B2 (en) 2020-08-12 2024-05-14 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display apparatus, its operating method, and electronic device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2945147A1 (en) 2015-11-18
US10978022B2 (en) 2021-04-13
US20240029686A1 (en) 2024-01-25
US20210280153A1 (en) 2021-09-09
US10290284B2 (en) 2019-05-14
CN106898307A (en) 2017-06-27
CN103597534A (en) 2014-02-19
US9881587B2 (en) 2018-01-30
JP2014522506A (en) 2014-09-04
CN103597534B (en) 2017-02-15
US11790868B2 (en) 2023-10-17
WO2012164474A3 (en) 2013-03-21
CN106898307B (en) 2021-04-27
EP2945147B1 (en) 2018-08-01
EP2715711A2 (en) 2014-04-09
EP3404646A1 (en) 2018-11-21
EP3404646B1 (en) 2019-12-25
US20180204541A1 (en) 2018-07-19
US20130100173A1 (en) 2013-04-25
EP2715711A4 (en) 2014-12-24
US20190266978A1 (en) 2019-08-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11790868B2 (en) Systems and methods for operating pixels in a display to mitigate image flicker
US11030949B2 (en) Systems and method for fast compensation programming of pixels in a display
US11244615B2 (en) Pixel circuits including feedback capacitors and reset capacitors, and display systems therefore
US8395567B2 (en) Display device and method of controlling the same
US8120555B2 (en) LED display with control circuit
US8305307B2 (en) Display device and method of driving the same
US8305308B2 (en) Display device and method of driving the same
US8305310B2 (en) Display device and method of controlling the same
WO2021153352A1 (en) Display device
CN115101011A (en) Pixel circuit configured to control light emitting element

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12792894

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2014513288

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2012792894

Country of ref document: EP